ltxmisc

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@1056 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

74 files changed, 11445 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/2in1.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/2in1.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..801f59f0789
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/2in1.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+% This LaTex Style File is for printing two pages on a single page (landscape)
+% Page numbers are at bottom. Header is blank.
+%
+% Author Sanjeev Saxena, ssax@computer.org
+% last modified on 23/July/2001 (prints title correctly with \maketitle)
+%
+%Usage 
+%\documentclass[10pt,landscape]{article} (or 11pt or 12pt)
+%  OR
+%\documentclass[10pt]{article} (or 11pt or 12pt)
+%\usepackage{2in1}
+%
+\pagestyle{plain}
+\newcount\evenpage
+\newcount\oddpage
+\twocolumn
+\def\@oddfoot{\evenpage=\thepage%
+\multiply\evenpage by 2%
+\oddpage=\the\evenpage%
+\advance\oddpage by -1%
+\hfil\the\oddpage\hfil\hfil\the\evenpage\hfil}%
+\def\@evenfoot{\evenpage=\thepage%
+\multiply\evenpage by 2%
+\oddpage=\the\evenpage%
+\advance\oddpage by -1%
+\hfil\the\oddpage\hfil\hfil\the\evenpage\hfil}%
+\textwidth 9.49in 
+\textheight 6.7in 
+\columnsep 0.9in
+\columnseprule 0.125pt
+\headheight 0cm 
+\topmargin 0in 
+\marginparwidth 0in 
+\marginparsep 0in 
+%\hoffset 0.1in %pageoffset is 1.0in by default
+\hoffset 0.05in % Corrected
+\voffset -0.5in %top margin space is 1.0in by default
+\oddsidemargin 0in 
+\evensidemargin 0in 
+\headsep 0cm 
+\topskip 0cm 
+%\parskip 0pt      %
+\parskip 0.15in       %
+\headsep 0pt    
+\special{papersize=11.69in,8.26in} %For use with dvips 
+\renewcommand\maketitle{\par
+\begingroup
+\renewcommand\thefootnote{\@fnsymbol\c@footnote}%
+\def\@makefnmark{\rlap{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}%
+\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent
+\hb@xt@1.8em{%
+\hss\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}##1}%
+\@maketitle
+\@thanks
+\endgroup
+\setcounter{footnote}{0}%
+\global\let\thanks\relax
+\global\let\maketitle\relax
+\global\let\@maketitle\relax
+\global\let\@thanks\@empty
+\global\let\@author\@empty
+\global\let\@date\@empty
+\global\let\@title\@empty
+\global\let\title\relax
+\global\let\author\relax
+\global\let\date\relax
+\global\let\and\relax
+}
+%
+% End of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/3parttable.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/3parttable.sty
new file mode 120000
index 00000000000..bff08a99507
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/3parttable.sty
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+threeparttable.sty
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/a4wide.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/a4wide.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9f651505d72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/a4wide.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+%NAME: a4wide.sty
+% "moretext" document style option.
+% Jean-Francois Lamy, July 86
+%
+% Redefines the margins so that they are more in line with 
+% what we are used to see.
+%
+% [Minimally modified for LaTeX2e, Alexander Holt, August 1994]
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{a4wide}[1994/08/30]
+\RequirePackage{a4}
+
+\ifcase \@ptsize
+    % mods for 10 pt
+    \oddsidemargin  0.15 in     %   Left margin on odd-numbered pages.
+    \evensidemargin 0.35 in     %   Left margin on even-numbered pages.
+    \marginparwidth 1 in        %   Width of marginal notes.
+    \oddsidemargin 0.25 in      %   Note that \oddsidemargin = \evensidemargin
+    \evensidemargin 0.25 in
+    \marginparwidth 0.75 in
+    \textwidth 5.875 in % Width of text line.
+\or % mods for 11 pt
+    \oddsidemargin 0.1 in      %   Left margin on odd-numbered pages.
+    \evensidemargin 0.15 in    %   Left margin on even-numbered pages.
+    \marginparwidth 1 in       %   Width of marginal notes.
+    \oddsidemargin 0.125 in    %   Note that \oddsidemargin = \evensidemargin
+    \evensidemargin 0.125 in
+    \marginparwidth 0.75 in
+    \textwidth 6.125 in % Width of text line.
+\or % mods for 12 pt
+    \oddsidemargin -10 pt      %   Left margin on odd-numbered pages.
+    \evensidemargin 10 pt      %   Left margin on even-numbered pages.
+    \marginparwidth 1 in       %   Width of marginal notes.
+    \oddsidemargin 0 in      %   Note that \oddsidemargin = \evensidemargin
+    \evensidemargin 0 in
+    \marginparwidth 0.75 in
+    \textwidth 6.375 true in % Width of text line.
+\fi
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/a5comb.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/a5comb.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5053eeaf6b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/a5comb.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%%  @LaTeX-style-file{
+%%%     author          = "Mario Wolczko",
+%%%     version         = "4",
+%%%     date            = "21 May 1992",
+%%%     time            = "20:50:55 BST",
+%%%     filename        = "a5comb.sty",
+%%%     email           = "mario@acm.org",
+%%%     codetable       = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%     keywords        = "LaTeX, A5 page size, page layout",
+%%%     supported       = "no",
+%%%     docstring       = "Sets page layout to A5 size, with equal
+%%%     spaces to left and right, and twice the amount of centre space
+%%%     (for comb-bound documents) and top:side:bottom space = 2:2:4.
+%%%     See also a5.sty, a4.sty",
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+%
+% This file is in the public domain
+%
+% based on ratios suggested by Dick Wakefield
+
+\headheight=12truept \headsep=18truept
+\topmargin= -35.62truept     %    Nominal distance from top of paper to top of page
+% top paper margin of 48.72pt
+% (between top of page and top of text, excluding header)
+\textwidth=313truept
+\evensidemargin=-18.12truept \oddsidemargin=-18.12truept
+\textheight=426truept % 10pt only (\baselineskip=12pt)
+%
+\footskip=36truept \footheight=12truept
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/abstbook.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/abstbook.cls
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ff699c941c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/abstbook.cls
@@ -0,0 +1,266 @@
+%
+%	This is second version of the class. It redefines Chapters 
+%	sections and subsections, in order to use the minitoc style!
+%
+%
+% DESCRIPTION:
+%
+%	-``Quick and dirty'' class file for ``book of abstracts''
+%	 (used for IWEPNM - Kirchberg 1997)
+%
+%	- It's getting less Quick and dirty, but it's far from beeing 
+%	what i want, should be much more flexible for that.
+%
+%	-Written by Havlik Denis (havlik@pap.univie.ac.at) 02/1997.
+%	-Based on the report class. 
+% 
+%	This .cls file has been written for the conference in Kirchberg.
+%	It has been designed to produce a4-size pages,
+%	which are later converted into a5. Output is double-sided.
+%
+%	Abstracts are suposed to be in separate files, with simple
+%	formating (title, name, adress, text).
+%
+%	As i have a feeling that many conferences need something
+%	like this booklet, i will try to document this file as good as 
+%	i can. In the case anybody is interesting to use this class,
+%	but neads more flexibility or new features, i would be pleased 
+%	to help. This is a first time ever that i write a Latex class,
+%	but i'm learning.   
+%
+%	Features: 
+%	-Conferences consist of days and sessions.
+%	-In every day there can be one or more sessions, in every
+%	 session there can be several abstracts. Abstracts appear
+%	 two on a page, with short name of the session, the number
+%	 of the abstract and an additional entry WRITTEN ON THE MARGIN. 
+%	-In the headings, day appears on the even, and session on the odd
+%	 pages. 
+%	-For every day, a table of abstracts is printed
+%	-names of the authors are automatically added to index of authors
+%	 (don't forget to run the ``makeindex''!!!) 
+%	
+% I would like to thank the ``\"Osterreichischen Fonds zur F\"orderung 
+% der wissenschaftlichen Forschung'' for financing my work 
+% under project Nr. +P10924-PHY. Furthermore, a Linux, and \TeX/\LaTeX 
+% comunity, for providing wonderfull free software, that i use for all my 
+% work. Special thanks to Jean-Pierre Drucbert 
+%					Havlik Denis 
+%
+% TODO: 
+%	1. redefine \titl, \name and \adr, so i can get automatic: 
+%	indexing of authors and automatic referencing of authors to adress
+%	2. automatic resizing of abstracts to fit other page-sizes, 
+%	(not only a4) and other margines etc.
+%	3. add formatting stuff like:
+%		 \newcommand{\titlstyle}{\bf \Large \MakeUppercase}
+%	with some logical names and use it consequently for all the macros
+%	in the whole class
+%	4. ?%
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesClass{abstbook}[1997/02/10 for typseting book of abstracts]
+\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\OptionNotUsed} % makes no sense to use it...
+% All other options go to ``report'' class.
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{report}}
+\ProcessOptions
+\LoadClass[a4,twoside]{report}
+\RequirePackage{makeidx} % neaded to make index
+\RequirePackage{graphicx} % neaded to input graphics into booklet.
+%\RequirePackage{minitoc}
+% page - size related stuff. Looks good on my printer...
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+%\setlength{\topmargin}{1.5cm}
+\setlength{\hoffset}{-0.8in}
+%\setlength{\voffset}{-1in} 
+\setlength{\textwidth}{16.5cm}
+\setlength{\textheight}{24.8cm}
+\setlength{\topskip}{0cm}
+\setlength{\footskip}{0cm}
+\setlength{\oddsidemargin}{1.5cm}
+\setlength{\evensidemargin}{1.5cm}
+\setlength{\marginparsep}{0.3cm}
+\setlength{\marginparwidth}{1.0 cm}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0cm}
+\pagestyle{myheadings} 		% to get the day - session in headings!
+
+% I had to redefine \chapter  because i have to use it, if i want
+% mini-tables-of-contents... 
+\renewcommand\chapter{\if@openright\cleardoublepage\else\clearpage\fi
+                    \global\@topnum\z@
+                    \@afterindentfalse
+                    \secdef\@chapter\@schapter}
+\def\@makechapterhead#1{\relax} 	%write nothing...
+\RequirePackage{minitoc}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{% this comes after \begin{document}
+		\makeindex 
+		\dominitoc 
+		\faketableofcontents}	
+
+\AtEndDocument{\printindex}	% dont forget to run the ``makeindex'' program!
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+%	COMMANDS
+%
+\newcounter{Cabstract}[section]
+\newsavebox{\ConferenceDay} % hier comes the name of the day
+\newsavebox{\SessionName}   % name of the session
+\newsavebox{\ShortSessionName}% short name of the session
+% Counters for days, sessions and abstracts.
+% hope this will work....
+
+\sbox{\ConferenceDay}{}
+\sbox{\SessionName}{}
+\markboth{\usebox{\ConferenceDay}}{\usebox{\SessionName}}
+
+\def\mtctitle{\relax}%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%  Command: 	\conferenceday
+%  Usage: 	\conferenceday{some day}
+%  Provides:	advances day-counter, adds the day-name to TOC 
+%		and clears the page		
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newcommand{\conferenceday}[1]{%
+	\chapter{#1}
+	{\Large \bf #1}\par 
+	\minitoc
+	\sbox{\ConferenceDay}{#1} 
+	\sbox{\SessionName}{#1}
+	}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%  Command:	\sessionname
+%  Usage: 	\sessionname{shortname}{longname}
+%  Provides:    advances session-counter, adds the session-name to TOC
+%		and clears the page
+%  Important:	I'm not using \section here. Instead, i try to emulate 
+%		the part that i nead. It worked with my version 
+%		of minitoc, but didn't work with an older version 
+%		we had at the university. Bad. Redefining \section 
+%		would be better, but i can't figure it out.
+%		Well, Jean-Pierre Drucbert <Jean-Pierre.Drucbert@onecert.fr>
+%		said it should be O.K., so be it. 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newcommand{\sessionname}[2]{%
+	\clearpage
+	\refstepcounter{section}
+	\sbox{\ShortSessionName}{#1}
+	\sbox{\SessionName}{#2}
+	\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\MakeUppercase{#2}}
+	}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Following definitions determine how to deal with the abstracts     %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% ABSTRACTS SHOULD BE IN SEPARATE FILES, FORMATED LIKE THIS:
+%
+% Abstract example: 
+%	\index{Name1} \index{Name2}... - this is nessesary for authornames 
+%					to appear in index!!!  
+%	\titl{Title of the abstract}
+%	\name{A. First$^1$, A. Second$^1$, A. Third$^2$}
+%	\adr{1~First address\\
+%	     2~Second addrass}
+%
+%	\begin{abstr}
+%	Abstracts text (in Latex notation). Most of the Latex commands 
+%	can be used here...
+%	\end{abstr}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
+% TO DO:
+% I would like to change \name and \adr in such a way that
+%
+%	\name[mark1]{name1}
+%	\name[mark2]{name2}
+%	\name[mark1]{name3}
+%	\adr[adr1]{adress1}
+%	\adr[adr2]{adress2}
+%
+%	produces the same result as one obtained in the previous example
+%	and automaticaly includes the names into index list...
+%	Unfortunately, i don't know how to do it.
+% !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%	COMMANDS TO BE USED IN ABSTRACTS:
+%
+% Title of the abstract
+\newcommand{\titl}[1]{\large \bf \MakeUppercase{#1}\par\medskip}
+% author(s) name(s)
+\newcommand{\name}[1]{\rm \normalsize #1\par\smallskip}
+% author(s) addres(es)
+\newcommand{\adr}[1]{\it \normalsize #1\par\smallskip}
+% enviroment ``abstr''
+\newenvironment{abstr}{\par\medskip \normalsize \rm}{\par\bigskip}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%	COMMANDS TO BE USED IN THE MAIN DOCUMENT
+%
+% Command: 	\loadabstr
+% Usage: 	\loadabstr[additional]{TOC-entry}{filename.tex}
+% Provides:	reserves 1/2 page for the abstract, loads the abstract 
+%		from the file ``filename.tex'', writes the ``TOC-entry''
+%		to table of contents, advances the abstracts-counter
+%		and writes the short name of the session, abstract-number
+%		and an additional entry to the margin. 
+% (We have used the additional entry for the time..)
+%usage: \loadabstr[additional]{toc-entry}{name.tex}
+\newcommand{\loadabstr}[3][\relax]{%
+	\stepcounter{Cabstract}
+	\par
+	\rule[-6cm]{0cm}{12cm}	% well, you might nead to change this
+				% if you change the size/format of the page
+	\marginpar{%
+		\large\centering
+		#1\par\smallskip
+		\usebox{\ShortSessionName}\par\smallskip
+		\arabic{Cabstract}}
+	  \IfFileExists{#3}{%
+	    \begin{minipage}{16.5cm} % this too...
+		\input{#3} 
+	    \end{minipage}}
+	    {File #3 not found}
+	\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}
+	}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%  Command:	\loadpsabstr
+%  Usage:	\loadpsabstr[additional]{toc-entry}{name.ps}{formating}
+%  Provides:	Some of our abstracts arrived as postscript or with s-mail
+%		This commands loads the postscript file, cuts part of it out
+%		and puts it on its place, just like \loadabstr does with 
+%		an latex file. Additional parameter goes directly to 
+%		``includegraphics'' (see explanation of graphicx package)
+%		try something like: scale=1, bb=2.5cm 16cm 19cm 28cm 
+\newcommand{\loadpsabstr}[4][\relax]{%
+	\stepcounter{Cabstract}
+	\par
+	\rule[-6cm]{0cm}{12cm}	% well, you might nead to change this
+				% if you change the size/format of the page
+	\marginpar{%
+		\large\centering
+		#1\par\smallskip
+		\usebox{\ShortSessionName}\par\smallskip
+		\arabic{Cabstract}}
+	  \begin{minipage}{16.5cm} % this too...
+	  \unitlength	1cm
+	  \IfFileExists{#3}{%
+	    \begin{picture}(16.5,12) % and this, too!
+	      \put(0,0){%
+	        \includegraphics[%
+		  angle=0, clip=true, #4]{#3}}
+	    \end{picture}}
+	    {File #3 not found!}
+	\end{minipage}
+	\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}
+	}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% end of the Kirchberg.cls
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/acromake.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/acromake.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9056d3ff4d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/acromake.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+%% 

+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%%

+%% This is file `acromake.sty', written on 

+%% on <1995/7/16> by Paul A. Thompson, Ph.D.

+%% 

+%% Copyright (C) 1995 Paul A. Thompson

+%% All rights reserved. 

+%%

+%% Advice and suggestions of D. Carlisle, D. Arseneau and P. Schmitt noted.

+%% Errors responsibility of author.

+%%

+%% This file requires LaTeX2e. 

+%% --------------------------- 

+%% 

+%% No permission is granted to modify this file. 

+%%

+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%%

+%% This algorithm is presented and discussed in TeX and TUG News, V4, #1.
+%% The algorithm as presented there has several small problems, which are
+%% solved here.
+%% 
+%% This file generates acronyms.  There are three parameters which may be

+%% set by the user

+%% 1. To generate an acronym

+%%    \acromk{ANSA}{{\tt ANSA}}{another nasty stupid acronym}

+%%

+%%    The first argument is the name used in text to implement the acronym.

+%%    The second argument is the name printed in the text when the acronym

+%%    is used.  The final argument is the full, non-acronymized version.

+%%

+%%    So, if there was an acronym 

+%%    \acromake{ANSA}{{\tt ANSA}}{another nasty stupid acronym}

+%%    it could be used as 

+%%

+%%    \ANSA is a new approach to the use of \ANSA, where \ANSA is ...

+%% 

+%%    This would result in
+%%
+%%    another nasty stupid acronym ({\tt ANSA}) is a new approach to 

+%%    the use of {\tt ANSA}, where {\tt ANSA} is ...

+%%    

+%% 2. To use the acronym

+%%    here \ANSA whatever {foo}lish use of acronym you wish

+%%    This will generate the following:

+%%      Usage number           Resolved text

+%%           1              another nasty stupid acronym (ANSA) 

+%%           2              ANSA (page 2) 

+%%           3 (and beyond) ANSA

+%%

+%% 3. The following may be set by the user:

+%%    ACRcnta  - count of uses of acronym macro which will be in full form  

+%%               (default is 1)

+%%    ACRcntb  - count of uses of acronym macro which will include page of

+%%               acronym def (default is 1 reference, or ACRcntb-ACRcnta)

+%%    useACRlb - should the page reference be used - 1-yes, 0-no

+%%

+%% For every acronym, the macro generates the acronym macro and a macro which

+%% acts like a counter for acronym use.  Since counters are quite rare, it is

+%% not responsible to use a counter for every acronym - rather, a macro is

+%% generated which fills this function.  The acronym macro is called \foo,

+%% while the counter macro is called \fooz.  Thus, I would avoid calling any

+%% acronym fooz, as this may be confoozing.

+%% 

+%% The .sty file generates 1 counter if it is included.  For each acronym

+%% specified, the .sty file generates two macros, 1 for the acronym, and 1 for

+%% the count of acronym use

+%%

+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

+%%

+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%                                         % 1

+\RequirePackage{xspace}

+\newcommand{\pv}{}     \newcounter{util}

+\newcommand{\ACRcnta}{1}%  full acronym generations

+\newcommand{\ACRcntb}{2}%  ACRcntb - ACRcnta = acronym + page number

+\newcommand{\addtomacro}[2]{% % like \addtocounter, but for a macro

+   \setcounter{util}{#1}\addtocounter{util}{#2}\xdef#1{\theutil}}%

+\newcommand{\acromake}[3]{%

+   \ifnum\ACRcnta<1\renewcommand{\ACRcnta}{1}\fi%

+   \expandafter\gdef\csname#1z\endcsname{0}% count occurrences

+   \expandafter\newcommand\csname#1\endcsname{%

+      \ifnum\csname#1z\endcsname=0\label{acro:#1}\fi%

+      \expandafter\addtomacro\expandafter{\csname#1z\endcsname}{1}%

+      #3 (#2)% expansion and acronym printed here   

+      \ifnum\csname#1z\endcsname=\ACRcnta%

+        \expandafter\renewcommand\csname#1\endcsname{%

+          \expandafter\addtomacro\expandafter{\csname#1z\endcsname}{1}%

+          \renewcommand{\pv}{ (see Page \pageref{acro:#1})}%

+          \ifnum\csname#1z\endcsname>\ACRcntb%

+            \renewcommand{\pv}{#2}%

+          \else%

+            \ifnum\ACRcntb=0%

+              \renewcommand{\pv}{#2}%

+            \else%

+              \ifnum\thepage=0\pageref{acro:#1}%

+                \renewcommand{\pv}{#2}%

+              \else%

+                \renewcommand{\pv}{#2\ (see Page \pageref{acro:#1})}%

+              \fi%

+            \fi%

+          \fi%

+          \pv\xspace%

+        }%

+      \fi%

+      \xspace}%

+}

+

+   
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/advdate.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/advdate.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e15add6d3d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/advdate.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% Advance Date Package for LaTeX2e                                       %%
+%% (C) Z. Wagner -- Ice Bear Soft, 20 Oct 1996, <wagner@mbox.cesnet.cz>   %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% This package contains macros which can add specified number of days    %%
+%% to the current date (as specified in \today) and print it. Some other  %%
+%% macros are also provided. It is intended for use e.g. in invoices      %%
+%% payable within 14 days from today etc.                                 %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% Macros with one default argument [in square brackets]                  %%
+%% \AdvanceDate   Default: [1]                                            %%
+%%      Advances date the specified number of days and sets the result    %%
+%%      to \today                                                         %%
+%% \DayAfter      Default: [1]                                            %%
+%%      Advances date by call to \AdvanceDate, prints \today and restores %%
+%%      the oroginal value of \today                                      %%
+%% \SaveDate      Default: [\s@v@dT@d@y]                                  %%
+%%      Saves \today into the specified macro                             %%
+%% \SetDate       Default: [\s@v@dT@d@y]                                  %%
+%%      Sets the date stored in \today. The argument must be in form:     %%
+%%      [dd/mm/yyyy] and may be present in a macro because the argument   %%
+%%      is always expanded before use. The value saved by \SaveDate can   %%
+%%      be used here.                                                     %%
+%%                                                                        %%
+%% Macros with one mandatory argument                                     %%
+%% \ThisDay     sets \day                                                 %%
+%% \ThisMonth   sets \month                                               %%
+%% \ThisYear    sets \year                                                %%
+%% \AdvMonth    advances \month and fixes it                              %%
+%% \AdvYear     advances \year                                            %%
+%%                                                                        %%
+%% Macros without arguments                                               %%
+%% \FixMonth    fixes \today so that 0 < \month < 13                      %%
+%% \FixDate     fixes \today so that it is valid                          %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{advdate}[1996/10/20 Advance Date Package]
+
+% KH code
+
+\newcount\r@k  \newcount\un@r
+\newcount\m@l  \m@l31
+\newcount\m@s  \m@s30
+\newcount\M@s
+
+\newcommand\is@LeapYear[1][\year]{\r@k#1\un@r\r@k
+  \divide\r@k4\multiply\r@k4\advance\r@k-\un@r
+  \ifnum\r@k=0%
+    \divide\un@r100\r@k\un@r\multiply\un@r100\advance\un@r-#1%
+    \ifnum\un@r=0%
+      \un@r\r@k \divide\un@r4\multiply\un@r4\advance\un@r-\r@k
+      \un@r\ifnum\un@r=0 29\else 28\fi
+    \else
+      \un@r 29%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \un@r 28%
+  \fi
+  \r@k 337\advance\r@k\un@r}
+
+\newcommand\m@sic{\ifcase \month \or \m@l \or \un@r \or \m@l \or \m@s \or \m@l \or \m@s
+  \or \m@l \or \m@l \or \m@s \or \m@l \or \m@s \or \m@l \fi}
+
+\newcommand\FixMonth{%
+  \L@@p \ifnum\month<1 \advance\year\m@ne \advance\month12 \is@LeapYear \repeat
+  \L@@p \ifnum\month>12 \advance\year\@ne \advance\month-12 \is@LeapYear \repeat}
+
+\newcommand\FixDate{%
+  \FixMonth \is@LeapYear
+  \l@@p \ifnum\day<1 \Pr@vD@y \repeat
+  \l@@p \M@s\m@sic \ifnum\day>\M@s \N@xtD@y \repeat
+}
+
+% We need a nested \loop and the user might call the macros from his/her \loop
+
+\def\L@@p#1\repeat{\def\It@r@te{#1\relax \expandafter\It@r@te\fi}\It@r@te
+  \let\It@r@te\relax}
+
+\def\l@@p#1\repeat{\def\it@r@te{#1\relax \expandafter\it@r@te\fi}\it@r@te
+  \let\it@r@te\relax}
+
+\def\Pr@vD@y{%
+  \ifnum\day<-366
+    \ifnum\month>2
+      \advance\day\r@k \advance\year\m@ne \is@LeapYear
+    \else
+      \advance\year\m@ne \is@LeapYear \advance\day\r@k
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \advance\month\m@ne \FixMonth
+    \advance\day\m@sic
+  \fi}
+
+\def\N@xtD@y{%
+  \ifnum\day>366
+    \ifnum\month>2
+      \advance\year\@ne \is@LeapYear \advance\day-\r@k
+    \else
+      \advance\day-\r@k \advance\year\@ne \is@LeapYear
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \advance\day-\M@s \advance\month\@ne \FixMonth
+  \fi}
+
+\newcommand\AdvanceDate[1][\@ne]{\advance\day#1 \FixDate}
+
+\newcommand\DayAfter[1][\@ne]{{\AdvanceDate[#1]\today}}
+
+\newcommand\SaveDate[1][\s@v@dT@d@y]{%
+  \expandafter \expandafter \expandafter \expandafter
+  \expandafter \expandafter \expandafter \edef
+  \expandafter \expandafter \expandafter \expandafter
+  \expandafter \expandafter \expandafter #1\expandafter
+  \expandafter \expandafter \expandafter
+  \expandafter \expandafter \expandafter
+  {\expandafter \expandafter \expandafter \number
+    \expandafter \expandafter \expandafter \day
+    \expandafter \expandafter \expandafter /\expandafter \number
+    \expandafter \month \expandafter /\number \year}}
+
+\newcommand\SetDate[1][\s@v@dT@d@y]{\edef\d@t@{#1}%
+  \expandafter\t@d@y\d@t@\t@d@y\FixDate}
+
+\def\t@d@y#1/#2/#3\t@d@y{\day#1 \month#2 \year#3 \relax}
+
+\newcommand\ThisDay[1]{\day#1 \relax}
+\newcommand\ThisMonth[1]{\month#1 \relax}
+\newcommand\ThisYear[1]{\year#1 \relax}
+\newcommand\AdvMonth[1]{\advance\month#1 \FixMonth}
+\newcommand\AdvYear[1]{\advance\year#1 \relax}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/anonchap.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/anonchap.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8b2101e8181
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/anonchap.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+% anonchap.sty
+%
+% Provides commands to make \chapter typeset like \section
+% DO NOT USE WITH THE TOCBIBIND PACKAGE (which also supplies these commands)
+%
+% author: Peter Wilson (CUA)
+%         (now at peter.r.wilson@boeing.com)
+% Copyright 1996
+% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License
+%
+%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{anonchap}[2000/04/01 v1.1 typeset chapter like section]
+
+\newcommand{\simplechapter}[1][\@empty]{%
+  \let\@tbiold@makechapterhead\@makechapterhead
+  \renewcommand{\@makechapterhead}[1]{%
+    \vspace*{50\p@}%
+    {\parindent \z@ \raggedright
+     \normalfont
+     \interlinepenalty\@M
+     \Huge\bfseries #1\space\thechapter\simplechapterdelim\space
+       ##1\par\nobreak
+     \vskip 40\p@
+  }}
+}
+
+\newcommand{\restorechapter}{%
+  \let\@makechapterhead\@tbiold@makechapterhead
+}
+
+\newcommand{\simplechapterdelim}{}
+
+\endinput
+
+% Usage:
+% \simplechapter[<name>] and \simplechapterdelim{<delim>} act together
+% so that any subsequent \chapter commands, for example \chapter{First}
+% ... \chapter{Second}...,
+% will be typeset in the style of a \section (or numbered \chapter*) as:
+% <name> 1<delim> First
+% ...
+% <name> 2<delim> Second
+%
+% A subsequent \restorechapter command will reset the \chapter typesetting
+% back to its default style.
+%
+% Note that the argument to \simplechapter is optional, and that by default
+% \simplechapterdelim is defined as \newcommand{\simplechapterdelim}{}.
+%
+% Extending the above example:
+% \simplechapter
+% \chapter{First}
+% ...
+% \renewcommand{\simplechapterdelim}{:}
+% \chapter{Second}
+% ...
+% \restorechapter   % restore before issuing a modified \simplechapter
+% \simplechapter[Chap]
+% \chapter{Third}
+% ...
+% \restorechapter
+% \chapter{Fourth}
+% ...
+% Will be typeset as:
+% 1 First
+% ...
+% 2: Second
+% ...
+% Chap 3: Third
+% ...
+% Chapter 4
+% Fourth
+% ...
+%
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/beletter.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/beletter.cls
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2158efddf95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/beletter.cls
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+%%%%%%%%%% beletter.cls %%%%%%%%%%
+% This file is public domain
+% This code is unsupported, and comes with no warranty.
+% This class was written by James Kilfiger and Frank Lenaerts, to meet
+% the specifications for formatting Belgium letters recommended by
+% Frank's wife.
+% It can be used in place of the standard LaTeX class
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesClass{beletter}[1999/06/05 Belgium Letter Class]
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{letter}}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+\LoadClass{letter}
+% changed the opening
+\renewcommand*{\opening}[1]{%
+  \thispagestyle{firstpage}%
+  \ifx\@empty\fromaddress
+  \else  %if there is a from address
+    \noindent\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}%
+      \fromaddress
+    \end{tabular}\par%
+  \fi 
+  \noindent\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}%
+    \toname\\ \toaddress
+  \end{tabular}\par
+  {\raggedleft\@date\par}%  Put the date on a line of it's own
+%    \@date\par%
+  \vspace{2\parskip}%
+  #1\par\nobreak
+  \vspace{2\parskip}%
+}
+
+%%% Change these!!, or let babel change them for you.
+\renewcommand*{\ccname}{cc}
+\renewcommand*{\enclname}{}
+\renewcommand*{\pagename}{}
+\renewcommand*{\headtoname}{}
+
+% changed the closing
+\renewcommand{\closing}[1]{\par\nobreak\vspace{\parskip}%
+  \stopbreaks
+  \vspace{2\parskip}%
+  \vspace{2\parskip}%
+  \noindent
+%  \ifx\@empty\fromaddress\else
+%  \hspace*{\longindentation}\fi
+  \parbox{\indentedwidth}{\raggedright
+       \ignorespaces #1\\[6\medskipamount]%
+       \ifx\@empty\fromsig
+           \fromname
+       \else \fromsig \fi\strut}%
+   \par}
+
+\renewcommand*{\cc}[1]{%
+  \par\noindent
+  \parbox[t]{\textwidth}{%
+    \@hangfrom{\normalfont\ccname}%
+    \ignorespaces #1\strut}\par}
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/bibcheck.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/bibcheck.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bc7c2bbdc7c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/bibcheck.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+%
+% bibcheck.sty 
+%
+% Copyright (c) 2001, Radhakrishnan CV <cvr@river-valley.com>
+%                     Rajagopal CV <cvr3@river-valley.com>
+%                     http://www.river-valley.com
+%
+% River Valley Technologies, Cotton Hills
+% Trivandrum, India 695034
+%
+% Tel: +91 471 233 7501
+%
+% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%
+% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+% GNU General Public License for more details.
+% 
+% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+% along with this program (gpl.txt); if not, write to the Free
+% Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston,
+% MA  02111-1307, USA.
+%
+% $Id: gpl,v 1.1 2001/02/07 11:30:43 cvr Exp $
+%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\def\Fileversion$#1: #2 ${\gdef\fileversion{#2}}
+\def\Filedate$#1: #2 #3 ${\gdef\filedate{#2}}
+\Fileversion$Revision: 1.1 $
+\Filedate$Date: 2001/02/07 11:30:43 $
+\ProvidesPackage{bibcheck}
+   [\filedate\space\fileversion\space check uncited bibitems (CVR)]
+\PackageWarningNoLine{bibcheck}
+   {****************************************\MessageBreak
+    Package bibcheck v,\fileversion\space loaded\MessageBreak
+    [check uncited bibitems (CVR)]\MessageBreak
+    ****************************************}
+
+\newwrite\uncitedwrite
+\immediate\openout\uncitedwrite=\jobname.uncited
+\def\definecitelabel#1{\expandafter\gdef\csname CVRBIB#1\endcsname{1}}
+\def\@checkbiblabel#1{%
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname CVRBIB#1\endcsname\relax
+    \typeout{*******************************************************}
+    \typeout{This bibitem [\Xbiblabel] with KEY [#1] is NOT CITED}
+    \typeout{*******************************************************}
+    \immediate\write\uncitedwrite{Bibitem [\Xbiblabel] with key [#1] not cited}
+    \immediate\write\uncitedwrite{}
+    \else \relax
+%   \typeout{**********************************************************}
+%   \typeout{This bibitem with LABEL [#1] is cited in the body text}
+%   \typeout{**********************************************************}
+  \fi} 
+
+\def\@citex[#1]#2{%
+  \let\@citea\@empty
+  \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do
+    {\@citea\def\@citea{,\penalty\@m\ }%
+     \definecitelabel{\@citeb}%
+     \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}%
+     \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi
+     \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}%
+       \G@refundefinedtrue
+       \@latex@warning
+         {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}%
+       {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}}
+
+\def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{\item[\@biblabel{#1}\hfill]\if@filesw
+      {\def\Xbiblabel{#1}\@checkbiblabel{#2}%
+       \let\protect\noexpand
+       \immediate
+       \write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{#2}{#1}}}\fi\ignorespaces}
+\def\@bibitem#1{\item\if@filesw
+         \def\Xbiblabel{\the\value{\@listctr}}%
+         \@checkbiblabel{#1}%
+         \immediate\write\@auxout
+       {\string\bibcite{#1}{\the\value{\@listctr}}}\fi\ignorespaces}
+
+\endinput
+
+%%
+%% End of package bibcheck.sty
+%%
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/block.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/block.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ab1b7ecf6fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/block.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/01] \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+
+\renewcommand*{\opening}[1]{\ifx\@empty\fromaddress
+  \thispagestyle{firstpage}%
+    {%\raggedleft
+     \@date\par}%
+  \else  % home address
+    \thispagestyle{empty}%
+    {%\raggedleft\begin{tabular}{l@{}}\ignorespaces
+      \fromaddress \\*[2\parskip]%
+      \@date %\end{tabular}
+    \par}%
+  \fi
+  \vspace{2\parskip}%
+  {\raggedright \toname \\ \toaddress \par}%
+  \vspace{2\parskip}%
+  #1\par\nobreak}
+\renewcommand{\closing}[1]{\par\nobreak\vspace{\parskip}%
+  \stopbreaks
+  \noindent
+  \ifx\@empty\fromaddress\else
+  %\hspace*{\longindentation}
+  \fi
+  %\parbox{\indentedwidth}
+      {\raggedright
+       \ignorespaces #1\\[6\medskipamount]%
+       \ifx\@empty\fromsig
+           \fromname
+       \else \fromsig \fi\strut}%
+   \par}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `block.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/bold-extra.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/bold-extra.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..345e75c6209
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/bold-extra.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+% bold-extra.sty - a jiffy to provide access (in latex) to (some of)
+% the fonts in ctan directory fonts/cm/mf-extra/bold
+%
+% by robin fairbairns, rf10@cam.ac.uk November 2001
+%
+% this package is provided under the provisions of the latex project
+% public licence, http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%
+% this packages provides font shapes to support bold small caps and tt
+% text.  there is a choice of bold tt fonts, which are selected by
+% package options cmbtt and cmttb (this reflects the confusingly
+% similar font names).  the default (based on the author's estimation
+% of the fonts' relative merits) is cmttb.
+%
+% to use these fonts you need their metafont sources available to your
+% tex system (as far as i know, there are no type 1 versions of the
+% fonts available yet).  place them in an appropriate place under
+% fonts/source in your tds texmf tree; place this file somewhere like
+% tex/latex/misc in your tree.  see
+% http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=instpackages+wherefiles
+% for more details.
+
+\ProvidesPackage{bold-extra}[2001/11/13 v0.1 Use fonts from cm/mf-extra/bold]
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+
+\newif\if@cmttb
+\DeclareOption{cmttb}{\@cmttbtrue}
+\DeclareOption{cmbtt}{\@cmttbfalse}
+\ExecuteOptions{cmttb}
+\ProcessOptions
+
+% declare bold small caps font
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{b}{sc}
+   {
+    <5><6><7><8><9><10><12><10.95><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmbcsc10
+    }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{sc}
+   {<->ssub*cmr/b/sc}{}
+
+% declare bold tt font: note, we use cmttb10 by default rather than
+% the cmbtt series (which seem over-bold to me)
+\if@cmttb
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{b}{n}
+   {
+    <5><6><7><8><9><10><12><10.95><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmttb10
+    }{}
+\else
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{b}{n}
+   {
+    <5><6><7><8>cmbtt8%
+    <9>cmbtt9%
+    <10><12><10.95><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmbtt10
+    }{}
+\fi
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{bx}{n}
+   {<->ssub*cmtt/b/n}{}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/boxedminipage.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/boxedminipage.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b74368fa7b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/boxedminipage.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%%  @LaTeX-style-file{
+%%%     author          = "Mario Wolczko",
+%%%     version         = "2",
+%%%     date            = "21 May 1992",
+%%%     time            = "20:55:01 BST",
+%%%     filename        = "boxedminipage.sty",
+%%%     email           = "mario@acm.org",
+%%%     codetable       = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%     keywords        = "LaTeX, minipage, framebox",
+%%%     supported       = "no",
+%%%     docstring       = "LaTeX document-style option which defines
+%%%     the boxedminipage environment -- just like minipage, but with
+%%%     a box around it.",
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+%
+% This file is in the public domain
+%
+% The thickness of the rules around the box is controlled by
+% \fboxrule, and the distance between the rules and the edges of the
+% inner box is governed by \fboxsep.
+%
+% This code is based on Lamport's minipage code.
+%
+% Fixed, 7 Jun 89 by Jerry Leichter
+%	Leave \fboxsep worth of separation at top and bottom, not just at
+%	the sides!
+%
+\def\boxedminipage{\@ifnextchar [{\@iboxedminipage}{\@iboxedminipage[c]}}
+
+\def\@iboxedminipage[#1]#2{\leavevmode \@pboxswfalse
+  \if #1b\vbox
+    \else \if #1t\vtop
+	     \else \ifmmode \vcenter
+		       \else \@pboxswtrue $\vcenter
+		    \fi
+	  \fi
+  \fi\bgroup % start of outermost vbox/vtop/vcenter
+    \hsize #2
+    \hrule\@height\fboxrule
+    \hbox\bgroup % inner hbox
+      \vrule\@width\fboxrule \hskip\fboxsep \vbox\bgroup % innermost vbox
+	\vskip\fboxsep
+	\advance\hsize -2\fboxrule \advance\hsize-2\fboxsep
+	\textwidth\hsize \columnwidth\hsize
+	\@parboxrestore
+	\def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}\def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}\c@mpfootnote\z@
+	\let\@footnotetext\@mpfootnotetext
+	\let\@listdepth\@mplistdepth \@mplistdepth\z@
+	\@minipagerestore\@minipagetrue
+	\everypar{\global\@minipagefalse\everypar{}}}
+
+\def\endboxedminipage{%
+	\par\vskip-\lastskip
+	\ifvoid\@mpfootins\else
+	  \vskip\skip\@mpfootins\footnoterule\unvbox\@mpfootins\fi
+	\vskip\fboxsep
+      \egroup % ends the innermost \vbox
+      \hskip\fboxsep \vrule\@width\fboxrule
+    \egroup % ends the \hbox
+    \hrule\@height\fboxrule
+  \egroup% ends the vbox/vtop/vcenter
+  \if@pboxsw $\fi}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/braket.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/braket.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5d777b9fba0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/braket.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+% braket.sty          Macros for Dirac bra-ket <|> notation and sets {|}
+% Donald Arseneau     asnd@triumf.ca     Last modified 05-May-2005.
+% This is free, unencumbered, unsupported software.
+%
+% Commands defined are:
+% \bra{ }   \ket{ }   \braket{ }   \set{ }    (small versions)
+% \Bra{ }   \Ket{ }   \Braket{ }   \Set{ }    (expanding versions)
+% 
+% The "small versions" use fixed-size brackets independent of their
+% contents, whereas the "expanding versions" make the brackets and 
+% vertical lines expand to envelop their contents (internally using 
+% the \left and \right commands).  You should use the vertical bar
+% character "|" to input any extra vertical lines.  In \Braket these
+% vertical lines will expand to match the arguments, and in \Set the
+% first vertical will expand.  E.g.,
+%
+%   \Braket{ \phi | \frac{\partial^2}{\partial t^2} | \psi }
+%   \Set{ x\in\mathbf{R}^2 | 0<{|x|}<5 }
+%
+% Likewise, you may make an expandable double-bar using either
+% the "\|" command or its local alias "||".
+%
+% NOT defined is "\ketbra" (for projection operators) because I prefer
+% \ket{ } \bra{ }.
+%
+% Because each definition is so small, it makes no sense to have a 
+% complicated generic version for many bracket styles.  Instead, 
+% you can just copy the definitions and change \langle or \rangle,
+% < and > to what you like.
+%
+\def\bra#1{\mathinner{\langle{#1}|}}
+\def\ket#1{\mathinner{|{#1}\rangle}}
+\def\braket#1{\mathinner{\langle{#1}\rangle}}
+\def\Bra#1{\left<#1\right|}
+\def\Ket#1{\left|#1\right>}
+{\catcode`\|=\active 
+  \gdef\Braket#1{\begingroup
+     \ifx\SavedDoubleVert\relax
+       \let\SavedDoubleVert\|\let\|\BraDoubleVert
+     \fi
+     \mathcode`\|32768\let|\BraVert
+     \left<{#1}\right>\endgroup}
+}
+\def\BraVert{\@ifnextchar|{\|\@gobble}% turn || into \|
+     {\egroup\,\mid@vertical\,\bgroup}}
+\def\BraDoubleVert{\egroup\,\mid@dblvertical\,\bgroup}
+\let\SavedDoubleVert\relax
+
+% The \mid@vertical is \vrule with ordinary TeX but \middle| in eTeX.
+% We always avoid a \mathchoice in making the inner vertical lines.  
+% Note that \right>, prints the same as \right\rangle but is faster.  
+%
+% \def\ketbra#1#2{\ket{#1}\bra{#2}}
+% \def\Ketbra#1#2{\left|{#1}\vphantom{#2}\right>\left<{#2}\vphantom{#1}\right|}
+
+% \Set{...|...} Only the first | is treated specially.
+{\catcode`\|=\active
+  \gdef\set#1{\mathinner{\lbrace\,{\mathcode`\|32768\let|\midvert #1}\,\rbrace}}
+  \gdef\Set#1{\left\{
+     \ifx\SavedDoubleVert\relax \let\SavedDoubleVert\|\fi
+     \:{\let\|\SetDoubleVert
+     \mathcode`\|32768\let|\SetVert
+     #1}\:\right\}}
+}
+\def\midvert{\egroup\mid\bgroup}
+\def\SetVert{\@ifnextchar|{\|\@gobble}% turn || into \|
+    {\egroup\;\mid@vertical\;\bgroup}}
+\def\SetDoubleVert{\egroup\;\mid@dblvertical\;\bgroup}
+
+% If the user is using e-TeX with its \middle primitive, use that for
+% verticals instead of \vrule.
+%
+\begingroup
+ \edef\@tempa{\meaning\middle}
+ \edef\@tempb{\string\middle}
+\expandafter \endgroup \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \def\mid@vertical{\middle|}
+ \def\mid@dblvertical{\middle\SavedDoubleVert}
+\else
+ \def\mid@vertical{\mskip1mu\vrule\mskip1mu}
+ \def\mid@dblvertical{\mskip1mu\vrule\mskip2.5mu\vrule\mskip1mu}
+\fi
+
+% May 2005: Double verticals; tweak spacing.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/breakcites.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/breakcites.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f1e8b9bd268
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/breakcites.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+% breakcites
+% Style file to allow citations to be broken across lines.
+% - Don Hosek   3/14/89 (LaTeX209-Version)
+% - Leo Broska 02/20/97 (LaTeX-2e-Version)
+%
+\def\@citex[#1]#2{%
+  \let\@citea\@empty
+  \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do
+    {\@citea\def\@citea{,\penalty\@m\ }%
+     \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+     \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi
+     \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}%
+       \G@refundefinedtrue
+       \@latex@warning
+         {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}%
+       {\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}{#1}}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/captdef.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/captdef.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b4dbcb546aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/captdef.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+%
+%   captdef.sty: a trivial package to define captions that don't have
+%   to be in floats.
+%
+% Author: Robin Fairbairns <rf10@cam.ac.uk>
+%         Conceived ages ago, but written 1998/12/17
+%
+%   This program can redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+%   of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+%   archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+%   version 1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%
+% Usage: \DeclareCaption{command}{counter}
+%
+% declare `command' to produce a caption which uses `counter' for its
+% numbering.
+%
+% The package then goes on to use this command to declare the most
+% commonly required pair of non-float captions, \figcaption and
+% \tabcaption
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{captdef}[1998/12/17 non-floating captions]
+
+\newcommand{\DeclareCaption}[2]{%
+  \def#1{\def\@captype{#2}\caption}%
+}
+
+\DeclareCaption{\figcaption}{figure}
+\DeclareCaption{\tabcaption}{table}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/chbibref.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/chbibref.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..99bcfc74171
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/chbibref.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+% chbibref.sty   Change the Bibliography/References heading
+%
+% author: Peter Wilson (CUA)
+%         (now at peter.r.wilson@boeing.com)
+% Copyright Peter Wilson, 2001
+% Released under the Latex Project Public License
+%
+% Usage instructions are at the end of this file.
+%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{chbibref}[2001/03/07 v1.0 change Bibliography/References heading]
+
+\newcommand{\setbibref}[1]{%
+  \@ifundefined{refname}{}{\renewcommand{\refname}{#1}}
+  \@ifundefined{bibname}{}{\renewcommand{\bibname}{#1}}
+}
+
+\endinput
+%
+%    In the article class the title text printed by 
+% \begin{thebibliography} is given by the value of \refname
+% (default References), while in the report and chapter 
+% classes the text is given by the value of \bibname 
+% (default Bibliography).
+%
+%    The command \setbibref{name} will set the title text for the 
+% Bibliography or the References to `name' for at least the article, 
+% report and book standard LaTeX classes, without having to be
+% concerned which class is being used.
+%
+%    If you are using the babel package, put \setbibref{...} after
+% the \begin{document}.
+%
+% Peter W.
+% 2001/03/07
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/chngcntr.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/chngcntr.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e1a6de835cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/chngcntr.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+% chngcntr.sty
+%
+% Provides commands to change the resetting of counters.
+% Instructions for use are at the end of this file.
+%
+% author: Peter Wilson (CUA)
+%         (now at peter.r.wilson@boeing.com)
+% Released under the Latex Project Public License
+%
+%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{chngcntr}[2001/03/30 v1.0 change counter resetting]
+%
+% This package uses David Carlisle's \@removefromreset command as
+% specified in the remreset package available from CTAN as
+% macros/latex/contrib/supported/carlisle/remreset.sty
+% It is \provided here as a convenience to the user, and with
+% David Carlisle's permission.
+% START OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE
+\providecommand{\@removefromreset}[2]{{%
+  \expandafter\let\csname c@#1\endcsname\@removefromreset
+  \def\@elt##1{%
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname c@##1\endcsname\@removefromreset
+    \else
+      \noexpand\@elt{##1}%
+    \fi}%
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname cl@#2\endcsname{%
+    \csname cl@#2\endcsname}}}
+% END OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE
+
+%%\@ifbothc@t@s{<package>}{<counter>}{<within>}{<code when both are counters>}
+\newcommand{\@ifbothc@t@s}[4]{%
+  \@ifundefined{c@#2}{% counter undefined
+    \PackageError{#1}{#2 is not a counter}{\@eha}}%
+  {% else counter is defined
+    \@ifundefined{c@#3}{% within undefined
+      \PackageError{#1}{#3 is not a counter}{\@eha}}%
+    {% else both counter and within  are defined
+     #4}}}
+
+%%\counterwithout*{<counter>}{<within>}
+\newcommand{\counterwithout}{\@ifstar{\c@t@soutstar}{\c@t@sout}}
+\newcommand{\c@t@soutstar}[2]{%
+  \@ifbothc@t@s{chngcntr}{#1}{#2}{\@removefromreset{#1}{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\c@t@sout}[2]{%
+  \@ifbothc@t@s{chngcntr}{#1}{#2}{\@removefromreset{#1}{#2}%
+                        \@namedef{the#1}{\arabic{#1}}}}
+
+
+%%\counterwithin*{<counter>}{<within>}
+\newcommand{\counterwithin}{\@ifstar{\c@t@sinstar}{\c@t@sin}}
+\newcommand{\c@t@sinstar}[2]{%
+  \@ifbothc@t@s{chngcntr}{#1}{#2}{\@addtoreset{#1}{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\c@t@sin}[2]{%
+  \@ifbothc@t@s{chngcntr}{#1}{#2}{\@addtoreset{#1}{#2}%
+                        \@namedef{the#1}{\@nameuse{the#2}.\arabic{#1}}}}
+
+
+\endinput
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% USAGE
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+%     In LaTeX, a new counter called, say `ctr', is created by the command
+% \newcounter{ctr}[within]. If the optional within argument is given
+% the the counter `ctr' is reset to zero each time the counter `within'
+% changes. The command \thectr typesets the value of the counter ctr.
+% This is automatically defined by \newcounter and is initialised
+% to typeset arabic numerals.	
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \counterwithin
+% \counterwithin*
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    It is sometimes desireable to change a counter that has been defined
+% by \newcounter{ctr} to act as though it had been defined as 
+% \newcounter{ctr}[within]. The package provides the command
+% \counterwithin{ctr}{within} that accomplishes this. By default,
+% it also redefines the \thectr command so that it typesets values
+% in the style \thewithin.\arabic{ctr}. The starred version of the
+% command suppresses the redefinition of \thectr 
+% (e.g., \counterwithin*{ctr}{within}).
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \counterwithout
+% \counterwithout*
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    Likewise, the command \counterwithout{ctr}{within} changes a
+% counter that has been created by \newcounter{ctr}[within] to act
+% as though it had been created by \newcounter{ctr}. By default it
+% also redefines the \thectr command so that it just typesets an arabic
+% numeral. The starred version of the command suppresses the redefinition
+% of \thectr.
+%
+%    Any number of \counterwithin{ctr}{...} and \counterwithout{ctr}{...}
+% commands can be issued for a given counter, ctr, if you wish to toggle
+% between the two styles. The current value of ctr is unaffected by
+% \counterwithin and \counterwithout. If you want to change the value
+% after one of these commands, use \setcounter{ctr}{...}, and to change
+% the typeseting style use \renewcommand{\thectr}{...}.
+%
+%
+% Peter W.
+% 2001/03/30
+%
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/chngpage.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/chngpage.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7c7245e0b78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/chngpage.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,342 @@
+% chngpage.sty
+%
+% Provides commands to change the page layout in the middle of a document,
+% and to robustly check for typesetting on odd or even pages.
+% Instructions for use are at the end of this file.
+%
+% Author: Peter Wilson (CUA) now at peter.r.wilson@boeing.com
+%                            (or pandgwilson@earthlink.net) 
+% Copyright 2000, 2001, 2003 Peter R. Wilson
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any 
+% later version.
+% The latest version of the license is in
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of
+% LaTeX version 2003/06/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained".
+%
+% This work consists of this file.
+%
+%
+%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{chngpage}[2003/08/10 v1.2 change page layout]
+
+%% Note: internal package commands all include the string `cp@'
+%% new \if for the strict option
+\newif\ifcpstrict
+  \cpstrictfalse
+
+%% Declare and process options
+\DeclareOption{strict}{\cpstricttrue}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% new commands for strict checking of odd/even page
+%% Works by writing a label and then checking its pageref
+%%
+% rewritten in v1.2 to handle roman, Roman, etc page numbers
+% as well as arabic; also eliminates special code to handle
+% hyperref. Based on the code in the memoir class.
+
+\newif\ifcpoddpage
+\newcounter{cp@cnt}
+\newcounter{cp@tempcnt}
+\newcommand{\cplabelprefix}{^_}
+
+\gdef\thecp@page{\the\c@page}
+\long\def\cp@protected@write#1#2#3{%  % modified \protected@write
+  \begingroup
+  \let\thecp@page\relax
+  #2%
+  \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+  \edef\reserved@a{\write#1{#3}}%
+  \reserved@a
+  \endgroup
+  \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\checkoddpage}{%
+  \cpoddpagefalse
+  \stepcounter{cp@cnt}\cplabel{\cplabelprefix\thecp@cnt}%
+  \c@cp@tempcnt=\cp@labelref{\cplabelprefix\thecp@cnt}\relax
+  \ifodd\c@cp@tempcnt\cpoddpagetrue\fi}
+
+\newcommand{\cplabel}[1]{\@bsphack
+  \cp@protected@write\@auxout{}%
+    {\string\newcplabel{#1}{\thecp@page}}%
+  \@esphack}
+
+\newcommand{\newcplabel}[2]{{\global\@namedef{p@#1}{#2}}}
+
+\newcommand{\cp@labelref}[1]{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname p@#1\endcsname\relax
+    0%  % 0 if there is no label yet in aux file
+  \else
+    \csname p@#1\endcsname
+  \fi}
+
+%% end newcommands for strict checking of odd/even page
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%% copy of some of the code from the ifmtarg package to save requiring ifmtarg
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\Q=3
+\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}
+\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}
+\endgroup
+
+%% set the page output parameters
+%\newcommand{\ch@ngetext}{%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\ch@ngetext}{%
+  \setlength{\@colht}{\textheight}\setlength{\@colroom}{\textheight}%
+  \setlength{\vsize}{\textheight}\setlength{\columnwidth}{\textwidth}%
+  \if@twocolumn%
+    \advance\columnwidth-\columnsep \divide\columnwidth\tw@%
+    \@firstcolumntrue%
+  \fi%
+  \setlength{\hsize}{\columnwidth}%
+  \setlength{\linewidth}{\hsize}%
+}
+
+%\newcommand{\changetext}[5]{%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\changetext}[5]{%
+  \@ifmtarg{#1}{}{\addtolength{\textheight}{#1}}%
+  \@ifmtarg{#2}{}{\addtolength{\textwidth}{#2}}%
+  \@ifmtarg{#3}{}{\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{#3}}%
+  \@ifmtarg{#4}{}{\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{#4}}%
+  \@ifmtarg{#5}{}{\addtolength{\columnsep}{#5}}%
+  \ch@ngetext%
+}
+
+%\newcommand{\changepage}[9]{%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\changepage}[9]{%
+  \@ifmtarg{#1}{}{\addtolength{\textheight}{#1}}%
+  \@ifmtarg{#2}{}{\addtolength{\textwidth}{#2}}%
+  \@ifmtarg{#3}{}{\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{#3}}%
+  \@ifmtarg{#4}{}{\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{#4}}%
+  \@ifmtarg{#5}{}{\addtolength{\columnsep}{#5}}%
+  \ch@ngetext%
+  \@ifmtarg{#6}{}{\addtolength{\topmargin}{#6}}%
+  \@ifmtarg{#7}{}{\addtolength{\headheight}{#7}}%
+  \@ifmtarg{#8}{}{\addtolength{\headsep}{#8}}%
+  \@ifmtarg{#9}{}{\addtolength{\footskip}{#9}}%
+}
+
+
+\newenvironment{adjustwidth}[3][\@empty]{%
+  \begin{list}{}{%
+    \topsep\z@%
+    \listparindent\parindent%
+    \parsep\parskip%
+    \@ifmtarg{#2}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{\z@}}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#2}}%
+    \@ifmtarg{#3}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{\z@}}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{#3}}%
+    \ifx\@empty #1\relax \else
+      \cpoddpagefalse
+      \ifcpstrict\checkoddpage\else
+        \ifodd\c@page\cpoddpagetrue\fi
+      \fi
+      \ifcpoddpage\else  % even numbered page
+        \@ifmtarg{#3}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{\z@}}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#3}}%
+        \@ifmtarg{#2}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{\z@}}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{#2}}%
+      \fi
+    \fi}
+    \item[]}{\end{list}}
+
+
+
+\endinput
+
+% Usage:
+% ------
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \changetext
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%     The \changetext command is for changing the size and horizontal position
+% of the text block on a page. The command takes 5 arguments, each of which 
+% is a length or is empty. i.e.,
+%
+% \changetext{textheight}{textwidth}{evensidemargin}{oddsidemargin}{columnsep}
+%
+% The given lengths are added to the corresponding current lengths and
+% the remainder of the current page is typeset using the changed text block 
+% layout. The new layout remains in effect until another \change... command 
+% is issued.
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \changepage
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%     The \changepage command is for changing the general layout of
+% a page. The command takes 9 arguments, each of which is a length or is empty. 
+% The first 5 arguments are the same as for \changetext and have the same effect.
+% The last four arguments are:
+%
+% \changepage{5 args}{topmargin}{headheight}{headsep}{footskip}
+%
+% These lengths are added to the corresponding current lengths and
+% thus modify the vertical positions of the elements of the page. The
+% remainder of the current page is typeset using the changed text block 
+% and page layout. The new layout remains in effect until another 
+% \change... command is issued.
+%
+% NOTE 1: Not supplying a value for a length argument is equivalent
+%         to giving it a zero length value.
+%
+% NOTE 2: For any given page, everything is constant except for the textwidth
+%         and columnsep (for example, what is the meaning of two
+%         topmargins on a single column page?).
+%         It is therefore best to change anything else at the
+%         start of a new page. Further, any changes only apply to whole
+%         paragraphs. If you want an odd shaped paragraph use either
+%         the hanging package or the TeX \parshape command.
+%
+%     For example, to change from single column pages to double column
+% pages where the text block is both shorter and wider, then to revert
+% back to the initial layout:
+% ... single column normal page
+% \newpage % or \clearpage
+% \changetext{-5\baselineskip}{10em}{-5em}{-5em}{}
+% \twocolumn
+% ... two column pages
+% \clearpage 
+% \changetext{5\baselineskip}{-10em}{5em}{5em}{}
+% \onecolumn
+% ... normal pages
+%
+% Note the adjustments to the margins which will keep the vertical centerline
+% of the textblock at the same position on the page.
+%
+%    As another example, to increase the width of a single paragraph:
+%
+% \changetext{0pt}{5em}{}{}{}%
+% Start of wider paragraph text ...
+% ... end of paragraph.
+%
+% \changetext{0pt}{-5em}{}{}{}
+% Start of a normal paragraph ...
+%
+%     Under some circumstances you can include a \change... command as part of
+% the argument to \afterpage (from the afterpage package) and it may work.
+% Similarly it may work in a heading style used for \thispagestyle to change
+% a single page.
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% adjustwidth
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    Within an adjustwidth environment the left and right margins can be
+% adjusted. The environment takes one optional argument and two required
+% length arguments: 
+%
+% \begin{adjustwidth}[]{leftmargin}{rightmargin}
+%
+%     A positive length value will increase the relevant margin (shortening
+% the text lines) while a negative length value will decrease the margin
+% (lengthening text lines). An empty length argument means no change
+% to the margin. At the end of the environment the margins revert to
+% their original values.
+%
+%    For example, to extend the text into the right margin:
+% \begin{adjustwidth}{}{-8em}
+%
+%    Any appearance of the optional argument (even just []) will cause
+% the values of the margins to switch between odd and even pages.
+%
+%    If the document is being set twosided it might be advantageous
+% to have any wider text extending into the outside margin. This
+% could be done via the optional argument, as:
+% \begin{adjustwidth}[]{}{-8em}
+%
+%    To have the adjusted text horizontally centered with respect to
+% any surrounding text, the margins should be adjusted equally:
+% \begin{adjustwidth}{-4em}{-4em}
+%
+%    For interest, \begin{quotation} is pretty much equivalent
+% to \begin{adjustwidth}{2.5em}{2.5em}
+%
+%    The environment may also be used inside a float if the contents are
+% a bit too wide for the text block, but can still fit within the physical
+% page:
+% \begin{figure}
+%   \begin{adjustwidth}{-2em}{-2em}
+%      \includegraphics{wide}
+%      \caption{Wide figure}
+%   \end{adjustwidth}
+% \end{figure}
+%
+%   Sometimes, because of the asynchronous nature of the TeX output
+% routine, the margin switching may be incorrect (like \marginpar sometimes)
+% near the top of a page. This can be corrected by using the package
+% option `strict' (i.e., \usepackage[strict]{chngpage}), which causes
+% adjustwidth to use the \checkoddpage command (see below).
+%
+%   A disadvantage of the strict option is that the package generates
+% a new label for each adjustwidth environment, and TeX may run out
+% of space if there are an excessive number of labels in the document.
+%
+%   Whether or not the strict option is used, `strict adjustwidths'
+% can be turned on by putting the command \cpstricttrue before
+% the environment, and turned of by using \cpstrictfalse.
+%
+%     NOTE: In a twocolumn document, the adjustwidth environment 
+% treats both columns equally. For example, if the width is meant
+% to be wider at the outer margin, then on odd pages the extra width
+% will be at the right of any column, and on even pages the extra
+% will be at the left of any column. You can get interesting effects
+% by careful hand tuning on two column pages.
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \checkoddpage
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    The \checkoddpage command can be used anywhere in the body of
+% a document to determine if TeX is typesetting on an odd or
+% even numbered page. If on an odd page then \ifcpoddpage is
+% set TRUE, otherwise (on an even page) \ifcpoddpage is set
+% FALSE.
+%
+%    This works by the \checkoddpage command generating a label and
+% then checking the \pageref for the label (actually, a special version
+% of \pageref is required and is used internally by \checkoddpage). 
+% This mechanism requires at least two LaTeX passes to ensure that 
+% the labels have settled (on the initial pass there will be no labels
+% in the *.aux file to be checked).
+%
+%   The label identifier is composed of the command \cplabelprefix
+% and an automatically generated number. \cplabelprefix, initially
+% defined as `^_', can be changed in the preamble if it will cause
+% a clash with any author-defined labels. The default labels will
+% be of the form `^_N' where N is a positive integer.
+% 
+% Changes in version 1.2 (2003/08/10)
+% ----------------------
+% o Fixed \checkoddpage to handle page numbers other than arabic
+% o Eliminated special \checkoddpage code for hyperref
+%
+% Changes in version 1.1c (2001/02/24)
+% -----------------------
+% o Fixed problem when used with the calc package
+%   (can't do \setcounter{cp@tempcnt}{\cp@pageref{....}}
+% o Fixed problem when used with the hyperef package
+%   (hyperref adds new arguments to \newlabel in the *.aux file)
+%
+% Changes in version 1.1b (2001/01/31)
+% -----------------------
+% o Added strict option for robust adjustwidth; checks odd/even
+%   pages via labels instead of by the page counter.
+% 
+% Changes in version 1.1a (2001/01/18)
+% -----------------------
+% o Added missing {} in last 4 arguments of \changepage
+% 
+% Changes in version 1.1 (2000/07/22)
+% ----------------------
+% o Empty arguments made available
+% o Added adjustwidth environment
+% 
+% 
+% Peter W.
+%
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/circle.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/circle.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f7428522a12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/circle.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{circle}[1998/07/15 LaTeX package for circles in math mode]
+%\Author{Klaus G. Barthelmann, barthel@informatik.uni-mainz.de}
+%\ProvidesCommands{\Circle[1][n]}
+
+% As the name says, \Circle gives a circle in math mode. Its size lies between
+% that of the binary operator \circ and that of the unary operator \bigcirc.
+% It can be used as the nextstep operator of temporal logic in conjunction with
+% \Box and \Diamond (latexsym) or \square and \lozenge (amssymb). \Circle[f]
+% gives a filled circle.
+% As you probably know, L. Lamport discouraged the use of the nextstep
+% operator for program verification. This could be the reason that he did not
+% provide a symbol for it in \LaTeX.
+% The circles are taken from the lcircle10 font. We try to choose the
+% appropriate size. If you need a high quality output, this solution will not
+% suit you.
+
+\newcommand*\Circle[1][n]{%
+  \mathchoice{\@Circle{#1}{\tf@size}}{\@Circle{#1}{\tf@size}}%
+             {\@Circle{#1}{\sf@size}}{\@Circle{#1}{\ssf@size}}%
+}
+
+% Bugs: circles have size n at fontsize 2n-1 and 2n; they do not scale linearly
+%       depending on the fontsize
+
+\newcommand*\@Circle[2]{{%
+  \dimen0=#2pt \advance\dimen0by.5pt \dimen1=1pt \divide\dimen0by\dimen1
+  \count255=\dimen0 \ifodd\count255 \advance\count255by1 \fi\divide\count255by2
+  \ifnum\count255=0 {}\else\ifnum\count255>15 {}\else
+    \dimen0=\count255pt
+    \edef\circfont{tencirc\ifnum\count255>8 w\fi}
+    \advance\count255by\if #1f111\else 95\fi
+    \dimen2=.82\dimen0 \advance\dimen2by.4pt
+    \raisebox{.625\dimen0}[\dimen2]{\makebox[1.2\dimen0]{%
+      \hspace*{.9\dimen0}%
+      \csname\circfont\endcsname
+      \char\count255 %
+    }}%
+  \fi\fi
+}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/concrete.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/concrete.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bd51443806d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/concrete.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+\ProvidesPackage{concrete}[1996/10/08]
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+% CONCRETE.sty
+%  Provides fonts for an approximation of the style in _Concrete Mathematics_.
+% History.....................
+%  96-10-08 Jim Hefferon jhefferon@smcvt.edu
+%    It is an FAQ on comp.text.tex that people look on CTAN for a style 
+%    with this name.  Seems reasonable.  They are always advised to 
+%    \usepackage the two packages below.  So here is a wrapper style
+%    to do that.
+% Remarks.....................
+% 96-10-08 jh
+%   There are other styles for Concrete Math (concmath and something
+%   from AMS-LaTeX 1.1 are the ones that I know of), but this one is
+%   modular in that if the packages it calls are updated then of
+%   course, this is updated also).  In particular, there are no font 
+%   parameters, etc.
+% Bugs........................
+%  *Unlike the AMS-LaTeX v. 1.1 style file, this makes no attempt to
+%  provide any grafitti, etc. macros.  Just the fonts.  (One could
+%  argue that those are document-style, not font, macros.)
+\RequirePackage{beton} % for the text fonts
+\RequirePackage{euler} % for the math fonts
+\endinput 
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/dblfloatfix.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/dblfloatfix.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1dbb8cb391f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/dblfloatfix.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,249 @@
+%% This is the LaTeX package dblfloatfix which solves two problems:
+%%   a)~floats in a twocolumn document come out in the right order and
+%%   b)~allowed float positions are now [tbp].
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+\ProvidesPackage{dblfloatfix}[2003/11/18 v1.0 (MH)]
+%%
+%% USAGE:
+%%
+%% This package redefines internals of the LaTeX kernel by merging
+%% the code of the packages fixltx2e (the fix2col part) and stfloats.
+%%
+%% If either of the packages stfloats or fix2col are loaded you will
+%% get an error message and your document will probably not be able
+%% to compile. So don't load them!
+%%
+%% When the new output routine for LaTeX3 is done, this package will
+%% be obsolete. The sooner the better...
+%%
+%% If you're using the subfigure package this package will provide a
+%% fix for \end@dblfloat by Steven Cochran (the author of subfigure).
+%%
+%% Morten H\o gholm, <moho01ab@student.cbs.dk>
+\RequirePackage{fixltx2e}
+%% An error message for those who didn't read the instructions.
+\newcommand*{\DBLFIXerrormessage}[1]{%
+  \PackageError{dblfloatfix}{%
+  Don't use the #1 package!^^J%
+  Didn't you read the instructions in dblfloatfix.sty?!^^J%
+  You're in big trouble now...^^J%
+  Quit immediately (type `X') and correct the mistake}%
+  {Type `X' dammit!}%
+}
+%% A check for those users who don't read manuals.
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{stfloats}{\DBLFIXerrormessage{stfloats}}{}%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{fix2col}{\DBLFIXerrormessage{fix2col}}{}%
+%% Here's a fix by Steven Douglas Cochran (the author of subfigure).
+%% It is needed in order to make subfigure work with this package as
+%% both packages redefine \end@dblfloat.
+  \@ifpackageloaded{subfigure}{%
+    \typeout{Redefining \string\end@dblfloat\ for use with subfigure}%
+    \def\end@dblfloat{%
+      \if@twocolumn
+        \@listsubcaptions{\@captype}%
+        \@endfloatbox
+        \ifnum\@floatpenalty <\z@
+          \@largefloatcheck
+          \global\dp\@currbox1sp %
+          \expandafter\@gobble\subfig@end@float
+        \fi
+      \else
+        \end@float
+      \fi}%
+  }{}%
+}
+%% Here we go...
+\def\@dblbotlist{}
+\newcount\@dblbotnum
+\newcounter{dblbotnumber}
+\setcounter{dblbotnumber}{2}
+\def\@dbflt#1{\@ifnextchar[{\@xdblfloat{#1}}{\@xdblfloat{#1}[tbp]}}
+
+\def \@dblfloatplacement {%
+  \global \@dbltopnum \c@dbltopnumber
+  \global \@dblbotnum \c@dblbotnumber
+  \global \@dbltoproom \dbltopfraction\@colht
+  \@textmin \@colht
+  \advance \@textmin -\@dbltoproom
+  \@fpmin \dblfloatpagefraction\textheight
+  \@fptop \@dblfptop
+  \@fpsep \@dblfpsep
+  \@fpbot \@dblfpbot
+  \def\f@depth{1sp}%
+}
+
+\def\@addtodblcol{%
+  \begingroup
+  \@insertfalse
+  \@setfloattypecounts
+  \@getfpsbit \tw@
+  \ifodd\@tempcnta
+    \@flsetnum \@dbltopnum
+    \ifnum \@dbltopnum>\z@
+      \@tempswafalse
+      \ifdim \@dbltoproom>\ht\@currbox
+        \@tempswatrue
+      \else
+        \ifnum \@fpstype<\sixt@@n
+          \advance \@dbltoproom \@textmin
+          \ifdim \@dbltoproom>\ht\@currbox
+            \@tempswatrue
+          \fi
+          \advance \@dbltoproom -\@textmin
+        \fi
+      \fi
+      \if@tempswa
+        \@bitor \@currtype \@deferlist
+        \@testwrongwidth\@currbox
+        \if@test
+        \else
+          \@bitor \@currtype \@dblbotlist
+          \if@test
+          \else
+            \@tempdima -\ht\@currbox
+            \advance\@tempdima
+            -\ifx \@dbltoplist\@empty \dbltextfloatsep
+            \else \dblfloatsep
+            \fi
+            \global \advance \@dbltoproom \@tempdima
+            \global \advance \@colht \@tempdima
+            \global \advance \@dbltopnum \m@ne
+            \@cons \@dbltoplist \@currbox
+            \@inserttrue
+          \fi
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \if@insert
+  \else
+    \@getfpsbit 4\relax
+      \ifodd\@tempcnta
+        \@flsetnum \@dblbotnum
+        \ifnum \@dblbotnum>\z@
+          \@tempswafalse
+          \ifdim \@dbltoproom>\ht\@currbox
+            \@tempswatrue
+          \else
+            \ifnum \@fpstype<\sixt@@n
+              \advance \@dbltoproom \@textmin
+              \ifdim \@dbltoproom>\ht\@currbox
+                \@tempswatrue
+              \fi
+              \advance \@dbltoproom -\@textmin
+            \fi
+          \fi
+          \if@tempswa
+            \@bitor \@currtype \@deferlist
+            \if@test
+            \else
+              \@tempdima -\ht\@currbox
+              \advance\@tempdima
+              -\ifx \@dblbotlist\@empty \dbltextfloatsep
+              \else \dblfloatsep
+              \fi
+              \global \advance \@dbltoproom \@tempdima
+              \global \advance \@colht \@tempdima
+              \global \advance \@dblbotnum \m@ne
+              \@cons \@dblbotlist \@currbox
+              \@inserttrue
+            \fi
+          \fi
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+      \if@insert
+      \else
+        \@cons\@deferlist\@currbox
+      \fi
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\@combinedblfloats{%
+    \ifx \@dbltoplist\@empty \else \@cdblflt \fi
+    \ifx \@dblbotlist\@empty \else \@cdblflb \fi
+}
+
+\def\@cdblflt{%
+    \setbox\@tempboxa \vbox{}%
+    \let \@elt \@comdblflelt
+    \@dbltoplist
+    \let \@elt \relax
+    \xdef \@freelist {\@freelist\@dbltoplist}%
+    \global\let \@dbltoplist \@empty
+    \setbox\@outputbox \vbox% to\textheight
+      {%\boxmaxdepth\maxdepth   %% probably not needed, CAR
+       \unvbox\@tempboxa\vskip-\dblfloatsep
+       \ifnum \@dbltopnum>\m@ne
+         \dblfigrule
+       \fi
+       \vskip \dbltextfloatsep
+       \unvbox \@outputbox
+       }%
+}
+
+\def\@cdblflb{%
+    \setbox\@tempboxa \vbox{}%
+    \let \@elt \@comdblflelt
+    \@dblbotlist
+    \let \@elt \relax
+    \xdef \@freelist {\@freelist\@dblbotlist}%
+    \global\let \@dblbotlist \@empty
+    \setbox\@outputbox \vbox% to\textheight
+      {%\boxmaxdepth\maxdepth   %% probably not needed, CAR
+       \unvbox\@outputbox
+       \vskip \dbltextfloatsep
+       \ifnum \@dblbotnum>\m@ne
+         \dblfigrule
+       \fi
+       \unvbox\@tempboxa
+       \vskip -\dblfloatsep
+       }%
+}
+
+\def \@doclearpage {%
+  \ifvoid\footins
+    \setbox\@tempboxa\vsplit\@cclv to\z@ \unvbox\@tempboxa
+    \setbox\@tempboxa\box\@cclv
+    \xdef\@deferlist{\@toplist\@botlist\@deferlist}%
+    \global \let \@toplist \@empty
+    \global \let \@botlist \@empty
+    \global \@colroom \@colht
+    \ifx \@currlist\@empty
+    \else
+      \@latexerr{Float(s) lost}\@ehb
+      \global \let \@currlist \@empty
+    \fi
+    \@makefcolumn\@deferlist
+    \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi{\@opcol\@makefcolumn\@deferlist}%
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \if@firstcolumn
+        \xdef\@deferlist{\@dbltoplist\@dblbotlist\@deferlist}%
+        \global \let \@dbltoplist \@empty
+        \global \let \@dblbotlist \@empty
+        \global \@colht \textheight
+        \begingroup
+          \@dblfloatplacement
+          \@makefcolumn\@deferlist
+          \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi{\@outputpage
+                                    \@makefcolumn\@deferlist}%
+        \endgroup
+      \else
+        \vbox{}\clearpage
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \ifx\@deferlist\@empty \else\clearpage \fi
+  \else
+    \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\box\@cclv\vfil}%
+    \@makecol\@opcol
+    \clearpage
+  \fi
+}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/excludeonly.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/excludeonly.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..91c07aef022
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/excludeonly.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+% excludeonly.sty 
+% Dan Luecking <luecking@uark.edu> and Donald Arseneau <asnd@triumf.ca>
+%
+% This software is contributed to the public domain.
+%
+% Usage:
+% ~~~~~~
+% In the document preamble, "\excludeonly{aaa,bbb}" will prevent files
+% aaa.tex and bbb.tex from being typeset by \include{aaa} and \include{bbb}. 
+% If both \includeonly and \excludeonly are used, then only the files
+% permitted by both declarations are used:
+% \includeonly{aaa,bbb}
+% \excludeonly{bbb,ccc}
+% results in only aaa being included.
+%
+% This behavior contradicts the name "exclude only" but the name is 
+% desirable anyway to show the relationship with \includeonly.
+%     In case it is actually desireable that \excludeonly lives up
+% to its name, and causes *all* parts to be included, except those
+% explicitly listed for exclusion, there is an [only] package option 
+% \usepackage[only]{excludeonly}
+% The effect of this is to override any \includeonly commands.
+%
+% Conflicts:
+% ~~~~~~~~~~ 
+% This package redefines the internal \@include command, so it could
+% conflict with other redefinitions.  Known conflicts are with document 
+% classes "paper.cls" and "thesis.cls" by Wenzel Matiaske. 
+%     A different method for implementing \excludeonly would be to 
+% redefine \@setckpt to compile a file-inclusion list (\@partlist)
+% that accounts for exclusions.  Surprisingly, several packages
+% redefine \@setckpt, so this alternative would have more conflicts.
+%
+\ProvidesPackage{excludeonly}[2003/03/14 v1.0 %
+   eponymous command opposite to \string\includeonly]
+%
+\newif\if@excludesw \@excludeswfalse
+\let\ExOn@swaset\relax
+%
+\DeclareOption{only}{\let\ExOn@swaset\@tempswatrue}
+\ProcessOptions
+%
+\newcommand*{\excludeonly}[1]{%
+  \@excludeswtrue
+  \edef\@excllist{\zap@space#1 \@empty}}
+\@onlypreamble\excludeonly
+%
+\def\@include#1 {%
+  \clearpage
+  \if@filesw
+    \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\@input{#1.aux}}%
+  \fi
+  \@tempswatrue
+  \if@partsw
+    \@tempswafalse
+    \edef\reserved@b{#1}%
+    \@for\reserved@a:=\@partlist\do
+      {\ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b\@tempswatrue\fi}%
+  \fi
+  \if@excludesw
+    \ExOn@swaset
+    \edef\reserved@b{#1}%
+    \@for\reserved@a:=\@excllist\do
+      {\ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b\@tempswafalse\fi}%
+  \fi
+  \if@tempswa
+    \let\@auxout\@partaux
+    \if@filesw
+      \immediate\openout\@partaux #1.aux
+      \immediate\write\@partaux{\relax}%
+    \fi
+    \@input@{#1.tex}%
+    \clearpage
+    \@writeckpt{#1}%
+    \if@filesw
+      \immediate\closeout\@partaux
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \deadcycles\z@
+    \@nameuse{cp@#1}%
+  \fi
+  \let\@auxout\@mainaux}
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/fn2end.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/fn2end.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1e3378238dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/fn2end.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+%  fn2end.sty	Convert footnotes into end notes.
+%  LaTeXable documentation at end (after \endinput)
+%  LaTeX 2.09 users, should comment out this line:
+\ProvidesPackage{fn2end}[1995/05/31 Convert footnotes into end notes.]
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% This file may be freely copied, and distributed.
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% Author:
+% Kim C. Border, 
+% Division of the Humanities and Social Sciences,
+% Caltech, Pasadena, CA 91125 USA
+% e-mail: kcb@hss.caltech.edu
+
+% I gratefully acknowledge the help of J. E. Burke
+% <jeburke@jhuvms.hcf.jhu.edu>  at Johns Hopkins, who fixed
+% the handling of long footnotes.  
+% The main idea is from Knuth's \answer macro in the TeXbook.
+
+% version 1.1, May 31, 1995
+% Changed \endnoteshere to \theendnotes, since you
+% shouldn't use commands that begin with \end
+% Also added user renewable parameters
+
+% Based on my old endnotes.sty, version 3
+% (Sep 4, 1990, rev. Jul 28, 1994), which was never posted.
+% It appears to work with both LaTeX2e and LaTeX2.09
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% User redefinable parameters
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newlength{\noteskip}
+\setlength{\noteskip}{1em}
+\newcommand{\notenumberformat}[1]{$#1$}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Save the original definition of \@footnotetext
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\let\original@footnotetext\@footnotetext
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Define \makeendnotes to open a new file 
+% for the endnotes and to redefine \@footnotetext
+% (\newlinechar courtesy of J E Burke)
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newcommand{\makeendnotes}{\newwrite\n@tefile
+  \immediate\openout\n@tefile=\jobname.end
+  \immediate\write\n@tefile{\relax}
+  \long\gdef\@footnotetext{\immediate\write\n@tefile{}
+	\begingroup\newlinechar=`\^^M 
+  \catcode`\^^M=12\@setupcopy\@copynote}}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% The verbatim copying definitions
+% based on the TeXbook's \answer macro
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newcommand{\@setupcopy}{\@sanitize}
+\newcommand{\@copynote}{}
+\long\gdef\@copynote#1{%
+	\immediate\write\n@tefile{\notenumberformat{\@thefnmark}%
+		\hskip\noteskip}%
+	\immediate\write\n@tefile{#1}\endgroup}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Define \theendnotes to retrieve them
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newcommand{\theendnotes}{\immediate\closeout\n@tefile
+    \input\jobname.end\relax}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Define \restorefootnotes
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newcommand{\restorefootnotes}{\long\gdef\@footnotetext{\original@footnotetext}}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\endinput
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\documentstyle{article}
+\newcommand{\cs}[1]{\mbox{\tt\bs#1}}% for control sequences
+\newcommand{\bs}{\char '134 }   % A backslash character for \tt font
+\newcommand{\file}[1]{\mbox{\tt #1}}
+
+\title{The {\tt fn2end.sty} style}
+\author{KC Border}
+\date{May 31, 1995}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+The \file{fn2end.sty} package converts footnotes into
+end notes, where a lot of publishers want them.  It
+does so by redefining the action of the \cs{footnote}
+command.  Instead of putting footnotes at the bottom
+of the page, the notes are written to a file with
+extension \file{end}, whence they may be retrieved
+when desired.  To handle footnotes on the title page
+flexibly, \cs{footnote} is not redefined until the
+\cs{makeendnotes} command is issued.  Place the
+command \cs{theendnotes} where you want the notes
+to appear: after the last footnote, usually right
+before the bibliography.  The \cs{theendotes} command
+merely \cs{inputs} the \file{end} file, it does {\em
+not} create a new section or a new page. If you do
+create a notes section with the \cs{section} command,
+you should follow it with an \cs{indent} command.
+Otherwise, the first note will be the only note that
+does not start with an indented paragraph.
+
+There are now user renewable commands.  The length
+\cs{noteskip} is the space between the note number
+and the start of the note text. By default it is 1
+em.  Change its value with the \cs{setlength} command.
+You can use  \cs{renewcommand} to change
+\cs{notenumberformat}, which formats the note number.
+By default it is defined as
+\begin{verbatim}
+    \newcommand{\notenumberformat}[1]{$#1$}
+\end{verbatim}
+If you want the end note numbers to appear as
+superscripts with periods, you could
+\begin{verbatim}
+    \renewcommand{\notenumberformat}[1]{${}^{#1.}$}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Successive \cs{makeendnotes} commands overwrite the
+notes file.  This is a feature, not a bug.  For
+example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+    \makeendnotes
+
+    \chapter{One}
+    blah
+    \section*{Notes}\indent
+    \theendnotes
+
+    \makeendnotes
+
+    \chapter{Two}
+    blah
+    \section*{Notes}\indent
+    \theendnotes
+\end{verbatim}
+etc, can be used to put notes at the end of each
+chapter.  (This is perverse because it makes the
+notes nearly impossible to find, but some publishers
+like it.)
+
+Additionally, \cs{restorefootnotes} restores the
+normal behavior of footnotes, so that if you really
+wanted to, you could have a title page for each
+chapter with acknowledgment footnotes on the bottom,
+and thereafter have end notes for the rest of the
+material in the chapter.
+
+
+{\em Bug}: Since \verb#\# is catcoded to 12 for
+verbatim copying, if your footnote's text contains
+an unequal number of \verb#\{#'s and \verb#\}#'s,
+for instance, if you have a \verb#\left\{#  balanced
+by a \verb#\right.#, then \TeX\ believes you have
+unmatched braces and does not figure out where the
+argument of the \cs{footnote} command ends.  (Believe
+it or not, this happened to me the first time I
+tried to use the style.)
+{\em Workaround}: Use \verb#\lbrace# and \verb#\rbrace#
+in your footnotes instead of \verb#\{# and \verb#\}#.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/fncylab.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/fncylab.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d91fe4c83f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/fncylab.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+%  FNCYLAB.STY v1.0
+%  Copyright 2000,2003 Robin Fairbairns (robin.fairbairns@cl.cam.ac.uk)
+%
+%   This program can redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+%   of the LaTeX Project Public License; either version 1.2 of the
+%   license, or (at your option) any later version.
+%
+%   See http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt for the latest version
+%   of the license.
+%
+% This package provides support for arbitrary structuring of the way
+% label references look.  The \labelformat command takes two
+% arguments:
+%  #1   the counter that will define the label (e.g., section, figure,
+%       enumi, etc.)
+%  #2   the definition of how the label will be formatted: in this
+%       argument, #1 (*not* ##1) substitutes the `raw' value of the
+%       thing which is the source of the label.
+%
+% The package makes use of a built-in LaTeX facility (which actually
+% needs a bit of patching before it's usable); this allows the precise
+% layout of the references to labels generated from any LaTeX counter
+% to be altered.  Note that the way in which the counter itself is
+% represented in references depends on \the<counter> -- it's the same
+% as the way the counter gets printed.
+%
+% example
+% \labelformat{section}{section #1}
+% ...
+% \section{The Blah Field}\label{blah}
+% ...
+% ... As we saw above in~\ref{blah} ...
+%
+% will typeset as
+% ... As we saw above in section 3 ...
+%
+% For references at the start of a sentence, the package defines a
+% command \Ref, which is used as follows:
+% ... \Ref{blah} shows us that ...
+%
+% which will typeset as
+% ... Section 3 shows us that ...
+%
+% A demonstration of \labelformat, using the enumerate package, may be
+% found after \endinput
+
+% this check and redefinition is suggested in the latex source
+% (ltxref.dtx)
+\CheckCommand*\refstepcounter[1]{\stepcounter{#1}%
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+       {\csname p@#1\endcsname\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+}
+\renewcommand*\refstepcounter[1]{\stepcounter{#1}%
+  \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+    {\csname p@#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+}
+
+\def\labelformat#1{\expandafter\def\csname p@#1\endcsname##1}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand\Ref[1]{\protected@edef\@tempa{\ref{#1}}%
+   \expandafter\MakeUppercase\@tempa
+}
+
+\endinput
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% small sample file
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\documentclass{article}
+%
+% a brief demonstration of the use of fncylab
+%
+\usepackage{fncylab,enumerate}
+\begin{document}
+%
+% outer level lists (such as enumerate) use counter enumi for their
+% list tags.
+\begin{enumerate}[(i)]
+\item first item, defining a non-fancy label \label{first}
+%
+% that label was defined to look otherwise than it was printed for the
+% item:
+\item second item (see also item~\ref{first})
+%
+% redefine label formats for this list's labels:
+\labelformat{enumi}{(#1)}
+%
+% and label the another item in a different way:
+\item third item, defining a fancy label \label{third}
+%
+% redefine label formats for this list's labels again:
+\labelformat{enumi}{item~(#1)}
+%
+% we now see that the label has for item three has been defined
+% differently, and that for item four differently again.  note the
+% reference starting a new sentence.
+\item fourth item, defining a fancy label in a different format (see
+  also item~\ref{third}).  \Ref{fourth} shows how a sentence may start
+  with reference to a fancy label; note that it's the \emph{label}
+  that's fancy, so the second change to the label format only affects
+  the labels defined after it.  \label{fourth}
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/fnpara.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/fnpara.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6ef13df38a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/fnpara.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,203 @@
+% FNPARA.STY
+% A LaTeX style to typeset footnotes in run-on paragraphs.
+% See end of this file (after \endinput) for comments.
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% From latex.ltx :
+\long\def\@mpfootnotetext#1{%
+  \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@mpfootins
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \hsize\columnwidth
+    \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+         {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+    \color@begingroup
+    \setbox0=\hbox{%
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox
+        \penalty -10
+        \hskip\footglue
+      }%
+    }%
+    \dp0=0pt \ht0=\fudgefactor\wd0 \box0
+    \color@endgroup}}
+\long\def\@footnotetext#1{\insert\footins{%
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+    \splittopskip\footnotesep
+    \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
+    \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+       \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
+    }%
+    \color@begingroup
+    \setbox0=\hbox{%
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox
+        \penalty -10
+        \hskip\footglue
+      }%
+    }%
+    \dp0=0pt \ht0=\fudgefactor\wd0 \box0
+    \color@endgroup}}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%CCCC --- from TeXbook
+\newskip\footglue \footglue=1em plus.3em minus.3em
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Cut down from article.cls :
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{%
+%    \parindent 1em%
+%    \noindent
+%    \hb@xt@1.8em{\hss\@makefnmark}#1
+    \hb@xt@.5em{\hss\@makefnmark}\hskip.5em#1
+}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% From latex.ltx:
+\def\endminipage{%
+    \par
+    \unskip
+    \ifvoid\@mpfootins\else
+      \vskip\skip\@mpfootins
+      \normalcolor
+      \footnoterule
+%      \unvbox\@mpfootins
+      \mpmakefootnoteparagraph
+    \fi
+    \global\@minipagefalse   %% added 24 May 89
+  \color@endgroup
+  \egroup
+  \expandafter\@iiiparbox\@mpargs{\unvbox\@tempboxa}}
+\def \@makecol {%
+   \ifvoid\footins
+     \setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv
+   \else
+     \setbox\@outputbox \vbox {%
+       \boxmaxdepth \@maxdepth
+       \unvbox \@cclv
+       \vskip \skip\footins
+       \color@begingroup
+         \normalcolor
+         \footnoterule
+%         \unvbox \footins
+         \makefootnoteparagraph
+       \color@endgroup
+       }%
+   \fi
+   \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}%
+   \global \let \@midlist \@empty
+   \@combinefloats
+   \ifvbox\@kludgeins
+     \@makespecialcolbox
+   \else
+     \setbox\@outputbox \vbox to\@colht {%
+       \@texttop
+       \dimen@ \dp\@outputbox
+       \unvbox \@outputbox
+       \vskip -\dimen@
+       \@textbottom
+       }%
+   \fi
+   \global \maxdepth \@maxdepth
+}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% From TeXbook, p.398 ff., AVOIDING the  redefinition of \\ in LaTeX!!
+{\catcode`p=12 \catcode`t=12 \gdef\@ennumber#1pt{#1}}
+
+{\footnotesize \newdimen\footnotebaselineskip
+%CCCC --definitely needed:
+  \global
+  \footnotebaselineskip=\normalbaselineskip}
+
+\dimen0=\footnotebaselineskip \multiply\dimen0 by 1024
+\divide \dimen0 by \columnwidth \multiply\dimen0 by 64
+\xdef\fudgefactor{\expandafter\@ennumber\the\dimen0 }
+
+\def\makefootnoteparagraph{\unvbox\footins \makehboxofhboxes
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\unhbox0 \removehboxes}
+%CCCC  ---now we are ready to set the paragraph:
+    \hsize\columnwidth
+    \@parboxrestore
+    \baselineskip=\footnotebaselineskip
+    \noindent
+%CCCC ---this is where the strut is needed:
+  \rule{\z@}{\footnotesep}%
+  \unhbox0\par}
+%
+%
+\def\mpmakefootnoteparagraph{\unvbox\@mpfootins \makehboxofhboxes
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\unhbox0 \removehboxes}
+%CCCC  ---now we are ready to set the paragraph:
+    \hsize\columnwidth
+    \@parboxrestore
+    \baselineskip=\footnotebaselineskip
+    \noindent
+%CCCC ---this is where the strut is needed:
+  \rule{\z@}{\footnotesep}%
+  \unhbox0\par}
+\def\makehboxofhboxes{\setbox0=\hbox{}
+  \loop\setbox2=\lastbox \ifhbox2 \setbox0=\hbox{\box2\unhbox0}\repeat}
+\def\removehboxes{\setbox0=\lastbox
+  \ifhbox0{\removehboxes}\unhbox0 \fi}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\endinput
+
+                           FNPARA.STY
+    A LaTeX style to typeset footnotes in run-on paragraphs.
+
+History:
+
+A vain attempt at this LaTeX modification was tried in late
+September 1988 by Dominik Wujastyk, and sent to TeXhax and UKTeX
+for comment.  Chris Rowley came up with a working
+version a few days later, but it still needs thorough testing.
+
+The Style:
+
+This LaTeX style changes the way LaTeX does footnotes.  With this
+style invoked (\documentstyle[fnpara]{article}), footnotes will
+be typeset in a running paragraph, instead of one above another.
+It is suitable for texts such as critical editions, which contain
+many short footnotes.
+
+This is based on the TeX macros described by Knuth in the
+TeXbook, Dirty Tricks, pages 398--400.  It is  not tested beyond
+some simple examples.   In particular, it has not been tested
+properly in connection with even the simplest of environments, nor with
+other floats.
+
+(In fact, ordinary LaTeX footnotes sometimes do not work well
+if they need splitting (e.g. producing blank pages,
+or appearing in shufled form): but these
+problems should not affect this style.
+I --CR-- have sent in a Bug Report about some
+of these problems.)
+
+Be aware of Knuth's note on the limitations of this method of
+doing the job:  the TeX stack is used four times per footnote,
+and the stack is limited (TeXbook pp. 300--301).  So if you have
+very many footnotes (in the hundreds) and encounter
+  "! TeX capacity exceeded, sorry [... save size ...]"
+errors, you may need to break your text into smaller sections.
+Fortunately, this is very easy to do with LaTeX.  And the
+footnote counter can be reset to make the joins seamless.
+
+Chris Rowley
+Office tel: (England) 01 794 0575
+Janet: CA_ROWLEY@UK.AC.OPEN.ACS.VAX
+
+Dominik Wujastyk
+Office tel: (England) 01 387 4477 x 3013
+Janet: Wujastyk@UK.AC.UCL.EUCLID
+
+
+October 3, 1988
+---------------------------
+Modified 11/12/95
+Updated with new copies of relevant definitions from base files, and
+added definitions for paragraph footnotes inside minipages
+
+Bradley Smith
+(612) 624-1535
+basmith@prometheus.chem.umn.edu
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/framed.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/framed.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3f1967b19c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/framed.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,255 @@
+% framed.sty   v 0.8a   21-Jul-2003
+% Copyright (C) 1992-2003 by Donald Arseneau
+% These macros may be freely transmitted, reproduced, or modified
+% provided that this notice is left intact.
+% 
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Create framed or shaded regions that can break across pages using 
+% \begin{framed} ... \end{framed}    -- ordinary frame box (box at margin)
+% \begin{shaded} ... \end{shaded}    -- shaded background (into margin)
+%    ... leftbar ...                 -- line on left side
+% \begin{MakeFramed}{settings} ... \end{MakeFramed}
+%                        -- generic frame (for new environments)
+%
+% The "framed" environment puts the text into "\fbox" with the
+% settings "\fboxrule=\FrameRule" and "\fboxsep=\FrameSep".
+% You can change these lengths (using "\setlength") and you
+% can even change the definition of "\FrameCommand" to use
+% much fancier boxes.
+%
+% In fact, the "shaded" environment just redefines "\FrameCommand"
+% to use "\colorbox{shadecolor}" (and you have to define the
+% color "shadecolor": \newcolor{shadecolor}...).
+%
+% A page break is allowed, and even encouraged, before the framed
+% environment.  If you want to attach some text (a box title) to the
+% frame, then the text should be inserted by \FrameCommand
+%
+% The contents of the framed regions are restricted: 
+% Floats, footnotes, marginpars and head-line entries will be lost.
+% (Some of these may be handled in a later version.)
+% This package will not work with the page breaking of multicol.sty,
+% or other systems that perform column-balancing.
+%
+% The MakeFramed environment does the work.  Its "settings" argument
+% should contain any adjustments to the text width (applied to \hsize,
+% and using the "\width" of the frame itself) as well as a `restore' 
+% command -- \@parboxrestore or \FrameRestore or something similar.
+% 
+% Expert commands:
+% \MakeFramed, \endMakeFramed: the "MakeFramed" environment
+% \FrameCommand: command to draw the frame around its argument
+% \FrameRestore: restore some text settings, but fewer than \@parboxrestore
+% \FrameRule: length register; \fboxrule for default "framed".
+% \FrameSep: length register; \fboxsep for default "framed".
+% \FrameHeightAdjust: macro; height of frame above baseline at top of page
+% 
+% This is still a `pre-production' version because I can think of many
+% features/improvements that should be made.  Nevertheless, starting 
+% with version 0.5 it should be bug-free.
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\ProvidesPackage{framed}[2003/07/21 v 0.8a: 
+   framed or shaded text with page breaks]
+
+\newenvironment{framed}% using default \FrameCommand
+  {\MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\width \FrameRestore}}%
+  {\endMakeFramed}
+
+\newenvironment{shaded}{%
+  \def\FrameCommand{\colorbox{shadecolor}}%
+  \MakeFramed {\FrameRestore}}%
+ {\endMakeFramed}
+
+\newenvironment{leftbar}{%
+  \def\FrameCommand{\vrule width 3pt \hspace{10pt}}%
+  \MakeFramed {\advance\hsize-\width \FrameRestore}}%
+ {\endMakeFramed}
+
+\chardef\FrameRestore=\catcode`\| % for debug
+\catcode`\|=\catcode`\% % (debug: insert space after backslash)
+
+\def\MakeFramed#1{\par
+ % measure added width and height; call result \width and \height
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\vskip-1in \hbox{\hskip-1in 
+   \FrameCommand{\hbox{\vrule \@height .7in \@depth.3in \@width 1in}}}%
+   \vskip\z@skip}%
+ \def\width{\wd\z@}\def\height{\ht\z@}%
+ \edef\fb@frw{\the\width}\edef\fb@frh{\the\height}%
+ % insert pre-penalties and skips
+ \begingroup
+ \skip@\lastskip
+ \if@nobreak\else 
+    \penalty9999 % updates \page parameters
+    \ifdim\pagefilstretch=\z@ \ifdim\pagefillstretch=\z@
+       \edef\@tempa{\the\skip@}%
+       \ifx\@tempa\zero@glue \penalty-30
+       \else \vskip-\skip@ \penalty-30 \vskip\skip@
+    \fi\fi\fi
+    \penalty\z@
+    % Give a stretchy breakpoint that will always be taken in preference
+    % to the \penalty 9999 used to update page parameters.  The cube root
+    % of 10000/100 indicates a multiplier of 0.21545, but the maximum 
+    % calculated badness is really 8192, not 10000, so the multiplier
+    % is 0.2301. 
+    \advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.5\baselineskip
+    \advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\height
+    \advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\skip@
+    \advance\skip@ \z@ plus-.231\topsep
+    \vskip-\skip@ \penalty 1800 \vskip\skip@
+ \fi
+ \addvspace{\topsep}%
+ \endgroup
+ % clear out pending page break
+ \penalty\@M \vskip 2\baselineskip \vskip\height
+ \penalty9999 \vskip -2\baselineskip \vskip-\height
+ \penalty9999 % updates \pagetotal
+|\message{After clearout, \pagetotal=\the\pagetotal, \pagegoal=\the\pagegoal. }%
+ \fb@adjheight 
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
+   #1% Modifications to \hsize (can use \width and \height)
+   \textwidth\hsize \columnwidth\hsize
+}
+
+\def\endMakeFramed{\par
+     \kern\z@ \penalty-100 % put depth into height
+ \egroup
+ \begingroup \put@frame \endgroup
+}
+
+% \put@frame takes the contents of \@tempboxa and puts all, or a piece,
+% of it on the page with a frame (\FrameCommand).  It recurses until
+% all of \@tempboxa has been used up. (\@tempboxa must have zero depth.)
+
+\def\put@frame{\relax
+ \ifdim\pagegoal=\maxdimen \pagegoal\vsize \fi
+|   \message{=============== Entering putframe ====================^^J
+|     \pagegoal=\the\pagegoal,  \pagetotal=\the\pagetotal. }%
+ \ifinner \else
+    \dimen@\pagegoal \advance\dimen@-\pagetotal % natural space left on page
+  \ifdim\dimen@<2\baselineskip 
+|   \message{Page has only \the\dimen@\space room left; eject. }%
+    \eject \fb@adjheight \put@frame
+  \else % there's appreciable room left on the page
+|    \message{\string\pagetotal=\the\pagetotal,
+|        \string\pagegoal=\the\pagegoal, 
+|        \string\pagestretch=\the\pagestretch,
+|        \string\pageshrink=\the\pageshrink,
+|        \string\fb@frh=\fb@frh. \space}
+|    \message{Box of size \the\ht\@tempboxa\space + \fb@frh}%
+     \begingroup % temporarily set \dimen@ to be...
+     \advance\dimen@.8\pageshrink  % maximum space available on page
+     \advance\dimen@-\fb@frh\relax % space available for frame's contents
+     \expandafter\endgroup
+     % restore \dimen@ to real room left on page
+     \ifdim\dimen@>\ht\@tempboxa % whole box does fit
+|       \message{fits in \the\dimen@. }%
+     \else % box must be split
+|       \message{must be split to fit in \the\dimen@. }%
+        \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{% simulate frame and flexiblity of the page:
+           \vskip \fb@frh \@plus\pagestretch \@minus.8\pageshrink
+           \kern137sp\kern-137sp\penalty-30
+           \unvbox\@tempboxa}%
+        \edef\fb@resto@set{\boxmaxdepth\the\boxmaxdepth \splittopskip\the\splittopskip}%
+        \boxmaxdepth\z@ \splittopskip\z@
+        \setbox\tw@\vsplit\@tempboxa to\dimen@
+        \setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvbox\tw@}% natural-sized
+|       \message{Box of size \the\ht\@tempboxa\space split to \the\dimen@. 
+|          Natural height of split box is \the\ht\tw@. }%
+        % If the split-to size > (\vsize-\topskip), then set box to full size
+        \begingroup
+          \advance\dimen@\topskip
+          \expandafter\endgroup
+        \ifdim\dimen@>\pagegoal
+|         \message{Frame is big -- Use up the full column. }%
+          \dimen@ii\pagegoal
+          \advance\dimen@ii -\topskip
+          \advance\dimen@ii \FrameHeightAdjust\relax
+        \else  % suspect this is wrong:
+          % If the split-to size > feasible room_on_page, rebox it smaller.
+          \advance\dimen@.8\pageshrink
+          \ifdim\ht\tw@>\dimen@
+|           \message{Box too tall; rebox it to \the\dimen@. }%
+            \dimen@ii\dimen@
+          \else % use natural size
+            \dimen@ii\ht\tw@
+          \fi
+        \fi
+        % Re-box contents to desired size \dimen@ii
+        \advance\dimen@ii -\fb@frh
+        \setbox\tw@\vbox to\dimen@ii \bgroup
+        % remove simulated frame and page flexibility:
+        \vskip -\fb@frh \@plus-\pagestretch \@minus-.8\pageshrink
+        \unvbox\tw@ \unpenalty\unpenalty
+        \ifdim\lastkern=-137sp % whole box went to next page
+|          \message{box split at beginning! }%
+           \egroup \fb@resto@set \eject % (\vskip for frame size was discarded) 
+           \fb@adjheight
+        \else %
+           \egroup \fb@resto@set
+           \ifvoid\@tempboxa % it all fit after all
+|             \message{box split at end! }%
+              \setbox\@tempboxa\box\tw@
+           \else % it really did split
+|             \message{box split as expected. Its reboxed height is \the\ht\tw@. }%
+              \ifdim\wd\tw@>\z@
+                \centerline{\FrameCommand{\box\tw@}}%  ??? \centerline bad idea
+              \else
+|               \message{Zero width means likely blank. Don't frame it (guess)}%
+                \box\tw@
+              \fi
+              \hrule \@height\z@
+              \eject
+              \fb@adjheight
+              \put@frame
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifvoid\@tempboxa\else
+    \centerline{\FrameCommand{\box\@tempboxa}}%
+    \nointerlineskip \null %{\showoutput \showlists}
+    \penalty-30 \vskip\topsep
+  \fi}
+
+\def\fb@adjheight{%
+  \vbox to\FrameHeightAdjust{}% get proper baseline skip from above.
+  \penalty\@M \nointerlineskip
+  \vskip-\FrameHeightAdjust
+  \penalty\@M} % useful for tops of pages
+
+\edef\zero@glue{\the\z@skip}
+
+\catcode`\|=\FrameRestore
+
+% Provide configuration commands:
+\providecommand\FrameCommand{\fboxrule=\FrameRule \fboxsep=\FrameSep \fbox}
+\@ifundefined{FrameRule}{\newdimen\FrameRule \FrameRule=\fboxrule}{}
+\@ifundefined{FrameSep} {\newdimen\FrameSep  \FrameSep =3\fboxsep}{}
+
+% Height of frame above first baseline when frame starts a page:
+\providecommand\FrameHeightAdjust{6pt}
+
+% \FrameRestore has parts of \@parboxrestore.  See how it is used in the 
+% "settings" argument of \MakeFrame.  Previous behavior can be restored by 
+% using \@parboxrestore there, or redefining:
+% \makeatletter \renewcommand\FrameRestore{\@parboxrestore} \makeatother
+\def\FrameRestore{%
+  \let\if@nobreak\iffalse
+  \let\if@noskipsec\iffalse
+%  \let\par\@@par  ??
+  \let\-\@dischyph
+  \let\'\@acci\let\`\@accii\let\=\@acciii
+%  \parindent\z@ \parskip\z@skip    Definitely omit!
+%  \everypar{}%  ??
+  \linewidth\hsize
+%  \@totalleftmargin\z@
+%  \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\z@skip \@rightskip\z@skip
+%  \parfillskip\@flushglue \lineskip\normallineskip
+%  \baselineskip\normalbaselineskip
+  \sloppy
+%  \let\\\@normalcr
+}
+
+%  Compatibility with previous versions (temporary!):
+\let\fram@d=\MakeFramed  \let\endfram@d=\endMakeFramed
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/fwlw.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/fwlw.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..17498f0bd51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/fwlw.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+%  F W L W . S T Y  ( First Word, Last Word )
+%
+%  Donald Arseneau  (1993, 1995)
+%
+%  Modifications to LaTeX output mechanism to determine the first and
+%  last words on the current page, plus the first word on the *next*
+%  page.  These can be used in head-lines or foot-lines.  The `words'
+%  you see may not be real words, but any unbreakable object.
+%
+%  Such labelling does not make sense when \chapter generates a page
+%  break, so the last page before a \chapter (or any \clearpage) gets 
+%  a blank "next word", and the first page of the chapter gets a blank
+%  "first word".  There is a problem when footnotes split: the "next word"
+%  is blank.
+%
+%  Two pagestyles are defined to print these words: \pagestyle{NextWordFoot}
+%  which helps you read ahead to the word on the next page; and \pagestyle
+%  {fwlwhead} which is like the headers in a lexicon.  Or you can use the
+%  words in your own page-style...
+%  The words are available in the box registers:
+%     \FirstWordBox   -  first word on this page
+%     \NextWordBox    -  first word on next page
+%     \LastWordBox    -  last word on this page
+%  Use them in your header lines like: \copy\LastWordBox.
+%
+%  Note that `words' may be things like:
+%    - two~words
+%    - [ ]Word  ( [ ] represents a parindent box)
+%    - a whole displayed equation
+%    - the first column of an aligned equation
+%    - anomalously blank, if there are \writes or split footnotes etc.
+%    - partial words like  par-  or  -tial.
+%
+%  An entirely different approach is possible using \mark and \obeyspaces,
+%  and would have different problems.  The problems with catcode changes
+%  may be more or less serious for your particular application.  You are
+%  welcome to write a package using that method.  The best solution would 
+%  involve \mark and an input filter program to 
+%  `\w{tag} \w{each} \w{word}, \w{in} \w{some} \w{way}.'
+
+\mathchardef\LW@pen 12345
+\newbox\FirstWordBox     \global\setbox\FirstWordBox\hbox{}
+\newbox\NextWordBox      \global\setbox\NextWordBox\hbox{}
+\newbox\LastWordBox      \global\setbox\LastWordBox\hbox{}
+\newbox\LW@box           \global\setbox\LW@box\hbox{}
+\newbox\LW@saved
+
+\def\ps@fwlwhead{\let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \def\@oddhead{\if@fcolmade\else \copy\FirstWordBox\hfil\copy\LastWordBox\fi}%
+ \let\@evenhead\@oddhead % no word-heads on float pages.
+ \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
+ \let\chaptermark\@gobble\let\sectionmark\@gobble\let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+ }
+
+\def\ps@NextWordFoot{\let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \let\@oddhead\@empty\let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+ \def\@oddfoot{\hfil\thepage\hfil\llap{\copy\NextWordBox}}\let\@evenfoot\@empty
+ \let\chaptermark\@gobble\let\sectionmark\@gobble\let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+ }
+
+%  Shell around old output routine.  Gets first word from next page by
+%  letting TeX continue with \vsize=0 to get a look at the next line.
+%  Values of \outputpenalty for \specialoutput ( -10001 to -19999 ) are
+%  simply run through the output routine.
+%  \supereject and \clearpage give a blank "next word"
+%  When called after making a stub-page the stub is returned to the vertical
+%  list, the previous page is restored and shipped out normally, but
+%  knowing what the next word will be.
+
+\edef\FWLWnorm@L@output{\the\output}
+
+\output{\@tempswafalse
+\ifnum \outputpenalty>-\@MM \ifnum\outputpenalty<-\@M \@tempswatrue\fi\fi
+\if@tempswa % special (float) output
+%  \message{Float handler: penalty=\the\outputpenalty}%
+   \FWLWnorm@L@output
+\else
+  \ifvoid\LW@saved % end of real page
+%    \message{End of real page}%
+     \global\setbox\LW@saved\copy\@cclv % save page
+     \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv \unskip\unkern\unpenalty
+       \unskip\unkern\unpenalty \unskip\unkern\unpenalty
+       \setbox\@tempboxa\lastbox
+       \LW@getlast@word\@tempboxa\LastWordBox
+     }\ifnum\outputpenalty>-\@MM % not \supereject
+       \xdef\LW@vsize{\global\vsize\the\vsize 
+          \global\holdinginserts\the\holdinginserts}%
+       \global\vsize\z@ \global\holdinginserts\@ne 
+     \else % \supereject, just output, don't look for word on next page
+%      \message{caused by super-eject.}
+       \global\setbox\@cclv\box\LW@saved
+       \global\setbox\NextWordBox\hbox{}%
+       \FWLWnorm@L@output
+       \global\setbox\FirstWordBox\box\NextWordBox
+     \fi
+  \else % saved page => just did tiny page to get next word
+%    \message{Just got next line:}{\tracingall\showboxdepth2 \showbox\@cclv}%
+     \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\penalty\LW@pen\unvcopy\@cclv \LW@getall@boxes
+       \ifvbox\LW@box \penalty\LW@pen\unvbox\LW@box \LW@getall@boxes\fi
+       \ifvbox\LW@box \global\setbox\NextWordBox\hbox{}\else
+         \LW@getfirst@word\LW@box\NextWordBox
+       \fi}%  Return tiny page to page list:
+     \unvbox\@cclv \ifnum\outputpenalty<\@M \penalty\outputpenalty\fi
+     \LW@vsize\relax
+     \global\setbox\@cclv\box\LW@saved
+     \FWLWnorm@L@output
+     \global\setbox\FirstWordBox\box\NextWordBox
+\fi\fi}
+
+% globally get last "word" from a box (#1) into another box (#2)
+\def\LW@getlast@word#1#2{\setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\hsize\maxdimen \@parboxrestore
+  \hyphenpenalty\@M \exhyphenpenalty\@M 
+  \rightskip\fill \looseness\@M \linepenalty\z@
+  \noindent\unhbox#1\endgraf
+  \unskip\unkern\unpenalty \global\setbox\LW@box\lastbox
+  }\LW@repack{#2}}
+
+% globally get first "word" from a box (#1) into another box (#2)
+\def\LW@getfirst@word#1#2{\setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\@parboxrestore
+  \parshape\thr@@ \z@\z@ \z@\z@ \z@\maxdimen \parfillskip\fill
+  \hyphenpenalty\@M \exhyphenpenalty\@M 
+  \hbadness\@MM \overfullrule\z@ \hfuzz\maxdimen
+  \ifhbox#1\noindent
+   \vadjust{\penalty\LW@pen}\penalty-\@M\unhbox#1% eliminate previous \leftskip
+  \else\ifvbox#1\penalty\LW@pen\unvbox#1\fi\fi
+  \endgraf
+  \@tempcnta\z@  \LW@getall@boxes}\LW@repack{#2}}
+
+% Go through a vertical list that starts with special penalty
+\def\LW@getall@boxes{\global\setbox\LW@box\lastbox \unskip\unkern \unskip\unkern
+  \let\@tempa\relax
+  \ifvoid \LW@box \advance\@tempcnta\@ne \else \@tempcnta\z@ \fi
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty=\LW@pen \else \unpenalty\fi
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty=\LW@pen \else \unpenalty\fi
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty=\LW@pen \else \ifnum\@tempcnta<5
+    \let\@tempa\LW@getall@boxes \fi \fi \unpenalty \@tempa}
+
+% Put contents of \LW@box into hbox #1
+\def\LW@repack#1{\global\setbox#1\hbox{\ifhbox\LW@box
+   \unhbox\LW@box\unskip\unskip\unpenalty\unskip
+  \else\ifvbox\LW@box\box\LW@box\fi\fi}}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/hypernat.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/hypernat.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d40bcb090a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/hypernat.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+%% hypernat.sty v1.0b (C) 2001 Jens Berger
+%%
+%%  This packages makes the hyperref package and the natbib package
+%%  with options `numbers' and `sort&compress' work together. This
+%%  means, that the citations (e.g [3,2,1]) will be compressed to
+%%  [1-3], where the `1' and the `3' are (color-)linked to the
+%%  bibliography.
+%%
+%%  The changes I made here are suggested (in August 2000) for the
+%%  next natbib release.
+%%
+%%  This package will disappear from CTAN, when natbib will do
+%%  the job by himself.
+%%
+%%  Load this package after natbib and hyperref!
+%%
+%%  Please make sure that you are using at least natbib v7.0!
+%%
+%% Changes
+%%
+%%   v1.0b 2001/07/09 anchor for all citations in the list added 
+%%                    to make backref options working (bug reported by Günter Keusen)
+%%   v1.0a 2001/01/22 \noexpand for some \hyper@natlinkend added 
+%%                    (bug reported by Frank Meißen), hypernat.sty 
+%%                    is working now for `dvips --> ps2pdf' or `dvips -> Distiller'
+%%
+\ProvidesPackage{hypernat}[2001/07/09 v1.0b hyperref and natbib compatibility (jb)]
+\AtBeginDocument{\def\NAT@sort{2}}
+\def\NAT@citexnum[#1][#2]#3{%
+  \NAT@sort@cites{#3}%
+  \let\@citea\@empty
+   \@cite{\def\NAT@num{-1}\let\NAT@last@yr\relax\let\NAT@nm\@empty
+    \@for\@citeb:=\NAT@cite@list\do
+    {\edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+     \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi
+     \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}{%
+       {\reset@font\bfseries?}
+        \NAT@citeundefined\PackageWarning{natbib}%
+       {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}%
+     {\let\NAT@last@num\NAT@num\let\NAT@last@nm\NAT@nm
+      \NAT@parse{\@citeb}%
+      \ifNAT@longnames\@ifundefined{bv@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}{%
+        \let\NAT@name=\NAT@all@names
+        \global\@namedef{bv@\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}{}}{}%
+      \fi
+      \ifNAT@full\let\NAT@nm\NAT@all@names\else
+        \let\NAT@nm\NAT@name\fi
+      \ifNAT@swa
+       \ifnum\NAT@ctype>1\relax\@citea
+        \hyper@natlinkstart{\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}%
+            \ifnum\NAT@ctype=2\relax\NAT@test{\NAT@ctype}%
+            \else\NAT@alias
+            \fi\hyper@natlinkend\else
+       \ifnum\NAT@sort>1
+         \begingroup\catcode`\_=8
+            \ifcat _\ifnum\z@<0\NAT@num _\else A\fi
+              \global\let\NAT@nm=\NAT@num \else \gdef\NAT@nm{-2}\fi
+            \ifcat _\ifnum\z@<0\NAT@last@num _\else A\fi
+              \global\@tempcnta=\NAT@last@num \global\advance\@tempcnta by\@ne
+              \else \global\@tempcnta\m@ne\fi
+         \endgroup
+% v0.1b anchor added to make backref's working, watch for errors!
+         \ifnum\NAT@nm=\@tempcnta
+         \ifHy@backref\hyper@natlinkstart{\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}\hyper@natlinkend\fi
+           \ifx\NAT@last@yr\relax
+%             \edef\NAT@last@yr{\@citea \mbox{\noexpand\citenumfont{\NAT@num}}}%
+            %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+               \edef\NAT@last@yr{\@citea \mbox{\noexpand%
+                    \hyper@natlinkstart{\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}%
+                      \noexpand\citenumfont{\NAT@num}%
+                    \noexpand\hyper@natlinkend}%
+               }%
+            %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+           \else
+%             \edef\NAT@last@yr{--\penalty\@m\mbox{\noexpand\citenumfont{\NAT@num}}}%
+            %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+             \edef\NAT@last@yr{--\penalty\@m\mbox{\noexpand%
+                  \hyper@natlinkstart{\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}%
+                    \noexpand\citenumfont{\NAT@num}%
+                  \noexpand\hyper@natlinkend}%
+             }%
+            %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+           \fi
+         \else
+%           \NAT@last@yr \@citea \mbox{\citenumfont{\NAT@num}}%
+           %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+           \NAT@last@yr \@citea \mbox{%
+                \hyper@natlinkstart{\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}%
+                    \citenumfont{\NAT@num}%
+                \hyper@natlinkend}%
+           %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+           \let\NAT@last@yr\relax
+         \fi
+       \else
+         \@citea \mbox{\hyper@natlinkstart{\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}%
+           {\citenumfont{\NAT@num}}\hyper@natlinkend}%
+       \fi
+       \fi
+       \def\@citea{\NAT@sep\penalty\@m\NAT@space}%
+      \else
+        \ifcase\NAT@ctype\relax
+          \ifx\NAT@last@nm\NAT@nm \NAT@yrsep\penalty\@m\NAT@space\else
+          \@citea \NAT@test{1}\ \NAT@@open
+          \if*#1*\else#1\ \fi\fi \NAT@mbox{%
+          \hyper@natlinkstart{\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}%
+          {\citenumfont{\NAT@num}}\hyper@natlinkend}%
+          \def\@citea{\NAT@@close\NAT@sep\penalty\@m\ }%
+        \or\@citea
+          \hyper@natlinkstart{\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}%
+           \NAT@test{\NAT@ctype}\hyper@natlinkend
+          \def\@citea{\NAT@sep\penalty\@m\ }%
+        \or\@citea
+          \hyper@natlinkstart{\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}%
+           \NAT@test{\NAT@ctype}\hyper@natlinkend
+          \def\@citea{\NAT@sep\penalty\@m\ }%
+        \or\@citea
+          \hyper@natlinkstart{\@citeb\@extra@b@citeb}%
+           \NAT@alias\hyper@natlinkend
+          \def\@citea{\NAT@sep\penalty\@m\ }%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+      }}%
+      \ifnum\NAT@sort>1\relax\NAT@last@yr\fi
+      \ifNAT@swa\else\ifnum\NAT@ctype=0\if*#2*\else
+      \NAT@cmt#2\fi \NAT@@close\fi\fi}{#1}{#2}%
+}
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/iagproc.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/iagproc.cls
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4848959b1d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/iagproc.cls
@@ -0,0 +1,265 @@
+%%
+%% This is the file `iagproc.cls' intended for formatting submissions to
+%% IAG (International Association of Geodesy) Proceedings.
+%%
+%% Originally written as 'banff.cls', for the Banff GGG2000 symposium.
+%% An adaptation from 'article.cls', (c) The LaTeX3 Project and
+%% individual authors:
+%%
+%%          Leslie Lamport
+%%          Johannes Braams
+%%          David Carlisle
+%%          Alan Jeffrey
+%%          Frank Mittelbach
+%%          Chris Rowley
+%%          Rainer Schoepf
+%%     
+%% License
+%%   
+%% 'iagproc.cls' is free software that can be redistributed and/or 
+%% modified under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License as 
+%% specified in the LaTeX Project Public License:
+%%
+%%		http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.html
+%%
+%% Adapted from 'article.cls' (c) Martin Vermeer 2000
+%% Small adaptations (c) Hussein Abd-Elmotaal 2000
+%% Small adaptations (c) Martin Vermeer 2003
+%%
+%% Your class definition should be 
+%%
+%%     \documentclass{iagproc}
+%%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+
+\ProvidesClass{iagproc}
+          [2003/01/22 v0.3 IAG Conference Proceedings]
+% Options:
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+%
+\LoadClass[10pt,twocolumn]{article}
+%%\RequirePackage{mathptm}
+%%\RequirePackage{times}
+\RequirePackage{natbib}
+%%\RequirePackage{apalike}
+% Redefine \maketitle:
+\renewcommand\maketitle{\par
+ \begingroup
+   \renewcommand\thefootnote{\@fnsymbol\c@footnote}%
+   \def\@makefnmark{\rlap{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}%
+   \long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent
+           \hb@xt@1.8em{%
+               \hss\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}##1}%
+ \twocolumn[\@maketitle]%
+ \global\@topnum\z@   % Prevents figures from going at top of page.
+ \thispagestyle{empty}%
+ \@thanks
+ \endgroup
+ \setcounter{footnote}{0}%
+ \global\let\thanks\relax
+ \global\let\maketitle\relax
+ \global\let\@maketitle\relax
+ \global\let\@thanks\@empty
+ \global\let\@author\@empty
+ \global\let\@date\@empty
+ \global\let\@title\@empty
+ \global\let\title\relax
+ \global\let\author\relax
+ \global\let\date\relax
+ \global\let\and\relax
+}
+%
+\def\@maketitle{%
+ \newpage
+ \vbox to 4.8cm {
+   \let \footnote \thanks
+   {\par\normalfont\huge\bfseries\sffamily%
+     \raggedright%
+   \@title\par}%
+   \vskip 0.6cm
+   \normalfont\normalsize\@author%
+ }%
+}%
+%
+\newcommand\keywordsname{Keywords}
+
+\newcommand*\abstractlabel[1]{\normalfont\bfseries\abstractname.\quad}%
+\newcommand*\keywordslabel[1]{\normalfont\bfseries\keywordsname.\quad}%
+\renewenvironment{abstract}{%
+  \list{}{\topsep\z@%
+          \labelsep\z@%
+          \labelwidth\z@%
+          \itemindent\z@%
+      \rightmargin\z@%
+      \leftmargin\z@%
+          \let\makelabel\abstractlabel}%
+      \item\relax
+      }%
+     {\endlist}%
+%
+\newenvironment{keywords}{%
+  \list{}{\topsep\z@%
+          \labelsep\z@%
+          \labelwidth\z@%
+          \itemindent\z@%
+      \rightmargin\z@%
+	  \leftmargin\z@%
+          \let\makelabel\keywordslabel}%
+      \item\relax
+      }%
+     {\endlist\par\vskip4mm\hrule}%
+%
+% Redefine \section and \subsection:
+%\renewcommand\chapter{\@startsection {chapter}{0}{\z@}%
+%                                  {-3.25ex \@plus -0.6ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+%                                  {4mm \@plus0.1ex}%
+%   {\normalfont\raggedright\Large\bfseries\sffamily}}
+\renewcommand\section{\@startsection {section}{1}{\z@}%
+                                  {-4mm \@plus -0.6ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+                                  {4mm \@plus0.1ex}%
+   {\normalfont\raggedright\large\bfseries\sffamily}}
+\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}%
+                                    {-4mm \@plus -0.3ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+                                    {4mm \@plus0ex}%
+   {\normalfont\raggedright\bfseries\sffamily}}
+\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}%
+                                    {-4mm \@plus -0.2ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+                                    {4mm \@plus0ex}%
+   {\normalfont\raggedright\sffamily\bfseries\itshape}}
+% Redefine section, subsection numbering:
+\renewcommand \thesection {\@arabic\c@section}
+\renewcommand\thesubsection{\thesection.\@arabic\c@subsection}
+\renewcommand\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\@arabic\c@subsubsection}
+
+%
+\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1\ }}
+
+\setlength\intextsep{8mm}
+\setlength\floatsep{8mm}
+\setlength\abovecaptionskip{2mm}
+\setlength\belowcaptionskip{2mm}
+
+% Redefine default font etc.:
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+ \vskip\abovecaptionskip
+ \small
+ \sbox\@tempboxa{\textbf{#1.} #2}%
+%% \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize
+%%   \@hangfrom{\textbf{#1.} }#2\par
+   \textbf{#1.} #2\par
+%% \else
+%%   \global \@minipagefalse
+%%   \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+%% \fi
+ \vskip\belowcaptionskip
+}%
+\renewenvironment{table}
+               {\@float{table}\small}
+               {\end@float}
+\renewenvironment{table*}
+               {\@dblfloat{table}\small}
+               {\end@dblfloat}
+\newenvironment{acknowledgements}{%
+  \list{}{\labelsep\z@%
+          \labelwidth\z@%
+          \itemindent\z@%
+	  \leftmargin\z@%
+          \let\makelabel\acknowslabel}%
+	  \item\relax
+	  \small\itshape}%
+	 {\endlist}%
+
+\def\refname{References}
+
+\def\@cite#1#2{(#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi)}
+\def\@biblabel#1{}
+
+\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname\@mkboth
+  {\sl\uppercase{\refname}}{\sl\uppercase{\refname}}}\list
+  {\relax}{\setlength{\labelsep}{0em}
+  \setlength{\itemindent}{-4mm}
+  \setlength{\leftmargin}{4mm}}
+  \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}
+  \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt plus 2pt} 
+%    \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}
+    \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000
+    \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}%
+
+\renewcommand\labelitemi[0]{\(\circ\)}
+\renewcommand\labelitemii[0]{\(\triangleright\)}
+\renewcommand\labelitemiii[0]{\normalfont\bfseries{--}}
+\renewcommand\labelitemiv[0]{\(\cdot\)}
+%
+\renewcommand{\topfraction}{.9}
+\renewcommand{\bottomfraction}{.9}
+\renewcommand{\textfraction}{.1}
+\pagestyle{plain}
+%\input{fleqn.clo}                             %%% deactived by Hussein
+\setlength{\columnsep}{8mm}
+\setlength{\textheight}{224mm}
+\setlength{\textwidth}{156mm}
+%
+\setlength\parindent{4mm}
+\flushbottom
+%\setlength\mathindent{4mm}                    %%% deactivated Hussein
+%
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% This is a new section added by Hussein
+%% to allow the balance of the two columns
+%% of the last page of the manuscript
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newcommand{\@BAlancecol}{\if@twocolumn
+  \setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox\@outputbox} \@tempdima=\ht0
+  \advance\@tempdima by \topskip \advance\@tempdima
+     by -\baselineskip \divide\@tempdima by 2
+     \splittopskip=\topskip
+  {\vbadness=\@M \loop \global\setbox3=\copy0
+   \global\setbox1=\vsplit3 to \@tempdima
+   \ifdim\ht3>\@tempdima \global\advance\@tempdima by 1pt \repeat}
+   \setbox\@leftcolumn=\vbox to \@tempdima{\unvbox1\vfil}
+   \setbox\@outputbox=\vbox to \@tempdima
+     {\dimen2=\dp3\unvbox3\kern-\dimen2
+      \vfil}
+  \fi}
+\newif\if@BAlanceone
+\global\@BAlanceonefalse
+\newdimen\oldvsize
+\newcommand{\@BAdblcol}{\if@firstcolumn
+       \unvbox\@outputbox \penalty\outputpenalty
+       \global\oldvsize=\@colht \global\multiply \@colht by 2
+       \global\@BAlanceonetrue
+       \global\@firstcolumnfalse
+  \else \global\@firstcolumntrue
+       \if@BAlanceone
+       \global\@BAlanceonefalse\@BAlancecol
+       \global\@colht=\oldvsize \else
+       \PackageWarningNoLine{balance}
+          {You have called \protect\balance\space
+             in second column\MessageBreak
+           Columns might not be balanced}\fi
+     \setbox\@outputbox\vbox to \@colht{\hbox to\textwidth
+     {\hbox to\columnwidth {\box\@leftcolumn \hss}\hfil
+      \vrule width\columnseprule\hfil \hbox to\columnwidth
+      {\box\@outputbox \hss}}\vfil}\@combinedblfloats
+     \@outputpage \begingroup \@dblfloatplacement
+     \@startdblcolumn \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi
+     {\@outputpage\@startdblcolumn}\endgroup
+  \fi}
+\newcommand{\@BAcleardblpage}{\clearpage\if@twoside \ifodd\c@page\else
+  \hbox{}\newpage\fi\fi}
+\newcommand{\balance}{\global\let\@outputdblcol=\@BAdblcol
+  \global\let\cleardoublepage=\@BAcleardblpage}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% This is a new section added by Hussein
+%% for float seperation
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\dblfloatsep 10pt plus 2pt minus 4pt \dbltextfloatsep 10pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
+\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil \@fpsep 10pt plus 2fil \@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil 
+\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil \@dblfpsep 10pt plus 2fil \@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `iagproc.cls'.
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/import.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/import.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..48c529a598e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/import.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+% import.sty  Ver 3.0  17-Dec-1997  Donald Arseneau  (asnd@reg.triumf.ca)
+%
+% Allow input of a file with its own inputs from another directory.
+% 
+% \import {full_path} {file}     \subimport {path_extension} {file}
+% Also \includefrom, \subincludefrom, and * variants.
+%
+% This software is free of any restrictions.
+%
+% For example, if a remote file "/usr5/friend/work/report.tex" has contents:
+%      My graph: \includegraphics{picture}
+%      \input{explanation}
+% then you can safely input that file in your own document with the command
+% "\import{/usr5/friend/work/}{report}"; the explanation and picture will 
+% be taken from the remote directory.  You can then import documents from
+% other friends, even if they use the same file names.
+%
+% The "\subimport" command allows imported files to import files themselves,
+% using their own directory as the root of a "path_extension". Do not use
+% both "\import" and "\subimport" in the same file.
+%
+% For example, if a file is imported (using either command) from directory
+% "abc/" and that file contains the command "\subimport{lmn/}{xyz}" then
+% file "abc/lmn/xyz.tex" is input, and any "\input" commands in that file
+% will read files from directory "abc/lmn/". 
+%
+% Note that the sub-import path is merely appended to the current import
+% path.  Mistakes from this method must be rectified by "\import@path@fix".
+%
+% Depending on on how your \TeX\ system is configured, if a file with the 
+% same name as the import file exists in the current directory or in the 
+% TEXINPUTS path, that other file will be read in preference to one in the 
+% import directory.  So here is the real behavior of the previous example:
+% Given the sequence "\import{abc/}{one}", "\subimport{lmn/uvw/}{two}" (in
+% file one), "\input{three}" (in file two), LaTeX first looks for three.tex
+% in the TEXINPUTS search path; if not found, it tries "abc/lmn/uvw/three";
+% if that doesn't exist, it tries "abc/three"; if still not found, it tries
+% the defined "\input@path", if there is one.
+%
+% To avoid searching the TEXINPUTS path when importing files, use the `star'
+% versions of the commands: "\import*" and "\subimport*".
+%
+% A hook "\import@path@fix" is provided to reformat the import path
+% to fit the syntax of a particular operating system.  It *could* be
+% defined to convert unix-style path names to the local format, but 
+% all it does now is remove "][" from VMS sub-import directories.
+%
+% Presently, the paths are defined ``locally'' so input files must have 
+% balanced grouping.
+
+\newcommand{\import}{\global\let\import@path\@empty \@doimport\input}
+\newcommand{\subimport}{\@doimport\input}
+\newcommand{\includefrom}{\global\let\import@path\@empty \@doimport\include}
+\newcommand{\subincludefrom}{\@doimport\include}
+
+\def\@doimport#1{\@ifstar
+  {\@sub@import#1\@iffileonpath}{\@sub@import#1\IfFileExists}}
+
+% #1 = import command,  #2 = switch for *,  #3 = import path extension
+\def\@sub@import#1#2#3{%
+  \begingroup
+  \protected@edef\@tempa{\endgroup
+    \let\noexpand\IfFileExists\noexpand#2
+    \noexpand\@import  \noexpand#1%  param 1
+      {\@ifundefined{input@path}{}{\input@path}}% 2
+      {\@ifundefined{Ginput@path}{}{\Ginput@path}}% 3
+      {\import@path#3}{\import@path}% 4,5
+      {\ifx\IfFileExists\im@@IfFileExists \noexpand\im@@IfFileExists 
+       \else \noexpand\IfFileExists \fi}}% 6
+  \@tempa}
+%
+% #1 = import command (\input or \include)
+% #2 = previous input path list. #3 = previous graphics input path list.
+% #4 = full path added to each.  #5 = previous import path.  
+% #6 = previous \IfFileExists.   #7 = file name.
+%
+\def\@import#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{%
+  \gdef\import@path{#4}%
+  \protected@edef\input@path{{\import@path@fix{#4}}#2}%
+  \protected@edef\Ginput@path{{\import@path@fix{#4}}#3}%
+  #1{#7}%
+  \let\IfFileExists#6% restore after \import*
+  \gdef\import@path{#5}%
+  \def\input@path{#2}\ifx\input@path\@empty \let\input@path\@undefined \fi
+  \def\Ginput@path{#3}\ifx\Ginput@path\@empty \let\Ginput@path\@undefined \fi
+}
+
+\let\im@@IfFileExists\IfFileExists
+\gdef\import@path{}
+
+\let\import@path@fix\@firstofone % default
+
+% Check for vms file names and set \import@path@fix appropriately
+\gdef\@gtempa{[]}
+\ifx\@gtempa\@currdir % VMS directory syntax
+ \gdef\import@path@fix#1{\@gobbleVMSbrack#1][>}
+ \gdef\@gobbleVMSbrack#1][#2{#1\ifx>#2\@empty
+    \expandafter \strip@prefix \fi % Gobble up to >
+    \@gobbleVMSbrack #2}
+\fi
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/kix.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/kix.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b78547da6e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/kix.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+% This is kix.sty
+% By Sander R.M. Stoks <sanders@sumware.demon.nl>
+% (c) 1998   17 SEP 1998
+% Implements KIX codes as used by the Dutch PTT for bulk mail
+% addressing. ("Royal Mail 4 State Code")
+% "KIX" is a registered trade mark of PTT Post Holdings B.V.
+%
+% Usage: {\kix 1234AB123}.
+% Note: Only caps please.
+%
+% Example:
+%
+%   Sander Stoks\\
+%   Heyendaalseweg 127 E2-08\\
+%   6525 AJ \textsc{Nijmegen}\\[2mm]
+%   {\kix 6525AJ127XE2X08}
+%
+\newlength{\kixwidth}%
+\newlength{\kixspace}%
+\newlength{\kixsyncheight}%
+\newlength{\kixheight}%
+\newlength{\kixbase}%
+\newlength{\kixlheight}%
+\setlength{\kixwidth}{0.505mm plus 0.125mm minus 0.125mm}%
+\setlength{\kixspace}{0.505mm plus 0.125mm minus 0.105mm}%
+\setlength{\kixsyncheight}{1.27mm plus 0.25mm minus 0.25mm}%
+\setlength{\kixheight}{3.15mm plus 0.53mm minus 0.53mm}%
+\setlength{\kixbase}{\kixsyncheight}\addtolength{\kixbase}{-\kixheight}%
+\setlength{\kixlheight}{\kixheight}%
+\addtolength{\kixlheight}{\kixheight}%
+\addtolength{\kixlheight}{-\kixsyncheight}%
+\newcommand{\kixsync}{\rule{\kixwidth}{\kixsyncheight}\kern\kixwidth}%
+\newcommand{\kixup}{\rule{\kixwidth}{\kixheight}\kern\kixwidth}%
+\newcommand{\kixdown}{\rule[\kixbase]{\kixwidth}{\kixheight}\kern\kixwidth}%
+\newcommand{\kixlong}{\rule[\kixbase]{\kixwidth}{\kixlheight}\kern\kixwidth}%
+\begingroup
+   \catcode`\1=\active
+   \catcode`\2=\active
+   \catcode`\3=\active
+   \catcode`\4=\active
+   \catcode`\5=\active
+   \catcode`\6=\active
+   \catcode`\7=\active
+   \catcode`\8=\active
+   \catcode`\9=\active
+   \catcode`\0=\active
+   \catcode`\A=\active
+   \catcode`\B=\active
+   \catcode`\C=\active
+   \catcode`\D=\active
+   \catcode`\E=\active
+   \catcode`\F=\active
+   \catcode`\G=\active
+   \catcode`\H=\active
+   \catcode`\I=\active
+   \catcode`\J=\active
+   \catcode`\K=\active
+   \catcode`\L=\active
+   \catcode`\M=\active
+   \catcode`\N=\active
+   \catcode`\O=\active
+   \catcode`\P=\active
+   \catcode`\Q=\active
+   \catcode`\R=\active
+   \catcode`\S=\active
+   \catcode`\T=\active
+   \catcode`\U=\active
+   \catcode`\V=\active
+   \catcode`\W=\active
+   \catcode`\X=\active
+   \catcode`\Y=\active
+   \catcode`\Z=\active
+   \gdef\kix{%
+      \def\s{\kixsync}%
+      \def\u{\kixup}%
+      \def\d{\kixdown}%
+      \def\l{\kixlong}%
+      \catcode`\1=\active \def1{\s\d\u\l}%
+      \catcode`\2=\active \def2{\s\d\l\u}%
+      \catcode`\3=\active \def3{\d\s\u\l}%
+      \catcode`\4=\active \def4{\d\s\l\u}%
+      \catcode`\5=\active \def5{\d\d\u\u}%
+      \catcode`\6=\active \def6{\s\u\d\l}%
+      \catcode`\7=\active \def7{\s\l\s\l}%
+      \catcode`\8=\active \def8{\s\l\d\u}%
+      \catcode`\9=\active \def9{\d\u\s\l}%
+      \catcode`\0=\active \def0{\s\s\l\l}%
+      \catcode`\A=\active \defA{\d\u\d\u}%
+      \catcode`\B=\active \defB{\d\l\s\u}%
+      \catcode`\C=\active \defC{\s\u\l\d}%
+      \catcode`\D=\active \defD{\s\l\u\d}%
+      \catcode`\E=\active \defE{\s\l\l\s}%
+      \catcode`\F=\active \defF{\d\u\u\d}%
+      \catcode`\G=\active \defG{\d\u\l\s}%
+      \catcode`\H=\active \defH{\d\l\u\s}%
+      \catcode`\I=\active \defI{\u\s\d\l}%
+      \catcode`\J=\active \defJ{\u\d\s\l}%
+      \catcode`\K=\active \defK{\u\d\d\u}%
+      \catcode`\L=\active \defL{\l\s\s\l}%
+      \catcode`\M=\active \defM{\l\s\d\u}%
+      \catcode`\N=\active \defN{\l\d\s\u}%
+      \catcode`\O=\active \defO{\u\s\l\d}%
+      \catcode`\P=\active \defP{\u\d\u\d}%
+      \catcode`\Q=\active \defQ{\u\d\l\s}%
+      \catcode`\R=\active \defR{\l\s\u\d}%
+      \catcode`\S=\active \defS{\l\s\l\s}%
+      \catcode`\T=\active \defT{\l\d\u\s}%
+      \catcode`\U=\active \defU{\u\u\d\d}%
+      \catcode`\V=\active \defV{\u\l\s\d}%
+      \catcode`\W=\active \defW{\u\l\d\s}%
+      \catcode`\X=\active \defX{\l\u\s\d}%
+      \catcode`\Y=\active \defY{\l\u\d\s}%
+      \catcode`\Z=\active \defZ{\l\l\s\s}%
+}%
+\endgroup
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/linsys.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/linsys.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e1e43124d15
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/linsys.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% Copyleft
+%% Walter A. Kehowski
+%% Department of Mathematics
+%% Glendale Community College
+%% walter.kehowski@gcmail.maricopa.edu
+%% \begin{linsys}{2}
+%% -x & + & 4y & = & 8\\
+%% -3x & - & 2y & = & 6
+%% \end{linsys}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\RequirePackage{array} % TLC p465
+\RequirePackage{pifont}
+\makeatletter
+%% math-mode column types ------------------
+\newcolumntype{\@R}{>{$}r<{$}}
+\newcolumntype{\@L}{>{$}l<{$}}
+\newcolumntype{\@C}{>{$}c<{$}}
+\newcounter{@dingctr}
+\newcommand{\@wding}{\ding{\value{@dingctr}}\stepcounter{@dingctr}}
+\newcommand{\@dinglabel}{\@wding}
+\newenvironment{linsys}[1]{%
+\setcounter{@dingctr}{192}%
+\begin{tabular}{!{\@dinglabel}*{#1}{\@R\@C}\@R}}%
+{\end{tabular}\setcounter{@dingctr}{192}}
+\makeatother
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/listing.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/listing.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3592501e5b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/listing.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+%%----------------------------------------------------------------------
+%% listing.sty
+%
+% LaTeX package for typesetting listings. 
+% Documentation at end of file after \endinput.
+%
+% Requires LaTeX2e (or newer).
+%
+%
+% (C) Copyright 1994, 1996, 1999 by:
+%
+% Matthew Hebley, Volker Kuhlmann
+% University of Canterbury
+% EEE Dept
+% Christchurch, New Zealand
+% E-Mail: v.kuhlmann@elec.canterbury.ac.nz
+%         (Matthew is no longer available for contact, email or otherwise)
+%
+% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License, distributed from CTAN
+% archives as macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+% version 1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%
+%
+% HISTORY:
+%
+% 1.2   25 May 1999	Re-published under the LPPL. No other change.
+% 1.1   07 Feb 96	Added setting of \thelisting with the book and
+%			report document classes.
+% 1.0   19 Aug 94	Created.
+%
+%%----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\def\filename{listing}
+\def\fileversion{V1.2}
+\def\filedate{1999/05/25}
+
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/06/01]
+\ProvidesPackage{\filename}[\filedate]
+\typeout{Package `\filename', \fileversion, <\filedate>}
+
+
+\newcounter{listing}
+\setcounter{listing}{0}
+
+\newenvironment{listing}{%
+   \newcommand{\@captype}{listing}%
+   \@ifundefined{@bigcaptionflag}{}{%
+      \def\@makecaption##1##2{%
+         \vskip \abovecaptionskip 
+         \@listingsection*{##1:~##2}% 
+         \vskip \belowcaptionskip 
+         }
+      }
+   }%
+   {}
+
+\newcommand{\listingname}{Listing}
+\newcommand{\listlistingname}{List of Listings}
+
+\newcommand{\ext@listing}{lol}
+\newcommand{\fnum@listing}{\listingname ~\thelisting }
+\newcommand{\l@listing}{\@dottedtocline {1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+\newcommand{\listoflistings}{%
+   \@listingsection*{\listlistingname 
+      \@mkboth{\uppercase{\listlistingname}}%
+         {\uppercase{\listlistingname}}}%
+   \@starttoc {lol}%
+   }
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+   \newcommand\@listingsection{\section}%
+   }{%
+   \newcommand\@listingsection{\chapter}%
+   \renewcommand\thelisting{\thechapter.\arabic{listing}}%
+   }
+   
+\DeclareOption{bigcaptions}{%
+   \def\@bigcaptionflag{}
+}
+
+\ProcessOptions
+
+ 
+\endinput
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+Load with:
+
+	\usepackage{listing}
+or
+	\usepackage[bigcaptions]{listing}
+
+
+Package option:
+
+bigcaptions	If present, captions appear as for sections
+		(or chapters when using the "book" or "report" 
+		classes).
+		If not present, captions appear as for captions
+		in the figure or table environment.
+
+
+Available control sequences:
+
+\begin{listing}		A new environment for listings is provided.
+			Unlike figure and table, listing is NOT
+			a floating environment.
+
+\caption		As usual. (only inside listing!)
+\label			As usual. (only inside listing; after \caption!)
+\ref			As usual.
+\listoflistings		As for \listoftables, \listoffigures.
+\listingname		Produces the "Listing" text for the caption.
+\listlistingname	Produces the "List of Listings" text.
+
+
+A *.lol file is produced similar to *.lot, *.lof files.
+
+Does not change \@makecaption (unless option "bigcaptions" is used),
+so packages that change the layout of \caption still work.
+listing.sty works together with hangcaption.sty.
+
+	``Documentation is like sex.
+	  If it is good, it is REALLY good, 
+	  and if it is bad, it is better than nothing!''
+
+						[Gabe Helou]
+
+%% EOF listing.sty
+%%----------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/magaz.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/magaz.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cfed39252ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/magaz.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+% magaz.sty  Ver 0.2   04-Sep-2003  "Magazine style"
+% Copyright 1999, Donald Arseneau,   asnd@triumf.ca,  Vancouver, Canada
+% This software is free to distribute, unaltered, and to use in any 
+% application. It may be altered and incorporated in other software freely.
+%
+% This version is just a single tool from a larger body of tools I might
+% try to implement if I ever have the spare time.  I'm writing this part
+% now [1999] in response to a request on comp.text.tex.
+%
+% Yes Special formatting for first line of text in a paragraph
+% No  Special formatting for for first n lines (allow each different)
+% No  Also for first character (drop caps) (working together)
+% No  "Continued on"/"continued from" markers
+% No  wrapfig spanning columns
+% No  wrapfig placed at fixed location on page
+% NO! Piecing together fragments of gallies to fit page
+%
+% Instructions:
+%
+% The "\FirstLine" command takes one argument: Some text.
+% 
+% The first line of this text will be formatted according to
+% "\FirstLineFont"; but if the text occupies less than a line, all 
+% that text (and no more) will be affected by "\FirstLineFont".  
+% The argument should be ordinary text, not lists and displayed 
+% equations. Such things will give you a `Bad text' error.
+% 
+% This command is intended to be used in a replacement for a normal 
+% sectioning command in a document class; "\paragraph" would be 
+% appropriate.  In particular, this "\paragraph" (or whatever) should 
+% insert vertical space and penalties etc., and probably "\noindent"
+% at the start of the argument.  The document class should also define 
+% "\FirstLineFont" appropriately as either a switch or a text-command; 
+% as in "\renewcommand\FirstLineFont{\MakeUppercase}".  The defult 
+% definition is "\providecommand\FirstLineFont{\scshape}".
+
+\ProvidesPackage{magaz}[2003/09/04 v0.2]
+
+\newcommand\FirstLine[1]{\begingroup
+ % typeset text 3 times: 1) using all breaks to count segments; 2) with
+ % a full first line and \FirstLineFont to get first line and remaining
+ % segments; 3) Using current font, keeping only `remaining segments'
+ % on a single line. 
+ \setbox\z@\box\mz@firstbox \setbox\z@\box\mz@remains % void the global boxes
+ \hbadness\maxdimen \hfuzz\maxdimen
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{% 1) use all breaks
+   \hsize\z@ \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\z@skip \parfillskip\fill
+   \parshape\z@ \pretolerance\m@ne \tolerance\@ne 
+   \doublehyphendemerits\z@ \finalhyphendemerits\z@
+   #1\global\mathchardef\mz@spf\spacefactor\@@par
+   \global\mathchardef\mz@numl\prevgraf
+ }% end vbox "1)"
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{% 2) first line, plus other segments
+   \parshape \tw@ \z@\hsize \z@\maxdimen 
+   \doublehyphendemerits\z@ \finalhyphendemerits\z@
+   \pretolerance\m@ne \parfillskip\fill
+   {\FirstLineFont{#1}\@@par}%
+   \ifnum\prevgraf>\tw@ % Bad argument: not simple text or too much text
+     \mz@handlebad{#1}%
+   \else
+     \unskip\unkern\unpenalty \unskip\unkern\unpenalty
+     \ifnum\prevgraf<\tw@ % All text fits on first line
+       \setbox\z@\lastbox
+       \global\setbox\mz@firstbox\hbox{\unhbox\z@\unskip}%
+       \global\setbox\mz@remains\hbox{}%
+     \else % 2 lines: text fills first line with some left over
+       \setbox\z@\lastbox
+       \ifvoid\z@ % could not grab last line 
+         \mz@handlebad{#1}%
+       \else
+         \unskip\unkern\unpenalty \unskip\unkern\unpenalty
+         \global\setbox\mz@firstbox\lastbox % 2a) break up "other segments"
+         \hsize\z@ \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\z@skip \parfillskip\fill
+         \parshape\z@ \pretolerance\m@ne \tolerance\@ne 
+         \noindent\nobreak % \nobreak because leftskip adds breakpoint
+         \unhbox\z@\unskip\@@par % gives number of "extra segments"
+         \@tempcnta\mz@numl \advance\@tempcnta-\prevgraf 
+         \advance\@tempcnta\@ne % number of segs in 1st line plus 1
+         \edef\@tempa{\the\@tempcnta\space}% 3) Collect "other segments"
+         \@whilenum \@tempcnta>\@ne\do{% build \parshape lines
+           \edef\@tempa{\@tempa \z@\z@}%
+           \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne
+         }%
+         \parshape \@tempa \z@\maxdimen
+         #1\@@par
+         \unskip\unkern\unpenalty \unskip\unkern\unpenalty
+         \global\setbox\mz@remains\lastbox
+       \fi
+     \fi
+   \fi
+ }% end vbox "2)"
+ \endgroup
+ \ifvoid\mz@firstbox #1% Error case: just output the text
+ \else
+   \noindent
+   \unhbox\mz@firstbox\unskip\unskip\unpenalty\break
+   \unhbox\mz@remains\unskip\unskip\unpenalty \spacefactor\mz@spf
+ \fi
+}
+
+\newbox\mz@firstbox
+\newbox\mz@remains
+
+\providecommand\FirstLineFont{\scshape}
+
+% In the future, I might allow some non-text material by using \vsplit
+% as a fallback method of grabbing lines, and I might allow more or
+% unusual text in the `remainders' by skipping the step of setting two
+% lines (instead setting one first line plus many tiny lines all together).
+% The following macro would then handle those cases as an error recovery
+% mechanism.  Right now it just gives an error message and dumps out
+% the text.
+
+\def\mz@handlebad{\mz@error}
+\def\mz@error#1{%
+ \PackageError{magaz}{Bad text for \string\FirstLine\space ending\on@line}{}%
+ \global\setbox\mz@remains\box\mz@firstbox % void first box
+}
+ 
+\endinput
+
+Test file integrity:  ASCII 32-57, 58-126:  !"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789
+:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/midpage.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/midpage.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b39f667a5d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/midpage.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+% midpage.sty
+%
+% Provides a midpage environment for vertical centering
+%
+% author: Peter Wilson (CUA)
+%         (now at peter.r.wilson@boeing.com)
+% Copyright 1996
+% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License
+%
+%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{midpage}[2000/02/20 v1.1 vertical centering]
+\newenvironment{midpage}{\vspace*{\fill}}{\vspace*{\fill}}
+
+\endinput
+
+% Example use:
+% \clearpage
+% \begin{midpage}
+%  Vertically Centered Title
+% \end{midpage}
+% \clearpage
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/needspace.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/needspace.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..babec8cec55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/needspace.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+% needspace.sty
+%
+% Provides commands to reserve space at the bottom of a page. If there
+% is not enough space on the current page (column) a new page (column)
+% is started.
+%
+% author: Peter Wilson (CUA)
+%         (now at peter.r.wilson@boeing.com)
+% Copyright 1996
+% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License
+%
+%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{needspace}[2003/02/18 v1.3a reserve vertical space]
+
+\newcommand{\needspace}[1]{\begingroup\setlength{\dimen@}{#1}%
+  \vskip\z@\@plus\dimen@ \penalty -100\vskip\z@\@plus -\dimen@
+  \vskip\dimen@ \penalty 9999\vskip -\dimen@\endgroup}
+
+\newcommand{\Needspace}{\@ifstar{\@sneedsp@}{\@needsp@}}
+
+\newcommand{\@sneedsp@}[1]{\par \penalty-100\begingroup
+  \setlength{\dimen@}{#1}%
+  \dimen@ii\pagegoal \advance\dimen@ii-\pagetotal
+  \ifdim \dimen@>\dimen@ii
+    \break
+  \fi\endgroup}
+
+\newcommand{\@needsp@}[1]{\par \penalty-100\begingroup
+  \setlength{\dimen@}{#1}%
+  \dimen@ii\pagegoal \advance\dimen@ii-\pagetotal
+  \ifdim \dimen@>\dimen@ii
+    \ifdim \dimen@ii>\z@
+      \vfil
+    \fi
+    \break
+  \fi\endgroup}
+
+\endinput
+
+%     Example uses:
+%
+% ... previous text.\par
+% \needspace{5\baselineskip} % need next 5 lines on a single page/column
+% The next five lines ...
+%
+% \Needspace*{4\baselineskip} % need 4 lines kept on same page
+%    The major principles are:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item ...
+% 
+%
+%     The \needspace macro reserves an APPROXIMATE amount of space (depending
+% on what penalties are in effect) but is efficient and normally adequate.
+% A short page will be ragged bottom even if \flushbottom is in
+% effect.
+%
+%     \Needspace is less efficient but reserves the requested space. It
+% should only be used between paragraphs. Short pages produced by 
+% \Needspace{<length>} will be ragged bottom but short pages produced by 
+% \Needspace*{<length>} will be flush bottom if \flushbottom is in effect.
+%
+% Changes v1.3a (2003/02/18)
+% o At the suggestion of Donald Arseneau (private emails) changed guts of
+%   \needspace from 
+%   ... \vskip\z@\@plus\dimen@\pagebreak[3]\vskip\z@\@plus-\dimen@\endgroup}
+%
+% Changes v1.3 (2003/02/07)
+% o Added \Needspace (an extended version of postings by Donald Arseneau 
+%   to comp.text.tex e.g., in November 1993, August 1995, September 1997, ...)
+%
+% Changes v1.2 (2002/09/11)
+% o At the suggestion of Robin Fairbairns, added use of \dimen@ to capture 
+%   the argument so that calc package commands can be used in the argument.
+%
+% 
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/nolbreaks.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/nolbreaks.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..70238b56451
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/nolbreaks.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+%  nolbreaks.sty  by Donald Arseneau
+%  Public domain software -- please improve and submit to CTAN
+
+\ProvidesPackage{nolbreaks}[2002/09/19 \space v 1.0 \space 
+   - no linebreaks in text]
+
+%  Use \nolbreaks{some text} to prevent linebreaks in "some text".
+%  This has the advantage over \mbox{} that glue (rubber space) 
+%  remains flexible.  It has the disadvantage of not working in 
+%  all cases!  Most common cases are handled here (\linebreak is 
+%  disabled, for example) but spaces hidden in macros or { }
+%  can still create break-points.
+%
+%  Large pieces of text with no breaks can cause problems with
+%  paragraph justification.  Giving the package option [ragged]
+%  allows a line before the unbreakable text to be cut short.
+%  
+%  You should declare \sloppy in your document.
+
+\let\nb@ragged\relax
+
+\DeclareOption{ragged}{
+  \def\nb@ragged{%
+    \skip@\lastskip \unskip
+    \nb@counter \lastpenalty
+    \hskip \z@ plus 2cm\relax
+    \penalty\nb@counter
+    \advance\skip@ \z@ plus -2cm\relax
+    \hskip\skip@
+  }}
+\ProcessOptions
+
+\let\nb@@iwspace=\ %
+\let\nb@@hskip=\hskip
+\let\nb@@penalty=\penalty
+\newcount\nb@counter
+\ifx\langwohyphens\undefined
+ \newlanguage\nb@lang
+\else
+ \let\nb@lang\langwohyphens
+\fi
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\nolbreaks}[1]{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \begingroup
+    %  Apply flexible lead-in
+    \nb@ragged
+    %  Prevent hyphenation
+    \language\nb@lang
+    %  Disable commands that give breakpoints
+    \let\ \nb@iwspace
+    \let\hskip\nb@hskip
+    \let\penalty\nb@penalty
+    \let\language\nb@counter
+    %  Prevent breaks in math
+    \relpenalty\@M
+    \binoppenalty\@M
+    %  Prevent breaks at spaces (only outermost visible spaces)
+    \@PreserveSpaces \@empty #1 \@PreserveSpaces
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\@PreserveSpaces#1 {#1\@ifnextchar\@PreserveSpaces{\@gobble}%
+ {\@firstofone{\nb@@penalty\@M} \@PreserveSpaces\@empty}}
+
+\def\nb@iwspace{\nb@@penalty\@M \nb@@iwspace}
+\def\nb@hskip  {\nb@@penalty\@M \nb@@hskip}
+\def\nb@penalty{\nb@@penalty\@M \nb@counter}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/optional.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/optional.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..847589cb61f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/optional.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+%
+% O P T I O N A L . S T Y
+% ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+% ver 2.2b  Jan 2005
+%
+% Enable multiple versions of a document to be printed from one source file,
+% especially if most of the text is shared between versions.
+%
+% Copyright 1993,1999,2001,2005 by Donald Arseneau (asnd@triumf.ca).
+% This software is released under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public 
+% License  (ftp://ctan.tug.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt).
+% (Essentially: Free to use, copy, distribute (sell) and change, but, if
+% changed, that fact must be made apparent to the user.)  It has a
+% status of "maintained".
+%
+%
+% HOW TO USE
+% ~~~~~~~~~~
+% One way to use this package is to declare (for example)
+%
+%     \usepackage[opta]{optional}
+%
+% at the beginning of your document, and flag optional text throughout 
+% your document like:
+%
+%     \opt{opta}{Do this if option opta was declared}
+%     \opt{optb}{Do this if option optb was declared}
+%     \opt{optx,opty}{Do this if either option optx or opty}
+%     \opt{}{Never print this text!}
+%     \opt{opta}{\input{appendices}}
+%     \optv{xam}{Type: \verb|[root /]$ rm -r *|.}
+%
+% Note that both the package option and the "\opt" argument can contain
+% lists of options although, in practice, one or the other should be a
+% single option name.  Lists are allowed in both places to allow more
+% flexibility in the style of use. (But making the definitions much more
+% difficult, Grrr.)
+%
+% Just as for "\includeonly", you will have to edit the main document
+% file to switch option codes (i.e., change the "\usepackage" line).  
+% There are, however, several ways to use this package without altering 
+% the main document file: separate files, file-name sensing, interactive 
+% prompting, and command-line option selection.
+%
+% Typically, different versions of a document will require different 
+% document class and package setup, besides the different tags for
+% optional.sty.  In that case it is best to have a separate main file
+% for each version of the document.  Each stub file will declare the 
+% document class and load some packages (including this one) and then 
+% input the rest of the document from a file common to all versions.
+%
+%     \documentclass[A0]{poster}
+%     \usepackage[poster]{optional}
+%     \input{my_paper}
+%
+% If the different opt-tags match the different stub file names (file
+% poster.tex will typeset the "poster" version) then you can specify
+%
+%     \usepackage[\jobname]{optional}
+%
+% Alternatively, this "\jobname" technique can make use of symbolic links, 
+% if your computer system supports them, by having a single main input
+% file accessed under different names (and different "\jobname"s).
+%
+% Another scheme is to invoke LaTeX with the command line such as:
+%
+%     latex "\def\UseOption{opta,optb}\input{file}"
+%
+% (with quoting appropriate to your operating system) then options "opta" 
+% and "optb" will be used in addition to any options specified with the
+% "\usepackage" command.
+%
+% You can prompt yourself to specify the option(s) with every run 
+% through LaTeX:
+%
+%     \usepackage{optional}
+%     \newcommand{\ExplainOptions}{man = users manual, check = checklist,
+%           ref = reference card, post = poster.}
+%     \AskOption
+%
+% The definition of "\ExplainOptions" is optional; it only serves to help
+% the person who answers the question.  The "\AskOption" is also optional;
+% it will be executed automatically whenever optional.sty sees no list of
+% options.  This method is too tedious to use much.
+%
+% The normal restrictions forbidding special characters in package options
+% and reference tags apply also the the tags used by the "\opt" command.
+%
+% These are not `comment' macros: The optional text must be well-formed
+% with balanced braces, even if not printed.  The "\opt" command *IS* 
+% completely `expandable' which means  it is robust and can even be used
+% in messages ("\typeout").  
+%
+% As usual, "\verb" commands and verbatim environments cannot be used 
+% in the argument to "\opt".  For this purpose there is a variant form
+% of "\opt" called "\optv" (optional verbatim) which may have a limited
+% class of verbatim material in the argument.  It can do so by leaving
+% the braces around the argument, which may have undesired side effects.
+% For an "\optv" argument to be successfully ignored, the verbatim material
+% must have balanced braces etc.
+%
+% The "\opt" command is only intended for small sections of text.  If you
+% need to optionally include whole sections or chapters, put that material
+% in a separate file, and "\opt"-ionally use an "\input" command:
+%
+%     \opt{internal}{\input{prog_listings}}
+%
+%====================== END INSTRUCTIONS ========================
+
+\ProvidesPackage{optional}[2005/01/26 ver 2.2b; \space 
+  Optional inclusion/omission]
+% Initialize used-option-list to \@gobble to eat the comma when the first
+% entry is `appended'.
+\@ifundefined{UseOption}{\let\UseOption\@gobble}{}
+\DeclareOption*{\edef\UseOption{\UseOption,\CurrentOption}}
+\ProcessOptions
+\AtBeginDocument{\Opl@Setup}
+
+\newcommand*\opt[1]{\if\Opl@notlisted{#1}\expandafter\@gobble
+   \else \expandafter\@firstofone \fi}
+
+\newcommand*\optv[1]{\if\Opl@notlisted{#1}\expandafter\@gobble\fi}
+
+% This initial definition forces immediate setup if \opt used in the preamble
+\def\Opl@notlisted{\fi \Opl@Setup \if\Opl@notlisted}
+
+\newcommand\AskOption{%
+ \@ifundefined{ExplainOptions}{}{\typeout{\ExplainOptions}}%
+ \typein[\UseOption]{Specify which optional text to process:}%
+ }
+
+\def\Opl@Setup{%
+ \ifx\UseOption\@gobble\AskOption\fi
+ \let\Opl@notlisted\@empty % initialize list of checks
+ \@for\@tempa:=\UseOption\do{%
+   \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else\expandafter\Opl@oneop\expandafter{\@tempa}\fi}%
+ \ifx\Opl@notlisted\@empty \PackageWarning{optional}%
+   {No options were selected, so all optional text will be printed}%
+   \let\opt\@secondoftwo
+ \else
+   \typeout{Using optional text marked with \UseOption. }%
+   \toks@\expandafter{\Opl@notlisted}%
+   \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\Opl@notlisted####1{,\the\toks@,}}\@tempa
+ \fi
+ \let\Opl@Setup\@empty \let\Opl@oneop\undefined
+ \let\AskOption\undefined \let\ExplainOptions\undefined
+}
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\Z= 3 % special delimiter
+\gdef\Opl@oneop#1{%
+ \@ifundefined{Opl@Match@#1}{%
+   \toks@\expandafter{\Opl@notlisted}%
+   \edef\Opl@notlisted{\the\toks@ \csname Opl@Match@#1\endcsname ,####1,#1,Z}%
+  \@namedef{Opl@Match@#1}##1,#1,##2Z{##2}%
+ }\relax
+}
+\endgroup
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/oubraces.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/oubraces.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ebe2a410369
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/oubraces.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+% oubraces.sty: Interleave \overbrace with \underbrace
+%                Donald Arseneau, 1993
+%
+% \overunderbraces{upper_braces}{main_formula}{lower_braces}
+%
+% Instructions are given below, after \endinput.
+%
+%  First, set catcode of @ in case it isn't a "letter" already
+\expandafter\edef\csname REST@catcode\endcsname
+  {\catcode`\noexpand\@=\the\catcode`\@
+  \let \csname SREST@catcode\endcsname \noexpand\UnDefinedButNoAt}
+\catcode`\@=11
+
+\def\overunderbraces #1#2#3{{%
+ \baselineskip\z@skip \lineskip4\p@ \lineskiplimit4\p@
+ \displaystyle % deliberately generate error if not in math mode!
+% first, do the top half of the alignment in a save-box ...
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\ialign{&\hfil${}##{}$\hfil\cr
+   \global\let\br\br@label #1\cr % upper labels
+   \global\let\br\br@down #1\cr  % upper braces
+   #2\cr % main line of the formula
+ }}% finished partial alignment and \vbox.
+ \dimen@-\ht\z@ %   Measure height of partial alignment --
+% ... it is the height we want for the whole.
+% Now do the whole alignment (notice the repetition from above)
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\ialign{&\hfil${}##{}$\hfil\cr
+   \global\let\br\br@label #1\cr % upper labels
+   \global\let\br\br@down #1\cr  % upper braces
+   #2\cr % main line of the formula
+   \global\let\br\br@up #3\cr    % lower braces
+   \global\let\br\br@label #3\cr % lower labels
+ }}% finished whole alignment and \vbox.
+ \advance\dimen@\ht\z@ % calc. the necessary lowering
+ \lower\dimen@\hbox{\box\z@}% shift to get the desired height
+}}
+
+% Three aliases for \br.
+% #1=number of spanned columns,  #2=label
+\def\br@up#1#2{\multispan{#1}\upbracefill}
+\def\br@down#1#2{\multispan{#1}\downbracefill}
+\def\br@label#1#2{\multispan{#1}\hidewidth $#2$\hidewidth}
+
+\REST@catcode
+
+\endinput
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+% oubraces.sty: Interleave \overbrace with \underbrace
+%                Donald Arseneau, 1993
+%
+% The syntax is:
+%
+%   \overunderbraces{upper_braces}{main_formula}{lower_braces}
+%
+% Suppose we want the equation:
+%                x               y
+%          ,-----^-----.   ,-----^-----.
+%  a + b + c + d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m = \pi r^2
+%                  `-----v-----'
+%                        z
+% There are seven segments:
+%                x               y
+%          ,-----^-----.   ,-----^-----.
+%  a + b + c + d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m = \pi r^2
+%  11111111222222223333344455555666666667777777777...
+%                  `-----v-----'
+%                        z
+% Insert & between each segment (where the tips of the braces point)
+% to type the main_formula:
+%                x               y
+%          ,-----^-----.   ,-----^-----.
+%  a + b +&c + d +&e + f&+&g + h&+ i + j&+ k + l + m
+%                  `-----v-----'
+%                        z
+% Each brace should be specified by typing
+%
+%    \br{number_of_segments}{label},
+%
+% separated by  &  to indicate which segment to start at; and
+% where  & &  skips a segment that has no brace.  For our
+% example formula, the upper and lower brace specifiers are:
+%
+% top row:  &\br{2}{x}& &\br{2}{y}
+% bot row:  & &\br{3}{z}
+%
+% Now put them all together:
+%
+% \overunderbraces{&\br{2}{x}& &\br{2}{y}}%
+%    {a + b +&c + d +&e + f&+&g + h&+ i + j&+ k + l + m}%
+%    {& &\br{3}{z}}
+%  = \pi r^2
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/parskip.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/parskip.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c5ca5768349
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/parskip.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+% parskip.sty; last edited by Robin Fairbairns (rf10@cam.ac.uk),
+%              derived from:
+%
+% This is PARSKIP.STY by H.Partl, TU Wien, as of 19 Jan 1989.
+%
+% Package to be used with any document class at any size.
+% It produces the following Paragraph Layout:
+%     Zero Parindent and non-zero Parskip. The stretchable glue in \parskip
+%     helps LaTeX in finding the best place for page breaks.
+%
+% This package is no more than quick fix; the `proper' way to achieve
+% effects as far-reaching as this is to create a new class.  An
+% example class is to be found in the ntgclass set: artikel3.cls
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{parskip}[2001/04/09 non-zero parskip adjustments]
+
+\parskip=0.5\baselineskip \advance\parskip by 0pt plus 2pt
+\parindent=\z@
+     
+%
+% from a suggestion by Donald Arseneau on comp.text.tex:
+
+\DeclareOption{parfill}{\setlength{\parfillskip}{30\p@ \@plus 1fil}}
+\ProcessOptions
+
+% To accompany this, the vertical spacing in the list environments is changed
+% to use the same as \parskip in all relevant places (for normalsize only):
+%   \parsep = \parskip
+%   \itemsep = \z@ % add nothing to \parskip between items
+%   \topsep = \z@ % add nothing to \parskip before first item
+
+\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+   \topsep\z@ \parsep\parskip \itemsep\z@}
+\let\@listi\@listI
+\@listi
+     
+\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
+   \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+   \topsep\z@ \parsep\parskip \itemsep\z@}
+     
+\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
+    \labelwidth\leftmarginiii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+    \topsep\z@ \parsep\parskip \itemsep\z@}
+     
+% and, now...
+%   \partopsep = \z@ % don't even add anything before first item (beyond 
+%                    % \parskip) even if the list is preceded by a blank line
+\partopsep=\z@
+ 
+% Note that listiv, listv and listvi don't change vertical parameters.
+
+% deal with a problem raised on comp.text.tex in april 2001
+%
+% don't expand the table of contents any further
+%
+% first: check that the definition of \@starttoc is unchanged from
+% that in latex.ltx
+\@ifundefined{CheckCommand}{}{%
+  \CheckCommand*{\@starttoc}[1]{%
+    \begingroup
+      \makeatletter
+      \@input{\jobname.#1}%
+      \if@filesw
+        \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
+        \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax
+      \fi
+      \@nobreakfalse
+    \endgroup}}
+%
+% now having generated any warning that might help, redefine
+\renewcommand*{\@starttoc}[1]{%
+  \begingroup
+    \makeatletter
+    \parskip\z@
+    \@input{\jobname.#1}%
+    \if@filesw
+      \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
+      \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax
+    \fi
+    \@nobreakfalse
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+\endinput
+     
+     
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/path.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/path.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..19b0fe178ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/path.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,333 @@
+%%%  @LaTeX-style-file
+%%%  {
+%%%     author          = "Philip Taylor",
+%%%     version         = "3.03b",
+%%%     date            = "22 July 1997",
+%%%     time            = "15:59:31 BST",
+%%%     filename        = "path.sty",
+%%%     address         = "The Computer Centre
+%%%                        RHBNC, University of London
+%%%                        Egham Hill
+%%%                        Egham, Surrey TW20 0EX, ENGLAND",
+%%%     telephone       = "Tel:   +44 1784 443172",
+%%%     FAX             = "Fax:   +44 1784 434348",
+%%%     email           = "P.Taylor@Vms.Rhbnc.Ac.Uk",
+%%%     codetable       = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%     keywords        = "file name, filename, path name, pathname,
+%%%                        discretionary, discretionaries",
+%%%     supported       = "yes",
+%%%     docstring       = {Computer filenames, host names, and e-mail
+%%%                        addresses tend to be long strings that
+%%%                        cause line breaking problems for TeX.
+%%%                        Sometimes rather long strings are
+%%%                        encountered, such as:
+%%%
+%%%                        mighty-mouse-gw.scrc.symbolics.com
+%%%
+%%%                        This file defines a macro, \path|...|,
+%%%                        similar to LaTeX's \verb|...| macro, that
+%%%                        sets the text in the typewriter font,
+%%%                        allowing hyphen-less line breaks at
+%%%                        punctuation characters.
+%%%
+%%%                        The default set of punctuation characters is
+%%%                        defined as
+%%%
+%%%                        \discretionaries |~!@$%^&*()_+`-=#{"}[]:;'<>,.?\/|
+%%%
+%%%                        However, you can change it as needed, for
+%%%                        example
+%%%
+%%%                        \discretionaries +@%!.+
+%%%
+%%%                        would assign to it the set @ % ! . which
+%%%                        commonly occur in electronic mail addresses.
+%%%
+%%%                        The delimiter characters surrounding the
+%%%                        arguments to \discretionaries and \path
+%%%                        will normally be a punctuation character not
+%%%                        found in the argument, and not otherwise
+%%%                        significant to TeX.  In particular, backslash
+%%%                        cannot be used as a delimiter.  In the rare
+%%%                        event that this is required, set
+%%%
+%%%                        \specialpathdelimiterstrue
+%%%
+%%%                        This practice is not recommended, because TeX
+%%%                        then runs about four times slower while it is
+%%%                        typesetting \path\...\ requests.
+%%%                        \specialpathdelimitersfalse is the normal
+%%%                        setting.
+%%%
+%%%                        This file may be used in Plain TeX or AmSTeX
+%%%                        by
+%%%
+%%%                        \input path.sty
+%%%
+%%%                        and in LaTeX by
+%%%
+%%%                        \usepackage {path}
+%%%
+%%%                        The checksum field above, if present, contains
+%%%                        a CRC-16 checksum as the first value, followed
+%%%                        by the equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word
+%%%                        count) utility output of lines, words, and
+%%%                        characters.  This is produced by Robert
+%%%                        Solovay's checksum utility.
+%%%                       }
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+
+% ======================================================================
+%
+%                          The \path Macro
+%
+% An early prototype of this code which was developed by Nelson H. F.
+% Beebe <beebe@math.utah.edu> used a recursive macro to peel off one
+% character at a time, then with a nest of \ifx statements, test for
+% each punctuation character, and if one is found, insert discretionary
+% linebreaks in the form of \- or \penalty0.  While this usually works,
+% it is not entirely satisfactory, because the nested \ifx statements
+% are ugly, and the recursion can exhaust TeX's macro stack for
+% arguments longer than about 30 characters.
+%
+% A second version by NHFB built upon the ideas used by the LaTeX
+% \verb|...| macro; this was mostly successful, but was flawed by its
+% inability to handle at least the three characters ^ [ ], by loss of
+% use of @ for naming internal private macros, and by its inability to
+% allow the set of characters at which breaks are permissible.
+%
+% The problem was then passed off to Philip Taylor, who wrote this third
+% version which fully solves the problem.  Phil therefore gets the
+% author credit in the file header above.  [Gee, thanks !  ** Phil]
+%
+% Revision history (reverse time order):
+%
+% 3.03b [22-Jul-1997]
+% Summary:   No code changes.  An out-of-date example removed, the syntax
+%            for LaTeX2e changed to "\usepackage {path}", and the "checksum"
+%            comments modified to indicate that the checksum is not necessarily
+%            present.  The initial opening brace re-positioned to align
+%            with the matching closing brace, and the inner closing brace
+%            re-positioned to align with the inner opening brace.  A check made
+%            to ensure that no <tab> characters are present.
+%
+% 3.03a [22-Jul-1997]
+% Summary:   No code changes from V3.03; e-mail addresses, telephone numbers,
+%            etc. amended to reflect current situation.  Checksum removed.
+%
+% 3.03 [03-Dec-1991]
+% Problem:   A \path|...| entry in a LaTeX index is set with an
+%            preceding blank line.
+% Solution:  Add \leavevmode before \hbox{}; without it, an extra blank
+%            line gets typeset before every invocation of \path in a
+%            LaTeX theindex environment.
+% Diagnosis: To avoid hyphenation, the expansion of \path starts with
+%            an \hbox{} (c.f. the TeXbook, p. 454); LaTeX indices are
+%            basically set in vertical mode, with each index entry a
+%            paragraph in its own right; when an \hbox {} is
+%            encountered in vmode, it is typeset in vmode, and TeX
+%            continues; the first real character is encountered, and
+%            TeX enters unrestricted horizontal mode.  The \hbox {} and
+%            the first character are therefore on separate lines,
+%            separated by \baselineskip.
+%
+% 3.02 [23-Oct-1991 13:45:12]
+% First released version.
+% ======================================================================
+
+\immediate\write16{This is path.sty, Version 3.03 <03-Dec-1991>}
+
+%%% We will regrettably need one \count variable with an open name,
+%%% in which to save the category code of commercial-at ...
+
+\newcount \ATcode
+\ATcode = \catcode `\@
+
+%%% Make commercial-at a letter to provide concealed control sequences
+
+\catcode `\@ = 11
+
+%%% and then declare two \count variables with concealed names
+
+\newcount \c@tcode
+\newcount \c@unter
+
+%%% and a boolean variable with an open name, to specify the nature of
+%%% the delimiters which will be associated with the \path command
+
+\newif \ifspecialpathdelimiters
+
+%%% We need to define control sequences which expand to both
+%%% active and passive spaces ...
+
+\begingroup
+\catcode `\ = 10
+\gdef \passivesp@ce { }
+\catcode `\ = 13\relax%
+\gdef\activesp@ce{ }%
+\endgroup
+
+%%% \discretionaries will define a macro \discr@ti@n@ri@s which will
+%%% make every character between the first and final <delim> a
+%%% discretionary breakpoint.
+
+\def \discretionaries %%% <delim> <chars> <delim>
+     % start a group (ended in \discr@ti@naries ),
+     % make every character (apart from space) active,
+     % then transfer control to \discr@tionaries ...
+    {\begingroup
+        \c@tcodes = 13
+        \discr@tionaries
+    }
+
+%%% \discr@tionaries will receive as parameter the initial <delim>
+%%% which will delimit the set of discretionaries; this <delim>
+%%% will be active.
+
+\def \discr@tionaries #1%%% <delim>
+     % knowing the initial <delim>, define \discr@ti@naries with a
+     % delimited parameter structure, the final delimiter being
+     % the second instance of <delim>
+    {\def \discr@ti@naries ##1#1%%% <chars> <delim>
+          % \discr@ti@naries will receive as parameter the set of
+          % characters which are to be made discretionaries; it ends the
+          % group and then defines \discr@ti@n@ries, a tail-recursive
+          % macro, which will quietly process each of the
+          % discretionaries in turn ...
+         {\endgroup
+          \def \discr@ti@n@ries ####1%%% <char> or <delim>
+               % by checking to see if it has reached the end of the
+               % list, i.e. comparing its parameter with the known final
+               % <delim> ...
+              {\if   \noexpand ####1\noexpand #1%
+                     % if they match, there is no more to do ...
+                     \let \n@xt = \relax
+               \else
+                     % otherwise the character becomes active and is
+                     % defined as a discretionary with the three texts
+                     % <self> <empty> <self>, thus suppressing true
+                     % hyphenation; the macro then prepares to process
+                     % the next character.
+                     \catcode `####1 = 13
+                     \def ####1{\discretionary
+                                  {\char `####1}{}{\char `####1}}%
+                     \let \n@xt = \discr@ti@n@ries
+               \fi
+               % here either tail recursion occurs, if there are more
+               % characters to process, or tail recursion ceases if all
+               % have been exhausted
+               \n@xt
+              }%
+          % of course, none of this must take place during the \stress
+          % {call} of \discretionaries; execution is deferred until
+          % another macro such as \path calls the concealed action
+          % macro \discr@ti@n@ri@s; we therefore define this macro to
+          % have the desired effect.
+          \def \discr@ti@n@ri@s {\discr@ti@n@ries ##1#1}%
+         }%
+     % and finally invoke \discr@ti@naries to process the set of
+     % discretionary characters; it will take everything up to the
+     % second instance of <delim> as its parameter (and therefore as the
+     % set of characters to be processed).
+     \discr@ti@naries
+    }
+
+%%% \path, which is the user interface to \p@th, first checks
+%%% to see whether \specialpathdelimiters is <true> or <false>;
+%%% if <true>, it needs to take special action to ensure that
+%%% \stress {all} characters (apart from <space>) are acceptable
+%%% as delimiters; this is very time-consuming, and should be
+%%% avoided if at all possible.  It also defines \endp@th, to
+%%% close the appropriate number of groups, and finally transfers
+%%% control to \p@th
+
+\def \path
+    {\ifspecialpathdelimiters
+        \begingroup
+        \c@tcodes = 12
+        \def \endp@th {\endgroup \endgroup}%
+     \else
+        \let \endp@th = \endgroup
+     \fi
+     \p@th
+    }
+
+%%% \p@th, which has essentially the same syntax as \discretionaries,
+%%% expects to be followed by a <delim>, a <path>, and a second instance
+%%% of <delim>; it will typeset <path> in the \tt font with hyphenation
+%%% inhibited --- breaks (but not true hyphenation) are allowed at any
+%%% or all of the special characters which have
+%%% previously been declared as \discretionaries.
+
+\def \p@th #1%%% <delim>
+     % it starts by opening a group (ended in \p@@th) ...
+     % switches to \tt, and inhibits hyphenation;
+     % allows breaks at \discretionaries;  saves the
+     % catcode of the initial <delim>, because if it has also been
+     % declared within \discretionaries, the initial and final <delim>
+     % won't match (which would be a disaster); \c@tcode is overloaded,
+     % but there is no conflict that I can detect ...
+     % invokes \discr@ti@n@ri@s to render active the set of special
+     % characters which have previously been declared as
+     % \discretionaries; each of these characters will expand to a real
+     % \discretionary, with replacement texts <self> <null> <self>; and
+     % re-instates the catcode of the initial <delim>.
+    {\begingroup
+        \tt
+        \c@tcode = \catcode `#1
+        \discr@ti@n@ri@s
+        \catcode `\ = \active
+        \expandafter \edef \activesp@ce {\passivesp@ce \hbox {}}%
+        \catcode `#1 = \c@tcode
+        % it next defines an inner macro \p@@th with delimited parameter
+        % structure, the final delimiter being the same as the initial
+        % delimiter which it has itself received as #1.
+        \def \p@@th ##1#1% <chars> <delim>
+             % Within \p@@th,
+             % permissible breakpoints are specified,
+             % the path is typeset,
+             % and the group(s) ended.
+            {\leavevmode \hbox {}##1%
+             \endp@th
+            }%
+     \p@@th
+    }
+
+%%% \c@tcodes expects to be followed by the r-h-s of a numeric
+%%% assignment optionally including the assignment operator; it saves
+%%% the value of the r-h-s in \c@tcode, and invokes \c@tc@des.
+
+\def \c@tcodes {\afterassignment \c@tc@des \c@tcode}
+
+%%% \c@tc@des uses the value saved in \c@tcode, and assigns it to the
+%%% \catcode of all characters with the single exception of <space>,
+%%% which retains its normal catcode of 10; on exit, every single
+%%% character apart from <space> will have the catcode which followed
+%%% \c@tcodes.  The code is optimised to avoid unnecessary usage of
+%%% save-stack space.
+
+\def \c@tc@des
+    {\c@unter = 0
+     \loop
+            \ifnum \catcode \c@unter = \c@tcode
+            \else
+                \catcode \c@unter = \c@tcode
+            \fi
+     \ifnum \c@unter < 255
+            \advance \c@unter by 1
+     \repeat
+     \catcode `\ = 10
+    }
+
+%%% We restore the original catcode of commercial-at
+
+\catcode `\@ = \ATcode
+
+%%% Define a default set of discretionary break characters
+%%% to include all punctuation characters except vertical
+%%% bar
+
+\discretionaries |~!@$%^&*()_+`-=#{}[]:";'<>,.?\/|
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/perpage.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/perpage.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a9412b77c17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/perpage.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+% $Id: perpage.sty,v 1.2 2002/12/20 19:25:34 dak Exp $
+% The following package adds the ability to reset counters per page.
+% Usage example:
+% \MakePerPage[2]{footnote}
+% will start footnote numbers with 2 on each page (the optional
+% argument defaults to 1).  2 might be a strange number, unless
+% you have \renewcommand\thefootnote{\fnsymbol{footnote}} and
+% want to start off with a dagger.  This may need multiple passes
+% to work: LaTeX will complain about changed labels if you need
+% another pass.
+% Copyright 2002 David Kastrup, <David.Kastrup@t-online.de>
+% distributable under the LPPL
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{perpage}[2002/12/20 v1.0 Reset counters per page]
+\newcommand*\MakePerPage[2][\@ne]{%
+  \expandafter\def\csname c@pchk@#2\endcsname{\c@pchk@{#2}{#1}}%
+  \newcounter{pcabs@#2}%
+  \@addtoreset{pchk@#2}{#2}}
+
+\def\new@pagectr#1{\@newl@bel{pchk@#1}}
+
+\def\c@pchk@#1#2{\z@=\z@
+  \begingroup
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\next\csname pchk@#1@\arabic{pcabs@#1}\endcsname
+  \addtocounter{pcabs@#1}\@ne
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname pchk@#1@\arabic{pcabs@#1}\endcsname\next
+  \else \setcounter{#1}{#2}\fi
+  \protected@edef\next{%
+    \string\new@pagectr{#1}{\arabic{pcabs@#1}}{\noexpand\thepage}}%
+  \protected@write\@auxout{}{\next}%
+  \endgroup\global\z@}
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/printlen.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/printlen.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..067eff68957
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/printlen.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
+% printlen.sty  Print lengths in a variety of units
+%
+% Author: Peter Wilson (CUA)
+%         (now at peter.r.wilson@boeing.com)
+% Copyright 2001 Peter R. Wilson
+% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License 
+%
+% Extensions courtesy of Harald Harders (h.harders@tu-bs.de)
+%
+% Usage instructions are at the end of this file.
+% 
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{printlen}[2001/12/09 v1.1 print lengths with units]
+%
+% \uselengthunit{<unit>} sets \l@nunits to the value of <unit>
+% and \l@nunitperpt to the number of <unit> in 1pt.
+\newcommand{\uselengthunit}[1]{%
+  \def\l@nunitperpt{1.0}\def\l@nunits{pt}%
+  \def\l@nta{#1}\def\l@ntb{pt}%
+  \ifx \l@nta\l@ntb
+    \def\l@nunitperpt{1.0}\def\l@nunits{pt}%
+  \else
+    \def\l@ntb{pc}%
+    \ifx \l@nta\l@ntb
+      \def\l@nunitperpt{0.083333}\def\l@nunits{pc}%
+    \else
+      \def\l@ntb{in}%
+      \ifx \l@nta\l@ntb
+        \def\l@nunitperpt{0.013837}\def\l@nunits{in}%
+      \else
+        \def\l@ntb{mm}%
+        \ifx \l@nta\l@ntb
+          \def\l@nunitperpt{0.351459}\def\l@nunits{mm}%
+        \else
+          \def\l@ntb{cm}%
+          \ifx \l@nta\l@ntb
+            \def\l@nunitperpt{0.0351459}\def\l@nunits{cm}%
+          \else
+            \def\l@ntb{bp}%
+            \ifx \l@nta\l@ntb
+              \def\l@nunitperpt{0.996264}\def\l@nunits{bp}%
+            \else
+              \def\l@ntb{dd}%
+              \ifx \l@nta\l@ntb
+                \def\l@nunitperpt{0.9345718}\def\l@nunits{dd}%
+              \else
+                \def\l@ntb{cc}%
+                \ifx \l@nta\l@ntb
+                  \def\l@nunitperpt{0.0778809}\def\l@nunits{cc}%
+                \else
+                  \def\l@ntb{PT}%
+                  \ifx \l@nta\l@ntb
+                    \def\l@nunitperpt{1.0}\def\l@nunits{PT}%
+                  \fi
+                \fi
+              \fi
+            \fi
+          \fi
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+\uselengthunit{pt}
+
+% \printlength{<length>} prints the value of <length> in the units set 
+% by \uselengthunit.
+\newcommand{\printlength}[1]{%
+  \def\l@nta{pt}\ifx\l@nta\l@nunits\the#1\else
+    \def\l@nta{PT}%
+    \@tempdimc=\l@nunitperpt #1\relax\strip@pt\@tempdimc 
+    \unitspace\relax\ifmmode
+      \mathrm{\ifx\l@nta\l@nunits pt\else\l@nunits\fi}%
+    \else
+      \ifx\l@nta\l@nunits pt\else\l@nunits\fi
+    \fi\fi}
+
+% \rndprintlength{<length>} prints the rounded value of <length> in
+% the units set by \uselengthunit. Contributed by Harald Harders.
+\def\@round#1.#2\@empty{#1}%
+\newcommand{\rndprintlength}[1]{%
+  \def\l@nta{pt}\ifx\l@nta\l@nunits\the#1\else
+    \def\l@nta{PT}%
+    \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\l@nunitperpt #1}%
+      \addtolength{\@tempdimc}{0.5pt}%
+    \edef\@@round{\strip@pt\@tempdimc}%
+    \expandafter\@round\@@round.\@empty
+    \unitspace\relax\ifmmode
+      \mathrm{\ifx\l@nta\l@nunits pt\else\l@nunits\fi}%
+    \else
+      \ifx\l@nta\l@nunits pt\else\l@nunits\fi
+    \fi\fi}
+
+% Small space. Contributed by Harald Harders.
+\newcommand{\unitspace}{\,}
+
+\endinput
+
+% USAGE:
+%
+%    \printlength{<length>} prints the value of a LaTeX length in the 
+% units specified by \uselengthunit{<unit>}, where <unit> may be any TeX
+% length unit except for scaled point. That is, <unit> may be any of:
+% pt, pc, in, mm, cm, bp, dd or cc. When pt is set the printed length
+% value will include any stretch or shrink values, otherwise these
+% are not printed. The <unit> argument may also be PT, in which case
+% length values will be printed in pt units but without any stretch
+% or shrink values. An unknown value for <unit> is treated as though it
+% had been specified as pt.
+%    The unit is separated from the number using the command
+% \unitspace which is set to \, by default. In math mode the units are
+% printed upright.
+%    \rndprintlength{<length>} prints the rounded value of a LaTeX length.
+% Use PT instead of pt for rounded points if there are stretch or
+% shrink values.
+%
+%    The initial setting is \uselengthunit{pt}
+%
+% Example:
+%
+% The \verb|\textwidth| is \printlength{\textwidth} which is also
+% \uselengthunit{in}\printlength{\textwidth} and
+% \uselengthunit{mm}\printlength{\textwidth}.
+%
+% Changes:
+%
+% Version 1.1 (2001/12/09)
+% o Print rounded values
+% o Space between value and units
+%
+% Version 1.0 (2001/11/03)
+% o First public release
+%
+% Peter W. 
+% Harald Harders
+% 2001/12/09
+%
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/proba.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/proba.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a282ff50f50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/proba.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `proba.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% proba.dtx 
+%% 
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%% 
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%% 
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from proba.sty.
+%% 
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file proba.dtx.
+%% 
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+\RequirePackage{amsfonts}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\A}[0]{\mathbb{A}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\B}[0]{\mathbb{B}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\C}[0]{\mathbb{C}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\D}[0]{\mathbb{D}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\E}[0]{\mathbb{E}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\F}[0]{\mathbb{F}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\G}[0]{\mathbb{G}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\H}[0]{\mathbb{H}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\I}[0]{\mathbb{I}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\J}[0]{\mathbb{J}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\K}[0]{\mathbb{K}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\L}[0]{\mathbb{L}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\M}[0]{\mathbb{M}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\N}[0]{\mathbb{N}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\O}[0]{\mathbb{O}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\P}[0]{\mathbb{P}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\Q}[0]{\mathbb{Q}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\R}[0]{\mathbb{R}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\S}[0]{\mathbb{S}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\T}[0]{\mathbb{T}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\U}[0]{\mathbb{U}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\V}[0]{\mathbb{V}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\W}[0]{\mathbb{W}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\X}[0]{\mathbb{X}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\Y}[0]{\mathbb{Y}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\Z}[0]{\mathbb{Z}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calA}[0]{{\mathcal A}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calB}[0]{{\mathcal B}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calC}[0]{{\mathcal C}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calD}[0]{{\mathcal D}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calE}[0]{{\mathcal E}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calF}[0]{{\mathcal F}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calG}[0]{{\mathcal G}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calH}[0]{{\mathcal H}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calI}[0]{{\mathcal I}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calJ}[0]{{\mathcal J}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calK}[0]{{\mathcal K}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calL}[0]{{\mathcal L}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calM}[0]{{\mathcal M}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calN}[0]{{\mathcal N}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calO}[0]{{\mathcal O}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calP}[0]{{\mathcal P}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calQ}[0]{{\mathcal Q}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calR}[0]{{\mathcal R}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calS}[0]{{\mathcal S}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calT}[0]{{\mathcal T}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calU}[0]{{\mathcal U}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calV}[0]{{\mathcal V}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calW}[0]{{\mathcal W}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calX}[0]{{\mathcal X}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calY}[0]{{\mathcal Y}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\calZ}[0]{{\mathcal Z}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\prob}[1][P]{\ensuremath {\mathbb{#1}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\probX}[2][{\mathbb{P}}]{\ensuremath{ {#1}\left[ {#2} \right]}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\probCX}[3][{\mathbb{P}}]{\ensuremath{ {#1}\left[ {#2} \big| {#3} \right]}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\EX}[2][{\mathbb{E}}]{\ensuremath {#1}\left[ {#2} \right]}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cEX}[3][{\mathbb{E}}]{\ensuremath {#1}\left[ {#2} \big| {#3} \right]}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\Var}[1][]{\ensuremath{\mathrm{Var[#1]}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\VarX}[2][]{\ensuremath{\mathrm{Var}_{#1}\left[ {#2} \right]}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cVarX}[3][]{\ensuremath \mathrm{Var}_{#1}\left[ {#2} \big| {#3} \right]}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\eqlaw}[0]{\mathop{\stackrel{(d)}{=}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\tolaw}[0]{\mathop{\stackrel{(d)}{\longrightarrow}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\qvar}[2]{\ensuremath{\left[ {#1},{#2} \right]}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cqvar}[2]{\ensuremath{\langle {#1},\,{#2} \rangle}}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `proba.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/relsize.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/relsize.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..febbf0ac7a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/relsize.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,393 @@
+% relsize.sty       3.1       July 4, 2003
+% This software is contributed to the public domain.
+
+% LaTex2e version by Donald Arseneau <asnd@triumf.ca> and
+% Matt Swift <swift@bu.edu>.
+% Original LaTex2.09 smaller.sty author: Bernie Cosell <cosell@WILMA.BBN.COM> 
+%
+% Setting the font size relative to the current size
+%
+% commands are:
+% \relsize{n}  where n gives the number of steps ("mag-step" = factor of 1.2)
+%              to change the size by;  n = 3 changes from \normalsize to 
+%              \LARGE size.  Negative n selects smaller fonts.
+% \smaller == \relsize{-1}
+% \larger  == \relsize{1}
+% \textsmaller{text}, \textlarger{text} - versions that take an argument
+%
+% \relscale{f} is equivalent to \relsize, but instead of scale-steps,
+%               the parameter is a scale factor, such as .75
+% \textscale{f}{text}
+%
+% The font-size command nearest the requested size will be used, and if
+% the size error is more than \RSpercentTolerance, then the size will
+% be adjusted more precisely.  (The default empty \RSpercentTolerance
+% signals automatic handling, choosing the tolerance based on the
+% font declarations.)
+%
+% \mathsmaller{A}, \mathlarger{B}       - math versions 
+%   (The math versions are entirely different from the text versions.)
+%
+% There are more instructions at the end of this file (after \endinput).
+
+\ProvidesPackage{relsize}[2003/07/04 ver 3.1]
+
+% The next two aren't the real initializations!  The real ones are done
+% in \@tempb below.  The user can change them afterwards.
+
+\def\RSsmallest{999pt}
+\def\RSlargest{1pt}
+
+% First, right now, we assemble a list of the font sizes
+
+\def\rs@size{\noexpand\rs@size\noexpand}
+\def\rs@fontsizes{}
+\def\@tempa#1{\ifx\@undefined#1\else
+  \expandafter\@tempb#1\delimiter{#1}\fi}
+\def\@absVal#1{\ifnum#1<\z@-\fi#1}
+% parse definition of font-size command (like \large)
+% #1 = \@setfontsize  #2 = the command (\large) #3 = size #4 = rest
+\def\@tempb#1#2#3#4\delimiter#5{%
+  \@tempdimb\z@
+  \ifx\@setfontsize#1\relax\ifx#5#2\@firstofone\relax
+    \afterassignment\strip@prefix \@tempdimb #3pt>%
+  \fi\fi
+  \ifdim\@tempdimb=\z@
+    \def\rs@fontsizes{}%
+    \let\@tempa\@gobble
+  \else
+    \edef\rs@fontsizes{\rs@fontsizes\rs@size#2{\the\@tempdimb}}%
+    \ifdim\@tempdimb<\RSsmallest \edef\RSsmallest{\the\@tempdimb}\fi
+    \ifdim\@tempdimb>\RSlargest \edef\RSlargest{\the\@tempdimb}\fi
+  \fi}
+
+% examine each (expected) pre-defined font size 
+\@tempa\normalsize
+\@tempa\small
+\@tempa\footnotesize
+\@tempa\large
+\@tempa\Large
+\@tempa\LARGE
+\@tempa\scriptsize
+\@tempa\tiny
+\@tempa\huge
+\@tempa\Huge
+\@tempa\HUGE  % moresize.sty
+\@tempa\ssmall
+
+\ifx\rs@fontsizes\@empty % ----------------------------------------------
+
+\PackageWarning{relsize}{Failed to get list of font sizes.\MessageBreak
+  Falling back to old definition.}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand\relsize[1]{%
+\ifmmode \@nomath\relsize\else
+ \begingroup
+ \@tempcnta % assign number representing current font size
+   \ifx\@currsize\normalsize 4\else   % funny order is to have most ...
+    \ifx\@currsize\small 3\else       % ...likely sizes checked first
+     \ifx\@currsize\footnotesize 2\else
+      \ifx\@currsize\large 5\else
+       \ifx\@currsize\Large 6\else
+        \ifx\@currsize\LARGE 7\else
+         \ifx\@currsize\scriptsize 1\else
+          \ifx\@currsize\tiny 0\else
+           \ifx\@currsize\huge 8\else
+            \ifx\@currsize\Huge 9\else
+            4\rs@unknown@warning % unknown state: \normalsize as starting point
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+%  Change the number by the given increment:
+ \advance\@tempcnta#1\relax
+%  watch out for size underflow:
+ \ifnum\@tempcnta<\z@ \rs@size@warning{small}{\string\tiny}\@tempcnta\z@ \fi
+ \expandafter\endgroup
+ \ifcase\@tempcnta  % set new size based on altered number
+    \tiny \or \scriptsize \or \footnotesize \or \small \or \normalsize \or 
+    \large \or \Large \or \LARGE \or \huge \or \Huge \else 
+     \rs@size@warning{large}{\string\Huge}\Huge
+\fi\fi}
+
+\else % ----------------------------------------------
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand\relsize[1]{%
+\ifmmode \@nomath\relsize\else
+  \begingroup
+  % number of demi-magsteps -> \@tempcnta
+  \@tempdima#1\p@ \@tempdima2.0002\@tempdima \divide\@tempdima\p@
+  \@tempcnta\@tempdima
+  % \message{^^JChange \the\@tempcnta\space half-magsteps from \f@size. }%
+  % calculate desired target size -> \@tempdimb
+  \@tempdimb\f@size\p@
+  \ifnum\@tempcnta<\z@ 
+    \def\@tempa{.912871}\@tempcnta=-\@tempcnta
+  \else
+    \def\@tempa{1.09545}%
+  \fi
+  \@whilenum {\@tempcnta>\z@}\do {%
+    \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne
+    \@tempdimb\@tempa\@tempdimb}%
+  % \message{ target size \the\@tempdimb. }%
+  \rs@scaleToB
+\fi}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand\relscale[1]{%
+\ifmmode \@nomath\relscale\else
+  \begingroup
+  \@tempdimb\f@size\p@ \@tempdimb#1\@tempdimb
+  \rs@scaleToB
+\fi}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand\textscale[2]{\leavevmode
+  \begingroup\relscale{#1}#2\endgroup}
+
+%  Change font size to \@tempdimb.  Follows from \relsize or \relscale
+\def\rs@scaleToB{%
+  % perform automatic tolerance adjustment, if requested
+  \ifx\RSpercentTolerance\@empty \rs@autoTol \fi
+  % apply limits
+  \ifdim\@tempdimb<\RSsmallest \@tempdimb=\RSsmallest 
+      \rs@size@warning{small}{\RSsmallest}\fi
+  \ifdim\@tempdimb>\RSlargest \@tempdimb=\RSlargest 
+      \rs@size@warning{large}{\RSlargest}\fi
+  % look up that size in list of pre-defined sizes.  Puts error of
+  % closest match in \@tempdima
+  \let\@tempa\relax  \@tempdima\maxdimen
+  \let\rs@size\rs@lookup  \rs@fontsizes
+  % \message{ Look up best as \expandafter\string\@tempa\space 
+  %     (off by \the\@tempdima}%
+  % See how close match was (abs difference -> \@tempdima)
+  \ifdim\@tempdima<\z@ \@tempdima-\@tempdima\fi
+  %  ... percentage error in \@tempdima (as a count)
+  \@tempdima 100\@tempdima \divide\@tempdima\@tempdimb
+  % if error is beyond tolerance, append \fontsize adjustment
+  % \message{ or \number\@tempdima \expandafter\@gobble\string\%). }%
+  \ifnum\@tempdima>\RSpercentTolerance
+    % \message{ adjust size to \strip@pt\@tempdimb. }%
+    \@tempdima1.2\@tempdimb % baselineskip
+    \edef\@tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\@tempa \noexpand\fontsize
+      {\strip@pt\@tempdimb}{\strip@pt\@tempdima}\noexpand\selectfont}\fi
+  % Now execute size-change command \@tempa
+  \expandafter\endgroup\@tempa}
+
+% For each defined font size, compare its actual size to the desired
+% size (\@tempdimb) and the error of the best previous match (\@tempdima).
+% Record this command (\@tempa) if it is closer.
+\def\rs@lookup#1#2{% #1=command #2=size
+  \begingroup
+  \advance\@tempdimb-#2\relax
+  \ifdim\@absVal\@tempdimb<\@absVal\@tempdima % improvement
+    \endgroup
+    \def\@tempa{#1}%
+    \@tempdima#2\relax \advance\@tempdima-\@tempdimb
+  \else
+    \endgroup
+  \fi}
+
+\fi  % ----------------------------------------------
+
+
+% Tolerance for size mis-match (%).  The empty definition triggers
+% automatic selection: 5 for scalable fonts, 30 otherwise.
+
+\def\RSpercentTolerance{}
+
+\def\rs@autoTol{%
+  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\rs@autoTOL
+  \expandafter\meaning
+  \csname\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series/\f@shape\endcsname-\delimiter
+}
+\def\rs@autoTOL#1>#2-#3\delimiter{%
+   \ifx\delimiter#3\delimiter % no -
+     \def\RSpercentTolerance{30}%
+   \else % font size def has -, assume it covers continuum 
+     \def\RSpercentTolerance{5}%
+   \fi
+   % \message{ Automatic tolerance is \RSpercentTolerance. }%
+}
+
+%  Warning messages
+
+\newcommand\rs@size@warning[2]{\PackageWarning{relsize}{%
+ Size requested is too #1.\MessageBreak Using #2 instead}}
+
+\newcommand\rs@unknown@warning{\PackageWarning{relsize}{Current font size 
+ is unknown! (Why?!?)\MessageBreak Assuming \string\normalsize}}
+
+% derived commands
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand\larger[1][\@ne]{\relsize{+#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\smaller[1][\@ne]{\relsize{-#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\textlarger[2][\@ne]{{\relsize{+#1}#2}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\textsmaller[2][\@ne]{{\relsize{-#1}#2}}
+
+% math commands (completely different)
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand\mathsmaller[1]{\bgroup
+  \let\rs@makechoice\rs@makesmallerchoice
+  \def\rs@mathatom{#1}%
+  \futurelet\@tempa\rs@collect@decor
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\mathlarger[1]{\bgroup
+  \let\rs@makechoice\rs@makelargerchoice
+  \def\rs@mathatom{#1}%
+  \futurelet\@tempa\rs@collect@decor
+}
+
+% math so far is in \rs@mathatom; next tok is \@tempa; continuation is \@tempb
+% Don't nest \ifs because token may be \if or \fi or \or...
+\def\rs@collect@decor{%
+  \let\@tempb\rs@makechoice
+  \ifx\@tempa\limits \let\@tempb\rs@collect@one@decor \fi
+  \ifx\@tempa\displaylimits \let\@tempb\rs@collect@one@decor \fi
+  \ifx\@tempa\nolimits \let\@tempb\rs@collect@one@decor \fi
+  \if\noexpand\@tempa^\let\@tempb\rs@collect@two@decor \fi 
+  \if\noexpand\@tempa_\let\@tempb\rs@collect@two@decor \fi 
+  \ifx\@tempa\sp \let\@tempb\rs@collect@two@decor \fi
+  \ifx\@tempa\sb \let\@tempb\rs@collect@two@decor \fi
+  \@tempb}
+\def\rs@collect@one@decor#1{%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\rs@mathatom\expandafter{\rs@mathatom#1}%
+  \futurelet\@tempa\rs@collect@decor}
+\def\rs@collect@two@decor#1#2{\expandafter
+  \def\expandafter\rs@mathatom\expandafter{\rs@mathatom#1{\rs@sstyle{#2}}}%
+  \futurelet\@tempa\rs@collect@decor}
+\let\rs@sstyle\@firstofone
+
+\def\rs@makesmallerchoice{\mathchoice
+  {\textstyle \let\rs@sstyle\scriptstyle \rs@mathatom}%
+  {\scriptstyle \let\rs@sstyle\scriptstyle \rs@mathatom}%
+  {\scriptscriptstyle \let\rs@sstyle\scriptscriptstyle \rs@mathatom}%
+  {\scriptscriptstyle \let\rs@sstyle\scriptscriptstyle \rs@mathatom}%
+ \egroup}
+\def\rs@makelargerchoice{\mathchoice
+  {\protected@edef\rs@sstyle##1{%
+      \protect\set@fontsize {1}{\f@size}{\f@baselineskip}\protect\selectfont
+      \hbox{$\scriptstyle ##1\m@th$}}%
+   \mbox{\larger$\displaystyle\rs@mathatom\m@th$}}%
+  {\displaystyle \let\rs@sstyle\scriptstyle \rs@mathatom}%
+  {\textstyle \let\rs@sstyle\scriptscriptstyle \rs@mathatom}%
+  {\scriptstyle \let\rs@sstyle\scriptscriptstyle \rs@mathatom}%
+ \egroup}
+
+\endinput
+==========================================================
+
+R E L S I Z E . S T Y           ver 3.1      July 4, 2003
+
+by Donald Arseneau,  asnd@triumf.ca,  Vancouver, Canada
+origianally based on smaller.sty by Bernie Cosell, cosell@WILMA.BBN.COM, 
+and combined with the version by Matt Swift, swift@bu.edu.
+
+
+It is frequently the case that something should be typeset somewhat larger
+or smaller than the surrounding text, whatever that size happens to be.
+Specifying such sizing commands explicitly makes it difficult to modify the
+font sizes of a document at a later time, and makes it hard to write macros
+that work at arbitrary sizes.  Relsize.sty defines several commands for LaTeX
+to set font sizes relative to the current size.
+
+To refresh your memory, the font sizing commands in LaTeX are, in order:
+\tiny, \scriptsize, \footnotesize, \small, \normalsize, \large, \Large,
+\LARGE, \huge, \Huge (package moresize adds \ssmall and \HUGE).  The main 
+new command provided by relsize.sty is \relsize, which takes one (positive
+or negative) number as its argument; the number specifies how many "steps"
+by which to change the font size, where each step is a scaling factor of
+1.2, corresponding to the usual difference between the size commands.  For
+example, if "{\relsize{-2} smaller}" appears in normal sized text, the word
+"smaller" is printed in script size type.  If the same command appears in a 
+\Large section title, then "smaller" is printed in normal size. 
+
+There are also the commands \larger and \smaller, which normally change the
+font size by one step in the obvious direction; \larger is an abbreviation
+for \relsize{+1}, and \smaller is an abbreviation for \relsize{-1}. For
+example, {\large... \larger{WOW!}} prints "WOW" in \Large type.  You can
+also specify bigger steps as an optional argument for \larger and \smaller: 
+\larger[3] is equivalent to \relsize{3}; \smaller[2] is \relsize{-2}.
+Both \larger and \smaller accept negative arguments, but please don't make
+things so obscure!  If you want to change size by several steps it is 
+much better to give an increment than to string several \larger commands
+together; i.e., \relsize{3} or \larger[3], but not \larger\larger\larger.
+
+All of the \relsize, \larger, and \smaller commands are "switches" just
+like the regular sizing commands.  That is, they change the size for all
+following text until the scope is ended by a closing brace.  There are
+alternate versions called \textlarger and \textsmaller that take some text
+as an argument and apply the size change to only that text:
+\textlarger{big}. 
+
+Using the number of "magnification steps" to indicate font size can
+be confusing to some people, and limiting in certain uses.  There are 
+commands with syntax \textscale{factor}{text} and \relscale{factor} to
+select the size based on a scale factor, like {0.75}.
+
+If the size requested is too small or too large, a warning is given, and
+the size will only change as far as appropriate, typically \tiny or \Huge.
+These limits are controlled by the commands \RSsmallest and \RSlargest, which
+get set automatically when relsize.sty is loaded, but you can redefine them
+to other length values: \renewcommand\RSlargest{50pt}.
+
+Fine point:  The combination \relsize{n}\relsize{-n} is not guaranteed to 
+restore the current font size!  That is because the increment "n" may be
+enough to overflow the range of sizes.  Say you are in \huge text already,
+and you do \relsize{4}.  There is nothing bigger than \Huge so that is the
+size you get.  Then an ensuing \relsize{-4} will take four steps smaller
+and change the size to \large.  You should use grouping to undo relative 
+size changes because it is unsafe to counteract one change with an "equal" 
+change in the opposite direction.
+
+Typically, the font-size commands do not select fonts at regular size
+intervals.  \relsize (and the others) will select, and execute, the command
+for the size closest to the desired size.  Then, if the relative difference 
+from the target size is more than \RSpercentTolerance a further font-size
+selection is made.  By default, \RSpercentTolerance is an empty macro, which
+causes automatic selection: "30" (30%) when the current "fontshape" definition
+is composed of only discrete sizes, and "5" when the fontshape definition
+covers ranges of sizes.  The higher setting for discrete fonts ensures
+only the pre-defined sizes get used.  (By default LaTeX uses Computer
+Modern fonts at discrete sizes; you get full coverage of sizes by using
+\usepackage{type1cm}.)  For special uses, or when the font shape definitions 
+are not parsed properly, you can redefine the percent tolerance: 
+\renewcommand\RSpercentTolerance{10}.
+
+All of the commands described above are text commands; they cannot be used
+in math mode.  There are special \mathsmaller and \mathlarger commands
+provided, but these do not use the same sizes that the text versions use.
+Instead, they step between the usual math "styles" which you can explicitly
+set using the commands \displaystyle, \textstyle, \scriptstyle, and
+\scriptscriptstyle [see Lamport, LaTeX/Manual (1st ed, p.54); GMS The LaTeX
+Companion, p.255].  However, the \mathlarger command will also increase the
+size beyond regular \displaystyle by selecting a larger regular font size
+(using \larger).  (Yes, this is a kludge, and doesn't work very well, but 
+it can still be useful.)  If you want to use this to create big integral 
+signs, then you must also load the package "exscale" so that math symbols
+can change size.  The sizes selected are: 
+
+Current style       \mathsmaller gives         \mathlarger gives
+---------------     ----------------------     ------------------------
+\displaystyle       \textstyle (almost same)   \displaystyle in a \larger font
+\textstyle          \scriptstyle               \displaystyle (almost same)
+\scriptstyle        \scriptscriptstyle         \textstyle
+\scriptscriptstyle  \scriptscriptstyle (same)  \scriptstyle
+
+For example, try $\frac{\mathlarger{E}}{E}$.  Note that, for most symbols,
+\displaystyle and \textstyle are the same size, so $N \mathlarger{N}$ 
+gives two identical N's, but \sum and \int do get bigger in display style: 
+$\int\mathlarger{\int}$, and fractions are treated differently too: 
+$\frac{1}{2} \mathlarger{\frac{1}{2}}$.  As you might have guessed, 
+\mathlarger and \mathsmaller should only be used in math mode. 
+
+These commands will attempt to attach superscripts and subscripts to the 
+symbol as if the symbol were used alone: $\mathlarger{\int}_{0}^{\infty}$
+but math accents and the math spacing behave as if the symbol is enclosed
+in braces (which it is).  Comparing 
+\[
+| \times | {\times} | \mathlarger{\times} | \mathbin{\mathlarger{\times}} |
+\] 
+shows that operators must be explicitly declared to use the right operator
+type (\mathrel, \mathbin, \mathop) to get the correct spacing.
+
+Due to their oddities, the math larger/smaller commands should not be 
+trusted blindly, and they will not be useful in every instance.
+
+
+Donald Arseneau                         asnd@triumf.ca
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/romanneg.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/romanneg.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0232bfa438c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/romanneg.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%%  @LaTeX-style-file{
+%%%     author          = "Mario Wolczko",
+%%%     version         = "1.03",
+%%%     date            = "15 June 1992",
+%%%     time            = "18:11:59 BST",
+%%%     filename        = "romanneg.sty",
+%%%     email           = "mario@acm.org",
+%%%     codetable       = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%     keywords        = "LaTeX, output, pagenumbers",
+%%%     supported       = "no",
+%%%     docstring       = "Causes the page numbers in the DVI file (as
+%%%     defined by \count0) to be negative when roman pagenumbering is
+%%%     in effect.",
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+%
+% This file is in the public domain
+%
+% This style option should not change the appearance of a document,
+% but merely change the page numbers (as defined by \count0) in the
+% DVI file to be negative when roman pagenumbering is in use.
+%
+%
+% To do this, the \@steppagecounter macro increments the absolute
+% value of \count0
+\def\@steppagecounter{% based on \advancepageno, TeXbook, p.362
+  \ifnum\c@page<\z@ \global\advance\c@page\m@ne
+  \else\global\advance\c@page\@ne \fi} % increase |c@page|
+
+\let\@oldstepcounter\stepcounter
+\def\stepcounter#1{{\def\@tmpa{#1}\def\@tmpb{page}%
+  \ifx\@tmpa\@tmpb\@steppagecounter\else\@oldstepcounter{#1}\fi}}
+
+% Modified version of the pagenumbering command that sets \count0 (aka
+% \c@page) to -1 rather than 1 if roman numbering is specified.
+\def\pagenumbering#1{{%
+  \def\@tmpa{#1} \def\@tmpb{roman} \def\@tmpc{Roman}
+  \ifx\@tmpa\@tmpb % roman option; set -ve page number.
+    \global\c@page \m@ne
+  \else\ifx\@tmpa\@tmpc
+    \global\c@page \m@ne
+  \else
+    \global\c@page \@ne
+  \fi\fi
+  \gdef\thepage{\csname @#1\endcsname \c@page}}}
+
+% the modified versions of \@roman and \@Roman deal with negatives
+\def\@romannumeral#1{\ifnum#1<0 \romannumeral-#1 \else\romannumeral#1 \fi}
+\def\@roman#1{\@romannumeral #1}
+\def\@Roman#1{\expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\@romannumeral #1}}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/sansmath.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/sansmath.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8fe92456b3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/sansmath.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,174 @@
+% LaTeX package sansmath: typeset sans-serif math using `text' fonts.
+%
+\ProvidesPackage{sansmath}[2003/12/14 \space ver 0.5  Donald Arseneau]
+% 
+% Donald Arseneau,  asnd@triumf.ca,  Vancouver, Canada.
+%
+% This package is released to the public domain by the original
+% author, who does not support it, and requests that it be adopted
+% and supported by someone who actually knows something about math
+% font issues in LaTeX.
+%
+% The author was persuaded to use the name `sansmath' in hopes of
+% working with various text sans fonts (indicated by \sfdefault)
+% but the only good results seen were with Computer Modern and cmss.
+% (Helvetica with the `pslatex' package was very poor!)
+%
+% INSTRUCTIONS
+% ~~~~~~~~~~~~
+% Load this package by inserting `\usepackage{sansmath}' in the
+% document preamble.  This will define a new math version `sans'
+% and a command `\sansmath', much like `\boldmath'.  Note that
+% NO `\unsansmath' is defined, so if math is to be sans-serif for
+% just part of a document, one should declare `\sansmath' in a local
+% group (perhaps with \begin{sansmath}...\end{sansmath}).  
+% Within the scope of the \sansmath declaration, math characters
+% will be taken from the text sans-serif family as much as possible.
+% The actual sans fonts are OT1 encodings of those indicated by the 
+% meaning of \sfdefault WHEN THE PACKAGE WAS LOADED -- not the 
+% meaning at each math environment!
+% 
+% Since the (OT1) text fonts do not provide the lower-case greek 
+% letters, there is a package option [eulergreek] to take the 
+% lowercase greek from the Euler math fonts.
+% Since some (many) sans fonts have no uppercase greek letters either
+% (missing characters from the OT1 encoding), there is an option 
+% [EULERGREEK] to take ALL greek letters from the euler fonts.
+% One should also investigate using Euler for ALL MATH in the document,
+% using package `euler' instead of this one!
+%
+% This package achieves math-italic by reloading the slanted version
+% of the text sans-serif font, and changing a fontdimen parameter 
+% (spaceskip).  This causes the italic correction to be applied between
+% letters (good) but does not break up the `fi' and `fl' ligatures (bad)
+% (Why does a sans font have these ligatures anyway?)  At this point,
+% nothing is done about this bug.
+
+\DeclareMathAlphabet{\mathsfsl}{OT1}{\sfdefault}{m}{sl}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sfsl}{\normalfont\sffamily\slshape}{\mathsfsl}
+\DeclareMathAlphabet{\mathsfbf}{OT1}{\sfdefault}{bx}{sl}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sfbf}{\normalfont\sffamily\bfseries}{\mathsfbf}
+
+\DeclareMathVersion{sans}
+\SetMathAlphabet{\mathrm} {sans}{OT1}{\sfdefault}{m}{n}
+\SetMathAlphabet{\mathsfsl}{sans}{OT1}{\sfdefault}{m}{sl}
+\SetSymbolFont {operators}{sans}{OT1}{\sfdefault}{m}{n}
+
+% The cmm and cmsy are too light for cmss.  I tried {b} for the next
+% two lines, but it did not work well (unbold +, bold greek, bad \neq)
+\SetSymbolFont {letters}  {sans}{OML}{cmm} {m}{it}
+\SetSymbolFont {symbols}  {sans}{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}
+
+\SetMathAlphabet{\mathsfbf}{sans}{OT1}{\sfdefault}{bx}{n}
+
+\DeclareMathSymbol{0}{\mathord}{operators}{`0}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{1}{\mathord}{operators}{`1}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{2}{\mathord}{operators}{`2}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{3}{\mathord}{operators}{`3}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{4}{\mathord}{operators}{`4}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{5}{\mathord}{operators}{`5}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{6}{\mathord}{operators}{`6}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{7}{\mathord}{operators}{`7}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{8}{\mathord}{operators}{`8}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{9}{\mathord}{operators}{`9}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{!}{\mathclose}{operators}{"21}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{,}{\mathpunct}{operators}{`\,}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{.}{\mathord}{operators}{`\.}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{:}{\mathrel}{operators}{`\:}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{;}{\mathpunct}{operators}{`\;}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{?}{\mathclose}{operators}{`\?}
+%\DeclareMathSymbol{+}{\mathbin}{operators}{"2B}
+%\DeclareMathSymbol{=}{\mathrel}{operators}{`\=}
+
+
+\let\EulGreek\relax
+\let\EuUCGreek\relax
+\DeclareOption{EULERGREEK}{
+  \ExecuteOptions{eulergreek}
+  \def\EuUCGreek{%
+    \@euG\Gamma \@euG\Delta \@euG\Theta \@euG\Lambda \@euG\Xi \@euG\Pi
+    \@euG\Sigma \@euG\Upsilon \@euG\Phi \@euG\Psi \@euG\Omega
+}}
+\DeclareOption{eulergreek}{
+ \def\EulGreek{%
+  \ifnum\alpha<\@eugreekOffset
+    \@eug\alpha \@eug\beta \@eug\gamma \@eug\delta \@eug\epsilon
+    \@eug\zeta \@eug\eta \@eug\theta \@eug\iota \@eug\kappa \@eug\lambda
+    \@eug\mu \@eug\nu \@eug\xi \@eug\pi \@eug\rho \@eug\sigma \@eug\tau
+    \@eug\upsilon \@eug\phi \@eug\chi \@eug\psi \@eug\omega
+    \@eug\varepsilon \@eug\vartheta \@eug\varpi \@eug\varrho
+    \@eug\varsigma \@eug\varphi
+    \EuUCGreek
+  \fi
+}}
+\ProcessOptions
+
+\ifx\EulGreek\relax\else
+ \DeclareSymbolFont{EulerGreek}{U}{eur}{m}{n}
+ \SetSymbolFont{EulerGreek}{sans}{U}{eur}{m}{n}
+ \DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\matheug{EulerGreek}
+
+ \newcount\@eugreekOffset
+ \let\@tempa\relax
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\@tempa}{\mathord}{EulerGreek}{11}
+ \@eugreekOffset\@tempa
+ \advance\@eugreekOffset-\alpha
+
+ \def\@eug#1{\@tempcnta#1\advance\@tempcnta\@eugreekOffset
+    \mathchardef#1\@tempcnta}
+
+ \ifx\EuUCGreek\relax\else
+
+  \newcount\@euGREEKOffset
+  \let\@tempa\relax
+  \DeclareMathSymbol{\@tempa}{\mathord}{EulerGreek}{1}
+  \@euGREEKOffset\@tempa
+  \advance\@euGREEKOffset-\Delta
+
+  \def\@euG#1{\@tempcnta#1\advance\@tempcnta\@euGREEKOffset
+     \mathchardef#1\@tempcnta}
+ \fi
+\fi
+
+\def\sfMathSwitch{\sfsl
+  \make@math@version@font \textfont \fam \tf@size
+  \make@math@version@font \scriptfont \fam \sf@size
+  \make@math@version@font \scriptscriptfont \fam \ssf@size
+}
+
+\def\make@math@version@font #1#2#3{%
+  \begingroup
+    \escapechar\m@ne
+    \xdef\sansm@name{\expandafter\string\the#1#2+}%
+  \endgroup
+  \@ifundefined{\sansm@name}{%
+      \@load@variant@font \sansm@name{#1#2}{#3\p@}}{}%
+  #1#2\csname \sansm@name\endcsname
+}
+
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\A=12 \catcode`\T=12
+\lowercase{% necessary because \fontname\font produces "at" in catcode 12.
+\endgroup
+%
+\def\@load@variant@font #1#2#3{\expandafter\@do@load@varfont
+     \csname #1\expandafter\endcsname \fontname#2 AT #3 AT \relax }
+%
+\def\@do@load@varfont #1#2 AT #3 AT #4\relax{%
+  \dimen@#3\advance\dimen@ 1sp
+  \global\font #1=#2 at \dimen@
+  \fontdimen\tw@#1=\z@}
+}
+
+\def\sansmath{%
+  \mathversion{sans}%
+  \let\mathbf\mathsfbf
+  \let\sansm@every@math\sfMathSwitch
+  \EulGreek
+}
+
+\expandafter\def\expandafter\check@mathfonts\expandafter{\check@mathfonts
+   \sansm@every@math}
+
+\let\sansm@every@math\relax
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/secdot.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/secdot.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a24ad83dcc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/secdot.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+%  Define section numbers with dots
+%
+% Author: Robin Fairbairns (rf10@cl.cam.ac.uk)
+%         first version, June 2000
+%
+%         version 2, July 2000, with a contribution from
+%         Steve Grathwohl of Duke University
+%
+% This program may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.1
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.1 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 1999/06/01 or later.
+%
+% This program consists of the file secdot.sty
+% documentation (such as it is) may be found after \endinput herein
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% Seems to work with any version
+\ProvidesPackage{secdot}[2000/06/20 v1.0 section numbers with dots]
+
+% command to declare a particular section level to have a dot after
+% its number
+\newcommand\sectiondot[1]{%
+  \expandafter\def\csname @seccntfmt@#1\endcsname##1{%
+    \csname the##1\endcsname.\quad
+  }
+}
+
+% do this by default for \section numbering
+\sectiondot{section}
+
+% generalised version: define that #2 comes after section level #1
+\newcommand\sectionpunct[2]{%
+  \expandafter\def\csname @seccntfmt@#1\endcsname##1{%
+    \csname the##1\endcsname#2%
+  }%
+}
+
+% the guts of the package: insert the dots where needed ... 
+\renewcommand\@seccntformat[1]{\@ifundefined{@seccntfmt@#1}%
+  {\csname the#1\endcsname\quad}% original default style
+  {\csname @seccntfmt@#1\endcsname{#1}}%
+}
+\endinput
+
+secdot.sty: section numbers with dots
+=====================================
+
+the package as loaded causes section numbers to be output with a dot
+after them.
+
+the command \sectiondot{<level>} will make `level' sections also be
+output with a dot after them -- an example of use would be:
+   \sectiondot{subsection}
+
+the command \sectionpunct{<level>}{<punctuation>} gives finer
+control.  examples of use would be
+   \sectionpunct{section}{. } % \sectiondot places a \quad after the
+                              % dot, which may look excessive
+   \sectionpunct{section}{\quad} % restores default latex behaviour
+
+other eccentricities of numbering could be coded by those with
+stronger stomachs, by defining the appropriate
+
+   \csname @seccntfmt@<level>\endcsname
+
+which macro will take one argument, when invoked: the `level' name
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/section.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/section.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..11fdd0e9f79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/section.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,691 @@
+% SECTION.STY
+% (c) (1992-1994) Oliver Pretzel (o.pretzel@ic.ac.uk)
+% Created 29 Oct 94  version 1.4: 10 Mar 99.
+% For use with Latex Standard Styles
+% Adds control of section heading style to standard LaTeX.
+% For LaTeX2.09 (OFSS and NFSS) and LaTeX2e.
+%
+% Optional features are set to standard.
+%
+% DOCUMENTATION at end of file
+%
+% WARNING: conflicts with REFMAN.STY.
+%
+% ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
+%
+% This file may be distributed freely.
+% It may be modified for local use (please inform me of such modifications)
+% Modified versions may only be distributed if
+% 1. The name is changed
+% 2. A statement acknowledging the modification heads the file.
+%
+% DO NOT USE \neq in this file
+\chardef\neq\the\catcode`\@
+\makeatletter\@makeother\"
+%
+\typeout{`section.sty' <1.4>}
+%*************************
+\ifx\reset@font\undefined\let\reset@font\relax\fi
+%
+% Options
+%
+\ifx\secindent\undefined
+ \newdimen\secindent
+ \newskip\secpreskp
+ \newskip\secpstskp
+ \newdimen\subindent
+ \newskip\subpreskp
+ \newskip\subpstskp
+ \newskip\parpstskp
+ \newcount\c@hddepth
+\fi
+%implict multiplication removes stretch
+\secindent0pt% no indentation
+\secpreskp1.2\baselineskip plus .35\baselineskip minus.07\baselineskip
+%\secpreskp3.5ex plus 1 ex minus.2ex
+\secpreskp-\secpreskp
+\secpstskp.8\baselineskip plus .07\baselineskip
+%\secpstskp2.3ex plus .2ex
+\subindent0pt
+\subpreskp1.13\baselineskip plus .35\baselineskip minus.07\baselineskip
+%\subpreskp3.25ex plus 1 ex minus.2ex
+\subpreskp-\subpreskp
+\subpstskp.53\baselineskip plus.07\baselineskip
+%\subpstskp1.5ex plus.2ex
+\parpstskp-.8\baselineskip
+%\parpstskp-1em
+\ifx\chapter\undefined
+ \def\chsize{\Large}\def\hdsize{\huge}\else
+ \def\chsize{\huge}\def\hdsize{\Huge}
+\fi
+\let\ttsize\LARGE
+\let\ausize\large
+\let\dasize\large
+\let\hdpos\raggedright
+\c@hddepth\z@
+\let\secsize\Large
+\let\subsize\large
+\let\fpind\relax
+%
+\def\nmdot{}
+\def\cpdot{:}
+\def\hdfnt{\reset@font\bf}
+\def\ttfnt{\reset@font\rm}
+\def\pgfnt{\reset@font\rm}
+\def\mkfnt{\reset@font\sl}
+\let\mkcse\uppercase
+\def\hddot{}
+\def\fefnt{\reset@font\bf}
+\def\thfnt{\reset@font\it}
+%
+\def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure\cpdot}
+\def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable\cpdot}
+%
+%
+% theorems
+%
+\def\@begintheorem#1#2{%
+ \trivlist \item[\hskip \labelsep{\fefnt #1\ #2\hddot}]\thfnt}
+\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\trivlist
+ \item[\hskip \labelsep{\fefnt #1\ #2\ (#3)\hddot}]\thfnt}
+%
+{\@makeother\~
+\long\gdef\@ifempty#1#2#3{\if~#1~#2\else#3\fi}
+}
+\long\def\@gobifnul#1#2{\@ifempty{#1}\@empty{#1#2}}
+%\@Alph and \@alph \relax added to allow \@ifempty test when counter<=0
+\def\@alph#1{%
+  \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or
+   k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or
+    y\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi\relax}
+\def\@Alph#1{%
+  \ifcase#1\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or
+   K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or X\or
+    Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi\relax}
+%LaTeX 209
+\ifx\@ialph\undefined\else\let\@ialph\undefined\let\@Ialph\undefined\fi
+%
+% Figures and Tables
+%
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vskip 10\p@
+   \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#1\ #2}\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize
+   #1\ #2\par\else\hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}\fi}
+%
+% Modified LateX Sectioning Commands
+%
+\ifx\chapter\undefined
+%
+%Article
+%
+\def\part{\par\vskip1.4\baselineskip\@tempskipa\z@
+   \@tempskipb\baselineskip\@afterindentfalse\secdef\@part\@spart}
+\def\@part[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne\@makesecdot{part}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\protect\numberline{\thepart\nmdot}{#1}}\else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}\fi\@mkboth{}{}
+ {\parindent\z@\hdpos\interlinepenalty\@M\ifnum\c@secnumdepth>\m@ne
+ \@ifempty\thepart\@empty{\chsize\hdfnt\partname~\thepart\par\nobreak
+ \vskip\@tempskipa}\fi}\@spart{#2}}
+\def\@spart#1{\@ifempty{#1}\removelastskip{\parindent\z@\hdpos
+ \interlinepenalty\@M\hdsize\hdfnt#1\par}\nobreak\vskip\@tempskipb
+ \fpind\@afterheading}
+\def\maketitle{\par\begingroup\def\thefootnote{\fnsymbol{footnote}}%
+ \def\@makefnmark{\hbox to\z@{$\m@th^{\@thefnmark}$\hss}}%
+ \if@twocolumn\twocolumn[\@maketitle]%
+ \else\newpage\global\@topnum\z@\@maketitle\fi
+ \thispagestyle{empty}\@thanks\endgroup
+ \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax
+ \def\@thanks{}\def\@author{}\def\@title{}\let\thanks\relax}
+\def\@maketitle{\null \vskip \tw@ em\begin{center}%
+ {\ttsize\ttfnt\@title\par}\vskip1.2\baselineskip{\ausize\ttfnt%1.5em
+ \lineskip.4\baselineskip\begin{tabular}[t]{c}\@author\end{tabular}\par}%.5em
+ \vskip.8\baselineskip{\dasize\ttfnt\@date}\end{center}% 1em
+ \par\vskip1.2\baselineskip}% 1.5em
+\if@twoside
+ \def\ps@headings{\let\@mkboth\markboth
+  \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}
+  \def\@evenhead{\pgfnt\thepage\hfil\mkfnt\leftmark}%
+  \def\@oddhead{\mkfnt\rightmark\hfil\pgfnt\thepage}%
+  \def\sectionmark##1{\markboth{\mkcse{\ifnum\c@secnumdepth>\z@\@gobifnul
+  \thesection{\@ifempty{##1}\@empty{\nmdot\quad}}\fi##1}}{}}%
+  \def\subsectionmark##1{\markright{\ifnum\c@secnumdepth>\@ne\@gobifnul
+  \thesubsection{\@ifempty{##1}\@empty{\nmdot\quad}}\fi##1}}}
+\else
+ \def\ps@headings{\let\@mkboth\markboth
+  \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}
+  \def\@oddhead{\mkfnt\rightmark\hfil\pgfnt\thepage}%
+  \def\sectionmark##1{\markright{\mkcse{\ifnum\c@secnumdepth>\z@
+  \@gobifnul\thesection{\@ifempty{##1}\@empty{\nmdot\quad}}\fi##1}}}}
+\fi
+\def\ps@myheadings{\let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \def\@oddhead{\mkfnt\rightmark \hfil\pgfnt\thepage}\def\@oddfoot{}%
+ \def\@evenhead{\pgfnt\thepage\hfil\mkfnt\leftmark}\def\@evenfoot{}%
+ \def\sectionmark##1{}\def\subsectionmark##1{}}
+\def\tableofcontents{\makeheading{\contentsname
+ \@mkboth{\mkcse{\contentsname}}{\mkcse{\contentsname}}}%
+ \@starttoc{toc}}
+\def\listoffigures{\makeheading{\listfigurename
+ \@mkboth{\mkcse{\listfigurename}}{\mkcse{\listfigurename}}}%
+ \@starttoc{lof}}
+\def\listoftables{\makeheading{\listtablename\@mkboth
+ {\mkcse{\listtablename}}{\mkcse{\listtablename}}}%
+ \@starttoc{lot}}
+\def\thebibliography#1{\makeheading{\refname\@mkboth
+ {\mkcse{\refname}}{\mkcse{\refname}}}\list
+ {\@biblabel{\arabic{enumiv}}}{\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
+ \leftmargin\labelwidth\advance\leftmargin\labelsep
+ \usecounter{enumiv}\let\p@enumiv\@empty
+ \def\theenumiv{\arabic{enumiv}}}%
+ \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus.33em minus.07em}%
+ \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\sfcode`\.=\@m\relax}
+\def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
+ \columnseprule \z@\columnsep 35\p@\twocolumn[\makeheading{\indexname}]%
+ \@mkboth{\mkcse{\indexname}}{\mkcse{\indexname}}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ plus.3\p@\relax\let\item\@idxitem}
+\def\l@part{\@tocheadline{0}{1.8\baselineskip}{3em}{\large\bf}}%2.25em
+\def\l@section{\@tocheadline{1}{1em}{1.8em}{\bf}}
+\def\makeheading{\section*}
+\else
+%
+%Report/Book
+%
+\def\part{\cleardoublepage\thispagestyle{plain}%
+  \if@twocolumn\onecolumn\@tempswatrue\else \@tempswafalse\fi
+  \@tempskipa20\p@\@tempskipb\fill\hbox{}\vfil\secdef\@part\@spart}
+\def\@part[#1]#2{\ifnum\c@secnumdepth>-2\@makesecdot{part}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\protect\numberline{\thepart\nmdot}#1}\else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}\fi\@mkboth{}{}%
+ {\parindent\z@\hdpos\ifnum\c@secnumdepth>-2\@ifempty\thepart\@empty
+ {\chsize\hdfnt\partname~\thepart\par\vskip\@tempskipa}\fi
+ \@spart{#2}}}
+\def\@spart#1{\@ifempty{#1}\removelastskip{\hdpos\hdsize\hdfnt#1\par}%
+ \vskip\@tempskipb\newpage\if@twoside\hbox{}\thispagestyle{empty}\newpage\fi
+ \if@tempswa\twocolumn\fi}
+\let\@endpart\undefined
+\def\@makeschapterhead#1#2#3#4{\vskip#2{\parindent\z@\hdpos
+ \if@nobreak\ifnum\c@secnumdepth>\m@ne\@ifempty\thechapter\@empty
+ {\chsize\hdfnt\@chapapp~\thechapter \par\nobreak\vskip#3}\fi\fi
+ \@ifempty{#1}\removelastkip{\hdsize\hdfnt#1\par}\nobreak\vskip#4}}
+\def\@makechapterhead#1{\hbox{}\@makeschapterhead{#1}{50\p@}{20\p@}{40\p@}}
+\def\@chapter[#1]#2{\ifnum\c@secnumdepth>\m@ne\@makesecdot{chapter}%
+\typeout{\@chapapp\space\thechapter}\fi\@contmark{chapter}\z@{#1}%
+ \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+ \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}\@nobreaktrue
+ \if@twocolumn\@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]\else\@makechapterhead{#2}\fi
+ \fpind\@afterheading}
+\def\@schapter#1{\@nobreakfalse\if@twocolumn
+  \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#1}]\else
+  \@makechapterhead{#1}\fi\fpind\@afterheading}
+\if@twoside
+ \def\ps@headings{\let\@mkboth\markboth\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
+  \def\@evenhead{\pgfnt\thepage\hfil\mkfnt\leftmark}%
+  \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\mkfnt\rightmark\hfil\pgfnt\thepage}%
+  \def\chaptermark##1{\markboth{\mkcse{\ifnum
+  \c@secnumdepth>\m@ne\expandafter\@gobifnul\@chapapp\ \@gobifnul
+  \thechapter{\@ifempty{##1}\@empty{\nmdot\quad}}\fi##1}}{}}%
+  \def\sectionmark##1{\markright{\mkcse{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@\@gobifnul
+  \thesection{\@ifempty{##1}\@empty{\nmdot\quad}}\fi ##1}}}}
+\else
+ \def\ps@headings{\let\@mkboth\markboth
+  \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
+  \def\@oddhead{\mkfnt \rightmark \hfil\pgfnt\thepage}%
+  \def\chaptermark##1{\markright {\mkcse{\ifnum
+  \c@secnumdepth>\m@ne \expandafter\@gobifnul\@chapapp\ \@gobifnul
+  \thechapter{\@ifempty{##1}\@empty{\nmdot\quad}}\fi##1}}}}
+\fi
+\def\ps@myheadings{\let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \def\@oddhead{\mkfnt\rightmark \hfil\pgfnt\thepage}%
+ \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenhead{\pgfnt \thepage\hfil\mkfnt
+ \leftmark}\def\@evenfoot{}%
+ \def\chaptermark##1{}\def\sectionmark##1{}%
+ \def\subsectionmark##1{}}
+\def\maketitle{\begin{titlepage}%
+ \let\footnotesize\small \let\footnoterule\relax \setcounter{page}{0}%
+ \null \vfil \vskip 5\baselineskip \begin{center}% 60pt
+ {\ttsize\ttfnt\@title\par}\vskip2.45\baselineskip {\ausize\ttfnt\lineskip
+ .62\baselineskip%3em .75em
+ \begin{tabular}[t]{c}\@author \end{tabular}\par}%
+ \vskip 1.25\baselineskip {\dasize \ttfnt \@date \par} \end{center} \par%1.5em
+ \@thanks \vfil \null \end{titlepage}%
+ \setcounter{footnote}{0} \let\thanks\relax
+ \def\@thanks{}\def\@author{}\def\@title{}\let\maketitle\relax}%
+\def\tableofcontents{\@restonecolfalse
+ \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\fi\makeheading{\contentsname
+ \@mkboth{\mkcse{\contentsname}}{\mkcse{\contentsname}}}%
+ \@starttoc{toc}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}
+\def\listoffigures{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\fi
+ \makeheading{\listfigurename\@mkboth{\mkcse{\listfigurename}}%
+ {\mkcse{\listfigurename}}}\@starttoc{lof}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}
+\def\listoftables{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\fi
+ \makeheading{\listtablename\@mkboth{\mkcse{\listtablename}}%
+ {\mkcse{\listtablename}}}\@starttoc{lot}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}
+\def\thebibliography#1{\makeheading{\bibname\@mkboth
+ {\mkcse{\bibname}}{\mkcse{\bibname}}}\list
+ {\@biblabel{\arabic{enumiv}}}{\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
+ \leftmargin\labelwidth\advance\leftmargin\labelsep
+ \usecounter{enumiv}\let\p@enumiv\@empty
+ \def\theenumiv{\arabic{enumiv}}}%
+ \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus.33em minus.07em}%
+ \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\sfcode`\.=\@m}
+\def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
+ \columnseprule\z@\columnsep 35\p@\twocolumn\makeheading{\indexname
+ \@mkboth{\mkcse{\indexname}}{\mkcse{\indexname}}}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ plus .3\p@\relax\let\item\@idxitem}
+\def\l@part{\@tocheadline{\z@}{1.8\baselineskip}{3em}{\large\bf}}%2.25em
+\def\l@chapter{\@tocheadline{\@ne}{1em}{1.8em}{\bf}}
+\def\makeheading{\chapter*}
+\fi
+%
+%Article, Book, Report
+%
+\def\section{\@startsection
+{section}{\@ne}{\secindent}{\secpreskp}{\secpstskp}{\secsize\hdfnt}}
+\def\subsection{\@startsection
+{subsection}{\tw@}{\subindent}{\subpreskp}{\subpstskp}{\subsize\hdfnt}}
+\def\subsubsection{\@startsection
+{subsubsection}{3}{\subindent}{\subpreskp}{\subpstskp}{\normalsize\hdfnt}}
+\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\subindent}%
+{\subpreskp}{\parpstskp}{\normalsize\hdfnt}}
+\def\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}%
+{5}{\parindent}{\subpreskp}{\parpstskp}{\normalsize\hdfnt}}
+%
+% section layout
+%
+\def\@makesecdot#1{\expandafter\let\expandafter\@secdot\csname the#1\endcsname
+  \ifx\@secdot\@empty\else\refstepcounter{#1}\toks@\expandafter{%
+  \csname p@#1\endcsname}\edef\@secdot{%
+    \the\toks@\expandafter\@gobifnul\csname the#1\endcsname\nmdot}\fi}
+					%not \@secdot
+\def\@makesvsec#1{\ifind #1<\z@\def\@svsec{\llap{\@secdot}\hskip-#1}\else
+ \def\@svsec{\@gobifnul\@secdot\quad}\fi}
+\def\@contmark#1#2#3{\csname #1mark\endcsname{#3}\addcontentsline
+ {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\else\protect\numberline{\@secdot}\fi#3}}
+\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{\if@noskipsec\leavevmode\fi
+   \par\@tempskipa #4\@afterindenttrue
+   \ifdim\@tempskipa<\z@\@tempskipa-\@tempskipa\@afterindentfalse\fi
+   \fpind\if@nobreak\everypar{}\else
+     \addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{\@tempskipa}\fi\@ifstar
+     {\@ssect{#3}{#5}{#6}}{\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#5}{#6}}}}
+\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5[#6]#7{\@tempskipa #4\let\@svsec\@empty
+ \ifnum#2>\c@secnumdepth\else\@makesecdot{#1}\@makesvsec{#3}\fi
+ \ifdim\@tempskipa>\z@
+ \begingroup#5\@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty
+ \@M\ifnum#2>\c@hddepth\else\hdpos\fi#7\par}\endgroup
+ \@contmark{#1}{#2}{#6}\else
+ \def\@svsechd{\@contmark{#1}{#2}{#6}#5\hskip#3\@svsec
+ \@gobifnul{#7}\hddot}\fi\@xsect{#4}}
+\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4{\@tempskipa #2\relax\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
+  \begingroup #3\@hangfrom{\ifind #1< \z@\else \hskip #1\fi}{\interlinepenalty
+  \@M\ifnum#2>\c@hddepth\else\hdpos\fi#4\par}\endgroup\else
+  \def\@svsechd{#3\ifind #1<\z@\else
+  \hskip #1\fi\@gobifnul{#4}\hddot}\fi\@xsect{#2}}
+\let\ifind\ifdim
+%
+% contents lines
+%
+\def\@tocheadline#1#2#3#4#5#6{\ifnum#1>\c@tocdepth\else
+ \addpenalty\@secpenalty\vskip#2 plus\p@\begingroup
+ \interlinepenalty\@M\rightskip\@tocrmarg\parfillskip-\@tocrmarg
+ \secindent#3\noindent\leavevmode\hangindent\secindent
+ \reset@font\rm#4#5\@tocpagenum{#6}\par\endgroup
+ \penalty\@highpenalty\fi}
+\def\@dottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{\ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth \else
+  \vskip \z@ plus.2\p@\begingroup\leftskip#2\interlinepenalty\@M
+  \rightskip\@tocrmarg\parfillskip-\@tocrmarg\secindent#3%
+  \noindent\leavevmode\hangindent\secindent\reset@font\rm#4\nobreak\leaders
+  \hbox{$\m@th \mkern \@dotsep mu.\mkern \@dotsep mu$}\hfill \nobreak
+  \hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hfil\reset@font\rm #5}\par\endgroup\fi}
+\def\@tocpagenum#1{\nobreak\hfill\nobreak\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss#1}}
+\def\numberline#1{\hbox to \secindent{#1\hfil} }
+%
+% REDEFINITIONS here:
+%
+% This line must be last line of code
+\catcode`\@\neq\let\neq\ne\endinput
+
+*******************
+  DOCUMENTATION
+*******************
+Leslie Lamport in writing LaTeX assumed that authors would write
+complete .sty (.clo) files to implement the design decisions for their
+publications. However, the overwhelming majority of LaTeX publications use the
+standard styles supplied by Lamport. These implement a particular set of
+typographic conventions, which while consistent are not of universal validity,
+for instance many publishers and authors would like a full stop:
+`4. Introduction'
+rather than
+`4 Introduction'.
+
+This file modifies the standard classes so that other conventions can be
+more easily implemented. Careful use of the file will allow a greater
+variation in the appearance of LaTeX documents.
+
+0. Changes to section implementation.
+The file redefines the way LaTeX deals with negative indents for section
+headings, placing the number in the margin and the heading itself flush
+with the margin. With negative indents it sets starred section headings
+flush (as it does when \thesection is empty.
+Standard LaTeX indenting can be produced by typing
+>> \let\ifind\iffalse
+This file's version can be reestablished by typing
+>> \let\ifind\ifdim
+
+The file also changes the way LaTeX reacts to empty numbers when sections have
+non-negative indents, placing the heading where the number would go, rather
+than further indented (as in standard LaTeX).
+This effect can be removed by redefining an internal macro \@makesvsec (see
+below).
+
+The indents, pre- and postskips for section headings are placed in registers
+so that they are constant throughout a document and (just as the heading sizes)
+do not react to surrounding size changes. You can change this back to ordinary
+LaTeX behaviour by \def ing them as macros rather than setting the register
+values (in that case you should probably use \smaller\larger from
+SMALLER.STY for the \...size commands).
+
+WARNING LaTeX typesets headings that run on by manipulating \everypar. If you
+make local changes to the heading style of such a section inside braces or a
+group you must ensure that a non-empty paragraph occurs before the closing
+brace. Otherwise some strange effects may occur, because the \everypar tokens
+will be evaluated outside the group (this is a feature of LaTeX, not of
+SECTION.STY). If your group ends with an empty section of this type just
+follow it with \leavevmode or an explicit space: \ .
+
+A detailed description of the format of LaTeX sectioning commands is given
+below (in paragraph 9). This is partially taken from the file LATEX.TEX.
+We first list the macros for local control which you can use without knowing
+this structure.
+
+The file sets vertical distances that LaTeX expressed in terms of `em's and
+`ex's in equivalent `\baselineskip's, as `em' is a measure of the horizontal
+size of a font and `ex' is not a true measure of the full height of a line.
+Earlier vesions used `ex's.
+
+The original values are placed as comments.
+
+1. Sizing commands for Parts, Chapters and Titles etc
+These are set to \large or whatever
+
+>> \chsize: Chapter, Part Heading    (\LARGE\large)
+>> \hdsize: Chapter, Part Title Text (\Huge\huge\LARGE)
+>> \ttsize: Title of Document	     (\Huge\huge\LARGE)
+>> \ausize: Author		     (\LARGE\Large)
+>> \dasize: Date.		     (\Large\large)
+>> \secsize: Section		     (\Large\large)
+>> \subsize: Subsection 	     (\large\normalsize)
+   subsubsection and below use \normalsize
+
+2. Layout commands for headings.
+>> \hdpos: Positioning of heading (\raggedright) (\centering \raggedleft)
+   (see section 9);
+>> counter hddpth (default 0)
+   Maximum section level for \hdpos (chapters and parts ALWAYS use hdpos).
+   To centre section headings and above:
+         \let\hdpos\centering\setcounter{hddepth}{1}
+>> \fpind: Indenting of first paragraph after \Part \Chapter
+     and also to override setting via preskip for sections.
+     \let to \@afterindenttrue to indent, \@afterindentfalse for flush,
+     \relax: flush after \Part \Chapter, negative preskips; indented otherwise
+     (LaTeX default behaviour).
+
+3. Fonts
+>> \ttfnt: font for title entries.
+>> \hdfnt: font for all other headings (Part, Chapter..subparagraph).
+>> \fefnt: font for theorem headings and description labels (fe=feature).
+>> \thfnt: font for theorem statements.
+>> \pgfnt: font for page numbers.
+>> \mkfnt: font for page headings (mk=mark).
+>> \mkcse: case for page headings.
+ These can also be used to add other initial commands such as spaces or
+ symbols.
+
+4. Optional punctuation (standard|my preference)
+ These marks are transferred via auxiliary files for tables of contents etc.
+ They should be \def'd if their current value is to be transferred, and \let
+ if the value in force when the file auxiliary is read should be used.
+
+>> \hddot ({}|.) (after inline headings, theorems etc)
+>> \cpdot (:|.) (in figure/table captions - also apears in list of figures.
+>> \nmdot ({}|.) (after section numbers etc)
+
+If these are \let to a single letter they are not expanded in the
+    .toc.. files. So to remove \cpdot from list of figures:
+	\let\cpdot\relax\listoffigures\let\cpdot:
+
+5. Spacing parameters.
+   The macros for chapters and parts have been altered so that all the
+   vertical spacing commands are in a single macro in each case.
+
+>>  \part inserts initial vertical space directly (preceded by \hbox{} if it
+    is to be immovable) and passes the space between Part n  and title
+    in  \@tempskipa and the space below the heading in \@tempskipb.
+>>  Both \chapter and \chapter* call \@makechapterhead{chaptertitle}.
+    This passes {chaptertitle} on to \@makeschapterhead together with the
+    vertical spacing. Default setting is
+    \def\@makechapterhead#1{\hbox{}\@makeschapterhead{#1}{50\p@}{20\p@}{40\p@}}
+      \hbox{} makes first skip immovable,
+      the first length is space above the heading,
+      The second is the space between Chapter nn and the chapter title
+      The third is the space below the heading.
+    For both Part and Chapter the middle space is removed if either the
+    section name or title are missing.
+    If both are missing, the first space is also removed
+
+>>  For sections and below the spaces are kept in registers:
+   \secpreskp and \secpsrskp \secindent used for \section
+   \subpreskp and \subpstskp \subindent used for \subsection/\subsubsection
+   \paragraph uses \subindent \subpreskp \parpstskp
+   \subparagraph uses \parindent \subpreskp \parpstskp
+
+>> \secindent \subindent   Heading indentation
+>> \secpreskp \subpreskp   Space before
+>> \secpstskp \subpstskp \parpstskp  Space after.
+
+6.  Internal modifications
+
+ Sections with negative indents have heading flush with margin.
+
+ If \thesection is \empty
+   \let\thesection\empty or \def\thesection{}
+ then section does not step the section counter.
+ If the section produces empty output for a value then
+ the section will start flush at the margin or \secindent if it is positive
+ and there will be no \nmdot.
+ It will produce (flush) page headings and a table of contents entry.
+ Similarly if \thechapter or \thepart are defined to be empty they will
+ suppress the heading line `Chapter..' and not step the counter.
+ To restore standard LaTeX behaviour temporarily define \thesection to be
+ \empty
+ \def\thesection{\empty}
+ In that case you can adjust post number spacing in the heading.
+	\section[Heading]{\hskip-1em Heading}
+ You can also redefine \@makesecdot see paragraph 7.
+
+WARNING \letting \thesection etc to an unexpandable token (like \relax) will
+cause strange effects under LaTeX because its value will not be expanded.
+
+ \maketitle suppresses page headings (\thispagestyle{empty}) and only resets
+ \@title etc locally. So place in a group if you want to preserve these for
+ later reference (eg. in headers).
+
+7. New internal macros
+  Place any modifications in the section REDEFINITIONS of the main code
+
+> \@secdot contains section number and \nmdot if the number is non-empty.
+> \@makesecdot{NAME} defines \@secdot.
+  To make LaTeX step the section counter independently of the definition
+  of \thesection and always print \nmdot:
+    \def\@makesecdot#1{\refstepcounter{#1}%
+        \edef\@secdot{\csname the#1\endcsname}}
+  If you want \nmdot suppressed when \thesection produces no output:
+    \def\@makesecdot#1{\refstepcounter{#1}%
+      \edef\@secdot{\expandafter\@gobifnul\csname the#1\endcsname\nmdot}}
+> \@makesvsec{INDENT} defines the \@svsec macro used by LaTeX to typeset the
+  section number.. Its parameter is the indent so that it can react
+  differently to negative indents. (it does NOT make the indent).
+  To obtain standard LaTeX behaviour:
+    \def\@makesvsec#1{\def\@svsec{\@secdot\quad}}
+  To make positioning commands apply to the heading ignoring the number:
+    \def\@makesvsec#1{\def\@svsec{\llap{@secdot\quad}}}
+  Do NOT forget the #1.
+> \@contmark{NAME}{LEVEL}{HEADING} makes contents line and sectionmark.
+
+ Contents headlines are defined by
+> \@tocheadline
+ This allows these lines to be adjusted similarly to the \@dottedtocline
+ commands for other contents lines. The format of these is defined below (in
+ paragraph 11).
+>@tocpagenum#1 sets #1 flush right in \@tocheadline.
+ Redefine (\let\@tocpagenum\@gobble) to remove page numbers.
+ \def\l@part{\@tocheadline{0}{2.25em}{3em}{\let\@tocpagenum\@gobble
+	      \centering\large\bf}}
+ Centres parts lines of contents but leaves chapters unchanged
+ \def\l@part{\@tocheadline{0}{2.25em}{3em}{\let\@tocpagenum\@gobble
+	      \centering\def\numberline##1{\hskip-\secindent
+	      \hbox to\secindent{##1\hfil}}\large\bf}}
+ Same but centring ignores part number.
+ \def\l@part{\@tocheadline{0}{2.25em}{3em}{\let\@tocpagenum\@gobble
+	      \centering\def\numberline##1{\hfilneg
+	      \hbox to\z@{##1\hss}\hfil}\large\bf}}
+ Centres heading with number flush left
+ Contents lines use \secindent as a temporary register
+
+>\makeheading (set to \section*, \chapter*)
+ Makes headings for contents, index etc.
+ To put Contents itself in the contents list, redefine (locally):
+     \let\thesection\empty\let\makeheading\section
+
+8. Additional macros
+> \@ifempty{test}{yes}{no} like \@ifundefined but tests for empty
+  (fails iff test starts with ~ of catcode 12 (other) ).
+> \@gobifnul{a}{b} = \@ifempty{a}{}{ab}.
+
+9.  Description of sectioning values
+
+ \@startsection {NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}{PRESKIP}{POSTSKIP}{STYLE}
+	    optional * [ALTHEADING]{HEADING}
+    Generic command to start a section.
+
+    NAME	: e.g., 'subsection' must be the name of a section counter
+    LEVEL	: a number, denoting depth of section -- section=1;
+		  number increases down the hierarchy.
+    INDENT	: Indentation of heading from left margin
+    PRESKIP	: Absolute value = skip to leave above the heading.
+		  If negative, then paragraph indent of text following
+		  heading is suppressed.
+    POSTSKIP	: if positive, then skip to leave below heading, else
+		  negative of skip to leave to right of run-on heading.
+    ALTHEADING  : for page headings and contents.
+    STYLE	: commands to set style
+  If '*' missing, then increments the counter.  If it is present, then
+  there should be no [ALTHEADING] argument.
+  Uses the counter 'secnumdepth' whose value is the highest section
+  level that is to be numbered and entered into \@dottedtocline.
+
+10. Treatment of Section Entries
+
+ NAME  (fixed) Determines the counter to use.
+
+ LEVEL (fixed) If level is greater than \counter{secnumdepth} (default 2) no
+ indexentry or number
+
+ INDENTS: \secindent (sections), \subindent (subsections,...,paragraphs).
+ Subparagraphs have \parindent fixed. These are dimensions.
+
+ Recommended: +-\parindent or 0pt
+
+ If indent is negative then SECTION.STY causes the section number to be set
+ flush right that distance from margin. Heading or text follows at the margin
+ itself.
+
+ Unnumbered headings are set at the margin if indent is negative. If the
+ indent is non-negative they are set flush left with the number position.
+
+ PRESKIPS \secpreskp (sections), \subpreskp(subsections..subparagraphs)
+ POSTSKIPS \secpstskp (sections),\subpstskp(subsections,subsubsections)
+           \parpstskp (paragraphs,subparagraphs)
+
+ Recommended: leave PRESKIPS' abs values unchanged, They are set -ve to
+ have flush first paragraphs. Use \secpreskp-\secpreskp to indent them.
+ Recommended: set POSTSKIPS to -1em or -\parindent to make sections run on.
+
+ By assigning these values to registers SECTION.STY makes them independent of
+ the surrounding font and size. Set the registers if you want this, redefine
+ them as macros if you want them to be font and size dependent.
+
+ STYLE \secsize \subsize \hdfnt size and fonts.
+ \secsize for sections,
+ \subsize for subsections.
+ Subsubsections and below have \normalsize (fixed).
+ \hdfnt is universal for all headings.
+
+11. Contents entries.
+
+ \@tocheadline{LEVEL}{PRESKIP}{INDENT}{STYLE}{ENTRY}{PAGENUM}
+ \@dottedtocline{LEVEL}{MARGIN}{INDENT}{ENTRY}{PAGENUM}
+
+ LEVEL		: determines if entry made.
+ PRESKIP	: vertical gap above.
+ INDENT 	: This must leave enough room for the chapter or section number
+		: It is added to the margin for the next level.
+ MARGIN 	: Left margin inherited from level above (zero for headlines).
+ STYLE		: Font sizing and setting.
+
+ LaTeX assumes that the ENTRY for sections be defined by a macro \l@section.
+ These are defined in the standard document styles but can be changed.
+ All entries of the \l@section commands are fixed. SECTION.STY does not
+ change the commands using \@dottedtocline in the style file. Those that do
+ not do so (\l@part, \l@chapter) are modified to use \@tocheadline.
+
+ INDENT for sections in {article} and chapters in {report} is rather tight at
+ 1.5em. If you increase it should also increase the MARGINS for lower
+ sections.
+
+12. The following internal LaTeX macros are redefined:
+
+ \part\@part\@spart\@endpart
+ \@chapter\@schapter		(also \fi moved)
+ \@makechapterhead               functions of these have been significantly
+ \@makeschapterhead              changed.
+
+ \ps@headings\ps@myheadings
+ \section\subsection
+ \subsubsection\paragraph
+ \subparagraph
+ \thebibliography
+ \theindex
+ \@begintheorem
+ \@oparbegintheorem
+ \@makecaption			optional style features added
+ \@startsection 		\fpind and does not pass #4 to \@sect,\@ssect
+ \@sect,\@ssect 		ignored parameter removed
+                        	\llap \@secdot used to adjust spacing
+                        	if \p@section defined used for number style.
+				calls \@makesecdot
+				\@sect only: \@makesvsec and
+				\@contmark, which is moved in
+				\@svsechd so that \unskip in \@xsect works).
+ \maketitle\@maketitle		suppress page number, reset \@title.. locally
+ \numberline			adds space after number, so overfull box if
+				too close to heading.
+
+CHANGES
+ Ver 1.3 (3.Apr 98)
+    If \secindent < 0, then \section* produces a flush heading, not outdented.
+    \hdpos takes level as parameter and is used for all sections, not just
+    \part and \chapter.
+    `ex' measurements replaced by \baselineskip equivalents.
+ Ver 1.31
+     Bugfix: \relax added to \@alph, \@Alph to enable use with \@ifempty test.
+ Ver 1.32
+     Bugfixes: \hdpos added to \@ssect, unused macro \secpos removed,
+               \nobreak added after \thechapter in \makechapterhead
+ Ver 1.4
+     \hdpos made simple macro again. Counter \hddepth determines when it
+     should be used. Functions of \@makechapterhead, \@smakechapterhead
+     changed to make editing vertical spacing of chapters easier.
+     \part\@part\@spart rewritten so that all spacing info in \part.
+     \part calls \@spart which finishes off the heading.
+ Memory use < 200 words.
+End of SECTION.STY
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/selectp.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/selectp.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1c4e609ff2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/selectp.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,232 @@
+%
+%       S E L E C T P . S T Y   - Select pages for output
+%
+%  Version 0.9 (test),  Sept 25, 1992  (So much for keeping versions current!)
+%
+%  By Donald Arseneau, asnd@reg.triumf.ca, based on macros in
+%  TUGBoat, 8:2 (1987), p. 217 written by Don Knuth, and with 
+%  suggestions from Hossein Saiedian.
+%
+%  This style allows selection of individual pages to be output by LaTeX
+%  or plain TeX by specifying, for example, 
+%
+%     \outputonly{1,3, 7-12 16 17}
+%
+%  The list of numbers should be in the order that TeX generates the pages.
+%  The numbers should be separated by commas or spaces, and may include 
+%  ranges (7-12).
+%
+%  More complete instructions follow \endinput
+
+
+%  First, set catcode of @ in case it isn't a "letter" already
+\expandafter\edef\csname SP@catcode\endcsname
+  {\catcode`\noexpand\@=\the\catcode`\@
+  \let \csname SP@catcode\endcsname \noexpand\UnDefinedButNoAt}
+\catcode`\@=11
+
+% Allow plain TeX to use this style:
+
+\ifx\c@page\Und@Fynd 
+ \let\c@page \pageno 
+ \def\@empty{}% note: \ifx ignores the \global nature of macros for comparison
+ \let\nofiles\relax 
+ \let\typeout\message
+\fi
+
+% Read list of selected pages
+
+\def\outputonly{\begingroup \catcode`\,13 \SP@outonly}
+
+\begingroup \catcode`\,13 
+\gdef\SP@outonly#1{\edef,{\string,}\typeout{Only pages #1 will be output.}%
+  \def,{ }\xdef\SP@geS{\SP@geS\space #1}% make commas be spaces
+  \endgroup 
+  \nofiles % prevent writing partial .aux files
+  \let\shipout\SP@shipout% replace shipout command
+  \ifnum\SP@nextpage=-\maxdimen % if first \outputonly command...
+    \SP@getnextpage \fi % get first page number from list
+}\endgroup
+
+\gdef\SP@geS{}
+
+% replace \shipout command with filter to select pages for output
+
+\let\plain@shipout=\shipout
+
+\newcount\SP@nextpage \global\SP@nextpage=-\maxdimen % flag as undefined
+\newcount\SP@expectpage \global\SP@expectpage=-\maxdimen
+
+\def\SP@getnextpage{\ifx\SP@geS\@empty \global\SP@nextpage\maxdimen
+     \else % If more page numbers on list
+     \afterassignment\SP@updPS \global\SP@nextpage\SP@geS\relax 
+     \fi}
+
+\def\SP@updPS#1\relax{\gdef\SP@geS{#1}}
+
+\def\SP@shipout{\relax %\showthe\c@page%
+ \ifnum\SP@expectpage=-\maxdimen \global\SP@expectpage\c@page
+ \else \global\advance\SP@expectpage\@ne
+ \fi
+ \ifnum\SP@expectpage=\c@page\else % page number has jumped,
+   \ifnum\SP@nextpage<\z@ %   if in middle of a range --
+     \ifnum \AbsVal\c@page >\AbsVal\SP@expectpage\else % and jumping backward --
+       \SP@getnextpage % read next number for sure
+   \fi\fi 
+   \SP@catchup  %  Resynchronize
+ \fi \global\SP@expectpage\c@page
+ \ifnum\SP@nextpage<\z@ % either a `negative' page, or end of range
+   \ifnum\c@page<\z@   % preamble pages in plain only match singly
+     \ifnum\c@page=\SP@nextpage\SP@getnextpage \let\SP@dopage\plain@shipout\fi
+   \else % look for range match
+     \ifnum\c@page>-\SP@nextpage \else \let\SP@dopage\plain@shipout \fi
+     \ifnum\c@page<-\SP@nextpage \else \SP@getnextpage \fi
+   \fi
+ \else % look for single match
+   \ifnum\c@page=\SP@nextpage \SP@getnextpage \let\SP@dopage\plain@shipout \fi
+ \fi \SP@dopage}
+
+\newbox\SP@garbage 
+\def\SP@dopage{\deadcycles\z@ \setbox\SP@garbage=}
+
+% read list of desired pages to get resynchronized with actual page numbers.
+% \SP@catchup is called whenever the page number has a discontinuity.
+%
+\def\SP@catchup{%
+ \ifnum \AbsVal\c@page >\AbsVal\SP@nextpage
+   \ifx\SP@geS\@empty \def\SP@catchup{\global\SP@nextpage\maxdimen}\fi
+   \SP@getnextpage 
+   \expandafter \SP@catchup 
+ \fi}
+
+% take absolute value of TeX number or dimension
+\def\AbsVal#1{\ifnum#1<\z@-\fi#1}
+
+\SP@catcode % restore @ catcode
+
+\endinput
+%
+% SELECTP.STY  -- Select pages for output
+%
+% INSTRUCTIONS
+%
+% This style file defines the command \outputonly which selects specific
+% pages for output, much as \includeonly selects certain files for input.
+% To use selectp.sty in LaTeX, specify "selectp" as one of the document
+% style options and give the command \outputonly{_list_of_page_numbers_}
+% before \begin{document}.  Only pages given in the list will be output
+% to the DVI file.  For example
+%
+%     \documentstyle[12pt,selectp,subeqn]{article}
+%     \outputonly{1,3, 7-12 16 17}
+%
+% which will allow only pages 1,3,7,8,9,10,11,12,16,17 to be output.
+% For plain TeX, use \input{selectp.sty}.
+% 
+% The number list should consist of numbers and number ranges (7-12, e.g.)
+% separated by commas or spaces. The order is not random but MUST BE THE
+% ORDER THAT THE PAGES ARE PRODUCED; normally this means the numbers must
+% always increase.  If an invalid page number appears on the list, no pages
+% will be output until the list is re-synchronized or the document ends.
+% 
+% Any time the document's page number does not increment normally,
+% selectp.sty tries to re-synchronize the page number with the \outputonly
+% list of numbers.  This is necessary when \includeonly is used. 
+% 
+% Pages that are labeled with roman numerals or letters should still be
+% listed with a normal arabic number; page xi should be referred to as 6.
+% 
+% In LaTeX, unfortunately, pages i and 1 are both number 1, so it is
+% tricky to skip over all the roman-numbered pages and then print
+% page 1.  If there are 3 roman-numbered pages,
+%   1-3      will print pages i,ii,iii; not pages 1,2,3
+%   1-3,1-5  will print pages i,ii,iii,1,2,3,4,5
+%   1-3,8-12 will print pages i,ii,iii,8,9,10,11,19
+%   1,1-5    will print i,1,2,3,4,5
+%   1-6      prints pages i,ii,iii only, not pages 4,5,6  !!!
+%   0,2-6    prints pages 2,3,4,5,6, since there is no page 0 and the
+%            outputonly page list is resynchronized when the actual page
+%            number goes back to 1)
+% 
+% The last example is illuminating.  LaTeX looks for page 0, but can't find
+% it. It skips pages until the page number goes from 3(iii) to 1, at which
+% point it resynchronizes by reading "2" from the list, waiting for page 2
+% to be produced, and then writing page 2. Selectp then reads "-6", and
+% CONTINUES outputting pages until it has done page 6.  As long as the
+% numbers of the intervening pages are less than 6 (the end of the range),
+% those pages will be printed. 
+% 
+% If there are no roman numeral pages, the number list is simple, because
+% the numbers must increase monotonically.
+%
+% LaTeX will not write auxilliary files while selecting output pages, so
+% the cross references and citations must be correct on the run BEFORE 
+% using \outputonly.  Unfortunately, this means you must produce the 
+% full-size DVI file at least once.
+% 
+% If multuple \outputonly commands are given, the lists are concatenated.
+% 
+% In plain TeX, specify roman numeral pages as negative numbers, but do not
+% use ranges until getting to the ordinary (arabic) page numbers (e.g.,
+% \outputonly{-1,-2,-3,-4, 1-8}).  In plain TeX specifying page 1 will NOT
+% print page i. 
+% 
+% If a page number in the list is not found, generally no more pages will be
+% printed. For example, suppose a document has 50 pages, the list 3 5 910 13
+% (which perhaps should read "9 10") causes LaTeX to process silently
+% through the whole document looking for page 910.  Only pages 3 and 5 will
+% be printed. 
+% 
+% EXCEPT if the number terminating a RANGE is not found {3 5-910 13},
+% LaTeX continues outputting pages until the end.
+% 
+% EXCEPT if the actual page number changes discontinuously, then the number
+% list MAY be scanned for the next number greater than the new page number.
+% (Jumps are usually due to the numbering being changed from roman to arabic
+% with the page reset to 1, or because an included file was skipped due to
+% an \includeonly command.) The list is scanned if the page number jumps
+% backward, or if it jumps forward PAST the current target page. ("Target
+% page" = the end of the current range or the next number to be printed out,
+% as appropriate.) 
+% 
+% Numbers must be integers: 4.3 is illegal, even if some other style file
+% is generating page numbers in that format.
+% 
+% Of course non-numbers are illegal.  Some plausible mistakes:
+%      page, xvii, IV, 12--16, 49ff, 49-, 5_7.  
+% 5_7 could be a typo for the range 5-7.
+% To specify page 49 and all following ("49ff" or "49-"), use a range 
+% ending with a non-existent page:  49-99999.  
+% The typo 12--16 prints pages 12 and 16, not the range 12 through 16 as
+% intended. 
+% 
+% EXAMPLES OF USE
+% 
+% Suppose a document has pages i,ii,iii,iv,v,vi,1,2,3,...,33, but pages
+% 22...28 are absent due to \includeonly; here are some examples of valid
+% uses of \outputonly. 
+% 
+% \outputonly{15-20}        -- prints only the 6 pages 15...20
+% \outputonly{1-3}          -- prints pages i,ii,iii (in LaTeX)
+%                           -- plain TeX prints pages 1,2,3
+% \outputonly{1,1,2}        -- prints pages i,1,2
+% \outputonly{0,1,2}        -- prints pages 1,2
+% \outputonly{1,3-6}        -- prints pages i,iii,iv,v,vi
+% \outputonly{4,3-6}        -- prints pages iv,3,4,5,6
+% \outputonly{5,2}          -- prints pages v,2
+% \outputonly{5-2}          -- prints only page v    only!
+% \outputonly{5-7}          -- prints pages v,vi     only!
+% \outputonly{1-33}         -- prints pages i,ii,iii,iv,v,vi  only!
+% \outputonly{29-99}        -- prints pages 29,30,31,32,33
+% \outputonly{19-99}        -- prints pages 19,20,21,29,30,31,32,33
+% \outputonly{24-32}        -- prints pages 29,30,31,32
+% \outputonly{15-25,32}     -- prints pages 15,16,17,18,19,20,21,32
+% \outputonly{0,4,23-27,31-99}  -- prints pages 4,31,32,33
+%
+% Version 0.9 (test), Sept 25, 1992: 
+%
+% Send problem reports to asnd@triumfcl.bitnet or asnd@Reg.triumf.ca
+%
+% test integrity:
+% brackets: round, square, curly, angle:   () [] {} <>
+% backslash, slash, vertical, hat, tilde:   \ / | ^ ~
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/sepnum.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/sepnum.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5d81c61680e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/sepnum.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,218 @@
+%% This is file `sepnum.sty' -- separated numbers
+%%
+%% (C) 1995, 1996, 2001 Bernd Raichle
+%%                      Raichle@Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de
+%%
+%% This package provides a means of formatting numbers
+%% with (a) a decimal separator different of the default (`.')
+%% and (b) a separator (default `,') every three digits.
+%%
+%% First version of this package was posted to the newsgroup
+%% `de.comp.tex' November 6th, 1995 (as `printnum.sty').
+%%
+%%
+%% -- LICENSING CONDITION --
+%%
+%% This program may be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+%% of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.0 of this
+%% license, or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%%   CTAN:macros/latex/base/lppl.txt.
+%%
+%%
+%% -- USAGE --
+%%
+%% The macro
+%%
+%%    \sepnum{<c>}{<sbc>}{<sac>}{<number>}
+%%
+%% produces the <number> with the decimal point replaced by <c>
+%% and the separator <sbc> every three digits in the integer part,
+%% the separator <sac> every three digits in the fractional part
+%% of <number>.  \sepnum is _fully expandable_ and _not_ fragile,
+%% unless one of <c>, <sbc>, or <sac> is.
+%%
+%% Example:
+%%   - a non realistic example to show the capabilities of \sepnum
+%%     \sepnum{,}{*}{-}{1234.5678} => 1*234,567-8
+%%   - to print a number inserting small spaces each three digits
+%%     \sepnum{.}{\,}{\,}{1234.5678} => 1\,234.567\,8
+%%
+%%
+%% Additionally this package provides
+%%
+%%   \sepnumform{<c>}{<sbc>}{<sac>}{<LaTeX-counter>}
+%%
+%% to use \sepnum with a LaTeX counter.
+%%
+%% Example (with a decimal comma in the print form \the<counter>):
+%%   \newcounter{money}
+%%   \renewcommand{\themoney}{\sepnumform{,}{.}{}{money}}
+%%
+%%   \setcounter{money}{-1000}
+%%   You have \themoney{} left.
+%%
+%%
+%% (For compatibility with `printnum.sty', the macros
+%% \printnum{<number>} and \printnumKomma/\printnumTrenner
+%% still exist.)
+%%
+%%
+%% -- SEE ALSO --
+%%
+%% * Package ``comma.sty'' by David Carlisle which provides
+%%   similar features for integers only, i.e. it misses support
+%%   for the decimal point/comma in fixed point numbers.
+%% * Package ``numprint.sty'' by Harald Harders supporting
+%%   formatting of numbers given as 1234e5 in addition.
+%%   
+%%
+\begingroup \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup
+\expandafter\ifx \csname ProvidesPackage\endcsname\relax \else
+  \ProvidesPackage{sepnum}%
+      [1996/09/05 v2.0 Insert a separator every three digits (br)]
+\fi
+
+
+%
+% auxiliary macros for loops:
+%
+\newcommand{\sepnumReturnFi}{}
+\newcommand{\sepnumReturnElseFi}{}
+\newcommand{\sepnumReturnOrFi}{}
+
+\def\sepnumReturnFi#1\fi{\fi #1}
+\def\sepnumReturnElseFi#1\else#2\fi{\fi #1}
+\def\sepnumReturnOrFi#1\or#2\fi{\fi #1}
+
+%
+% \sepnum@DoNothing #1
+%    don't change #1 (removes braces around argument token list!)
+%
+\newcommand{\sepnum@DoNothing}[1]{#1}
+
+%
+% \sepnum@ReverseNumber #1 #2
+%    reverses all tokens in #2 and calls #1{#2} afterwards
+%
+\newcommand{\sepnum@ReverseNumber}[2]{%
+  \sepnum@DoReverseNumber{#1}{}#2\relax}
+\newcommand{\sepnum@DoReverseNumber}[3]{%
+  \ifx\relax#3\sepnumReturnElseFi{#1{#2}}%
+  \else\sepnumReturnFi{\sepnum@DoReverseNumber{#1}{#3#2}}%
+  \fi}
+
+%
+% \sepnum@ThreeDigits #1 #2 #3
+%    reverses #3, inserts #1 every three tokens/digits
+%    (you have to reverse #3 again using \sepnum@ReverseNumber!),
+%    calls #2{#3} afterwards
+%
+\newcommand{\sepnum@ThreeDigits}[3]{%
+  \sepnum@DoThreeDigits{#1}{#2}{}0#3\relax}
+\newcommand{\sepnum@DoThreeDigits}[5]{%
+  \ifx\relax#5\sepnumReturnElseFi{#2{#3}}%
+  \else\sepnumReturnFi{%
+    \ifcase#4\noexpand\sepnum@DoNothing{}% 0
+      \sepnumReturnOrFi{\sepnum@DoThreeDigits{#1}{#2}{#5#3}1}%
+    \or   % 1
+      \sepnumReturnOrFi{\sepnum@DoThreeDigits{#1}{#2}{#5#3}2}%
+    \or   % 2
+      \sepnumReturnElseFi{\sepnum@DoThreeDigits{#1}{#2}{#5#3}3}%
+    \else % 3  ==> insert #1
+      \sepnumReturnFi{\sepnum@DoThreeDigits{#1}{#2}{#5#1#3}1}%
+    \fi}%
+  \fi}
+
+%
+% \sepnum@BeforeComma #1 #2
+% \sepnum@AfterComma #1 #2
+%    call \sepnum@ReverseNumber and \sepnum@DoThreeDigits
+%    to correctly group the number #2 every three digits
+%    either with or without reversing first or afterwards.
+%
+\newcommand{\sepnum@BeforeComma}[2]{%
+  \sepnum@ReverseNumber{\sepnum@ThreeDigits{#1}\sepnum@DoNothing}{#2}}
+\newcommand{\sepnum@AfterComma}[2]{%
+  \sepnum@ThreeDigits{#1}{\sepnum@ReverseNumber\sepnum@DoNothing}{#2}}
+
+%
+%%%%%%%%%% USER MACRO %%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \sepnum #1 #2 #3 #4
+%
+%    #1 decimal comma
+%    #2 separator for three digits groups before comma
+%    #3 separator for three digits groups after comma
+%    #4 number
+%
+\newcommand{\sepnum}[4]{%
+  \sepnum@Sign{#1}{#2}{#3}#4.\relax}
+%
+%    look first for sign `+' or `-', divide given number in
+%    digits before and after `.', insert #1 as decimal comma
+%    (in \sepnum@SepComma)
+%
+\newcommand{\sepnum@Sign}[4]{%
+  \ifx\relax#4%
+    0%
+  \else \sepnumReturnFi{%
+    \ifx -#4%
+      \sepnumReturnElseFi{-\sepnum@SepComma{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+    \else \sepnumReturnFi{%
+      \ifx +#4%
+        \sepnumReturnElseFi{+\sepnum@SepComma{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+      \else
+        \sepnumReturnFi{\sepnum@SepComma{#1}{#2}{#3}#4}%
+      \fi}%
+    \fi}%
+  \fi}
+
+\newcommand{\sepnum@SepComma}{}
+\def\sepnum@SepComma#1#2#3#4.#5\relax{%
+  \ifx$#4$0% no digits before `.' => add 0 for "0.xxx"
+  \else \sepnumReturnFi{\sepnum@BeforeComma{#2}{#4}}\fi
+  \ifx$#5$% no digits after `.'
+  \else \sepnumReturnFi{#1\sepnum@DoSepComma{#3}#5\relax}\fi}
+
+% remove `.' inserted in \sepnum
+\def\sepnum@DoSepComma#1#2.#3\relax{%
+  \sepnum@AfterComma{#1}{#2}}
+
+
+%
+%%%%%%%%%% USER MACRO %%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \sepnumform #1 #2 #3 #4
+%
+%    like \sepnum but #4 is the name of a LaTeX counter
+%
+\newcommand{\sepnumform}[4]{%
+  \expandafter\sepnum@doform
+  \expandafter{\number\value{#4}}{#1}{#2}{#3}}
+\newcommand{\sepnum@doform}[4]{%
+  \sepnum{#2}{#3}{#4}{#1}}
+
+
+%
+%%%%%%%%%% USER MACRO %%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% For compatibility with `printnum.sty':
+%
+% \printnum #1
+%
+\newcommand{\printnum}[1]{%
+  \sepnum{\printnumKomma}{\printnumTrenner}{\printnumTrenner}{#1}}
+%
+% Macros to specify comma and separator (default to get
+% european style numbers, e.g. "123.456,78" for "123456.78"):
+%
+%   \printnumKomma    => ,
+%   \printnumTrenner  => .
+%
+\newcommand{\printnumKomma}{,}
+\newcommand{\printnumTrenner}{.}
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `sepnum.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/shadow.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/shadow.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c07d11b9155
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/shadow.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `shadow.sty',
+%%
+%% Copyright 1994, 2003 Mauro Orlandini
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 1999/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%%% ======================================================================
+%%%  @LaTeX-style{
+%%%     filename        = "shadow.sty",
+%%%     version         = "1.3",
+%%%     date            = "19 February 2003",
+%%%     author          = "Mauro Orlandini",
+%%%     address         = "TeSRE Institute/CNR
+%%%                        Area della Ricerca di Bologna
+%%%                        Via Gobetti 101
+%%%                        40129 Bologna, Italy",
+%%%     e-mail          = "orlandini@bo.iasf.cnr.it",
+%%%     telephone       = "+39 51 639-8667",
+%%%     FAX             = "+39 51 639-8723",
+%%%     supported       = "yes",
+%%%     abstract        = "The command \shabox has the same meaning of the
+%%%                        LaTeX command \fbox except for the fact that a
+%%%                        "shadow" is added to the bottom and the right side
+%%%                        of the box. It computes the right dimension of the
+%%%                        box, even if the text spans over more than one
+%%%                        line; in this case a warning messagge is given.",
+%%%     codetable       = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%     docstring       = "There are three parameters governing:
+%%%                        1. the width of the lines delimiting the box:
+%%%                           \sboxrule
+%%%                        2. the separation between the edge of the box and
+%%%                           its contents: \sboxsep
+%%%                        3. the dimension of the shadow: \sdim
+%%%                        Sintax: \shabox{<text>}
+%%%                                where <text> is the text to be put in the
+%%%                                framed box. It can be an entire paragraph.
+%%%                        Adapted from the file dropshadow.tex by
+%%%                        drstrip@cd.sandia.gov.
+%%%                        V1.1  Works in a double column environment.
+%%%                        V1.2  When there is an online shadow box, it
+%%%                              will be centered on the line (in V1.1 the
+%%%                              box was aligned with the baseline).
+%%%                              (Courtesy by Mike Piff)"
+%%%                        V1.3  Added a number of missing % signs
+%%%                              no other cleanup done (FMi)
+%%%                        
+%%% }
+%%% ======================================================================
+%
+%
+\ProvidesPackage{shadow}[2003/02/19 v1.3 shadow boxes (M.O.)]
+
+\newdimen\txtwdth  \newdimen\sht  \newdimen\shw  \newbox\shbox
+\newdimen\sboxsep  \newdimen\sboxrule  \newdimen\sdim
+\sboxsep  = 10pt
+\sdim     = 4pt
+\sboxrule = .4pt
+\def\shabox#1{\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#1}%
+\shw\wd\@tempboxa
+\if@twocolumn\txtwdth\columnwidth\else\txtwdth\textwidth\fi
+\ifdim\shw<\txtwdth 
+  \leavevmode\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#1}%
+\else
+  \typeout{Shadow Warning: Box dimension greater than textwidth.}%
+  \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\hsize\txtwdth\advance\hsize-2\sboxsep
+    \advance\hsize-2\sboxrule \advance\hsize-2\sdim \advance\hsize-15pt#1}%
+\fi
+ \setbox\shbox\hbox{\@tempdima\sboxrule
+     \advance\@tempdima \sboxsep \advance\@tempdima \dp\@tempboxa
+    \hbox{\lower \@tempdima\hbox
+   {\vbox{\hrule \@height \sboxrule
+           \hbox{\vrule \@width \sboxrule \hskip\sboxsep
+            \vbox{\vskip\sboxsep \box\@tempboxa\vskip\sboxsep}\hskip
+                         \sboxsep\vrule \@width \sboxrule}%
+                   \hrule \@height \sboxrule}}}}%
+\sht\ht\shbox \advance\sht-\sdim
+\leavevmode\vbox{\baselineskip0pt\lineskip0pt\vtop{%%     V1.2
+                                                   %%     Added \vtop
+                                                   %%     From M.Piff
+             \hbox{\copy\shbox\vrule width\sdim height\sht}%
+             \hbox{\kern\sdim\vrule height\sdim width \wd\shbox}}}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/showtags.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/showtags.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9d69fde72a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/showtags.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+% -*-latex-*-
+%%% /u/sy/beebe/tex/bib/showtags.sty, Mon Sep 12 09:25:01 1994
+%%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@plot79.math.utah.edu>
+%%%
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%%  @LaTeX-style-file{
+%%%     author          = "Nelson H. F. Beebe",
+%%%     version         = "1.04",
+%%%     date            = "06 September 1995",
+%%%     time            = "16:46:14 MDT",
+%%%     filename        = "showtags.sty",
+%%%     address         = "Center for Scientific Computing
+%%%                        Department of Mathematics
+%%%                        University of Utah
+%%%                        Salt Lake City, UT 84112
+%%%                        USA",
+%%%     telephone       = "+1 801 581 5254",
+%%%     FAX             = "+1 801 581 4148",
+%%%     checksum        = "49064 97 441 4220",
+%%%     email           = "beebe@math.utah.edu (Internet)",
+%%%     codetable       = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%     keywords        = "bibliography, citation label, citation tag",
+%%%     supported       = "yes",
+%%%     docstring       = "This style file causes the bibliography
+%%%                        citation tags to be displayed in boldface
+%%%                        text in a right-adjusted framed box over
+%%%                        each entry in a bibliography.  This serves
+%%%                        as a handy reference when the tags are
+%%%                        needed for a \cite{} macro.
+%%%
+%%%                        For flexibility, the user may redefine
+%%%                        \thecitetag to change the format. E.g.
+%%%
+%%%                        \renewcommand{\thecitetag}[1]{\fbox{\small\tt #1}}
+%%%
+%%%                        would typeset the tag in small typewriter
+%%%                        text in a box.
+%%%
+%%%                        The checksum field above contains a CRC-16
+%%%                        checksum as the first value, followed by the
+%%%                        equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word
+%%%                        count) utility output of lines, words, and
+%%%                        characters.  This is produced by Robert
+%%%                        Solovay's checksum utility."
+%%%      }
+%%% ====================================================================
+%
+%%% Revision history:
+%%%
+%%% 1.04 [06-Sep-1995]	update for LaTeX 2e support
+%%% 1.03 [12-Sep-1994]	update file header, and add \strut to label box
+%%% 1.02 [10-Sep-1991]	update file header, trim trailing space
+%%% 1.01 [11-Jul-1990]	almost original version
+\ifx \DeclareRobustCommand \undefined% then assume LaTeX 2.09
+% \@bibitem and \@lbibitem definitions extracted from latex.tex
+% labelled ``LATEX VERSION 2.09 <24 May 1989>''.  We add only the
+% \@showtag invocations.
+%
+    \def\@bibitem#1{\item\if@filesw \immediate\write\@auxout
+        {\string\bibcite{#1}{\the\c@enumi}}\fi\ignorespaces
+         \@showtag{#1}}
+%
+    \def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{\item[\@biblabel{#1}]\if@filesw
+          { \def\protect##1{\string ##1\space}\immediate
+            \write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{#2}{#1}}}\fi\ignorespaces
+         \@showtag{#2}}
+\else                           % must be LaTeX 2e
+% From latex.ltx <1994/12/18>:
+    \def\@bibitem#1{\item\if@filesw \immediate\write\@auxout
+           {\string\bibcite{#1}{\the\value{\@listctr}}}\fi\ignorespaces
+           \@showtag{#1}}
+%
+    \def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{\item[\@biblabel{#1}\hfill]\if@filesw
+          {\let\protect\noexpand
+           \immediate
+           \write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{#2}{#1}}}\fi\ignorespaces
+            \@showtag{#2}}
+\fi
+%
+% Here are the macros that actually set the tag.  By default, we put it
+% in boldface type in a framed box that is right-adjusted in exactly the
+% width of the current line (and we handle both the one- and two-column
+% cases), and we ensure that a page break does not occur between the
+% tag-in-the-box and its bibliographic entry.  For flexibility, the user
+% may redefine \thecitetag to change the format.
+%
+\newcommand{\thecitetag}[1]{\fbox{\bf #1}}
+%
+\def\@showtag#1{
+    \@tempdima=\textwidth
+    \if@twocolumn
+        \advance\@tempdima by -\columnsep
+        \divide\@tempdima by 2
+    \fi
+    \hbox to \@tempdima{\hfill\thecitetag{\strut#1}}\nobreak}
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/sphack.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/sphack.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e0bc115d34d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/sphack.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+% SPHACK.STY
+% Oliver Pretzel  (o.pretzel@ic.ac.uk)
+% Created 22 May 1998, Version 1.0 22May 1998
+% Modified space hacks for LateX (209 and 2e)
+%   (to prevent \label, \index and similar commands
+%    affecting spacing in vertical mode).
+%
+%
+% DOCUMENTATION at end of file
+%
+% ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
+%
+% This file may be distributed freely.
+% It may be modified for local use (please inform me of such modifications)
+% Modified versions may only be distributed if
+% 1. The name is changed
+% 2. A statement acknowledging the modification heads the file.
+%
+% DO NOT USE \neq in this file
+\chardef\neq\the\catcode`\@
+\makeatletter\@makeother\"
+%
+
+\typeout{`sphack.sty <1.0>}
+%*************************
+
+\ifx\@savdim\undefined\let\@savdim\@savsk\newskip\@savsk\fi
+\def\@bsphack{\relax\ifmmode\else\@savsk\lastskip\@savsf\ifhmode\spacefactor
+    \else\lastpenalty\@savdim\prevdepth\removelastskip\fi\fi}
+\def\@esphack{\relax\ifmmode\else\ifvmode\penalty\if@nobreak\@M\else
+    \if@inlabel\@M\else\if@noskipsec\@M\else\@savsf\fi\fi\fi
+    \prevdepth\@savdim\vskip\@savsk\else
+    \spacefactor\@savsf\ifdim\@savsk>\z@\ignorespaces\fi\fi\fi}
+\ifx\LateXe\undefined
+\def\@Esphack{\@esphack\ifhmode\ifdim\@savsk>\z@
+    \global\@ignoretrue\ignorespaces\fi\fi}
+\else
+\def\@Esphack{\@esphack\ifhmode\ifdim\@savsk>\z@
+    \@ignoretrue\ignorespaces\fi\fi}
+\fi
+
+% This line must be last line of code
+\catcode`\@\neq\let\neq\ne\endinput
+
+*******************
+  DOCUMENTATION
+*******************
+Standard LaTeX uses the macros \@bsphack, \@esphack, and \@Esphack, for
+inserts into the text that should be invisible. So, for instance a space
+before and after a \label command should not result in two spaces in the
+output.
+
+LaTeX deals with this as follows
+ in maths mode do nothing,
+ in horizontal mode restore the space factor,
+ if the last thing on the list was a space
+   add \ignorespaces (and (\global)\ignoretrue at the end of an environment),
+ in vertical mode do nothing.
+
+Doing nothing in maths mode is (nearly) harmless because maths mode does its
+own spacing (and anyway hidden commands will usually appear only at the start
+or end of maths).
+
+Doing nothing in vertical mode is not harmless. Many invisible commands such
+as \index may insert delayed write commands into TeX's output (so that page
+numbers are correctly calculated). These commands can cause vertical space to
+accumulate, and may cause a page break; \index is a particular problem in
+LaTeX209 since it inserts a delayed write if an index is actually being built
+(\makeindex in preamble) but does nothing otherwise. That can change the page
+breaks in a document.
+
+It is not possible to solve this problem completely in LaTeX because TeX does
+not remove things from the main vertical list once they have been
+contributed. So LaTeX2e makes \index insert something into the vertical
+list whether the index is being written or not. That has the virtue of
+consistancy, but is far from ideal. For instance, an \index immediately after
+an \item can cause the page to break between the item label and content.
+
+The code above remedies this fault and other common anomalies so that commands
+are nearly always invisible in vertical mode as well. It works as follows:
+
+Rename LaTeX's dimension \@savsk to \@savdim set a new skip \@savsk
+  (because we need a true skip and a dimension in vertical mode)
+
+\@bsphack (at start of invisible command)
+in hmode (non-math)
+   store spacefactor in \@savsf
+   store lastskip in \@savsk (used to test whether space already present)
+in vmode
+   store lastpenalty in \@savsf
+   store lastskip in \@savsk (used for movement)
+   store previous depth  in \@savdim
+   skip back \lastskip
+
+\@esphack (at end of invisible command)
+in hmode (non-math)
+   set spacefactor = \@savsf
+   if \@savsk > \z@ \ignorespaces
+in vmode
+   if in a label, or just after section heading, or if \@nobreak
+      insert infinite penalty, (to prevent a page break)
+   else insert penalty \@savsf
+   endif
+   set previous depth = \@savdim
+   skip \@savsk
+
+Just as in standard LateX, \@Esphack is \@esphack + (\global)\@ignoretrue.
+
+It is not necessary to change any of the label or index macros to fit with
+this code.
+
+End of sphack.sty
+*******************
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/statex.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/statex.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f0be39a5145
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/statex.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,425 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `statex.sty'.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 2002-2004 by Rodney A Sparapani <rsparapa@mcw.edu>
+%% 
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%%
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%%
+%% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 1999/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{statex}[2004/04/03 v1.5 a statistics style for latex]
+\RequirePackage{ifthen}
+\RequirePackage{amsmath}
+\RequirePackage{amssymb}
+\RequirePackage{bm}
+\RequirePackage[dvipsnames, usenames]{color}
+
+%begin: borrowed from upgreek; thanks to Walter Schmidt <was@VR-Web.de>
+%use Adobe Symbol for upright pi (constant)
+   \DeclareSymbolFont{ugrf@m}{U}{psy}{m}{n}
+   \DeclareMathSymbol{\cpi}{\mathord}{ugrf@m}{`p}
+%to use Euler Roman comment previous lines and uncomment rest of block
+%  \DeclareFontFamily{U}{eur}{\skewchar\font'177}
+%  \DeclareFontShape{U}{eur}{m}{n}{%
+%    <-6> eurm5 <6-8> eurm7 <8-> eurm10}{}
+%  \DeclareFontShape{U}{eur}{b}{n}{%
+%    <-6> eurb5 <6-8> eurb7 <8-> eurb10}{}
+%  \DeclareSymbolFont{ugrf@m}{U}{eur}{m}{n}
+%  \SetSymbolFont{ugrf@m}{bold}{U}{eur}{b}{n}
+%  \DeclareMathSymbol{\cpi}{\mathord}{ugrf@m}{"19}
+%end
+
+%new commands 
+\DeclareMathAlphabet{\sfsl}{OT1}{cmss}{m}{sl}
+%the next command seems to have no effect when used in conjunction with bm!?!
+\SetMathAlphabet{\sfsl}{bold}{OT1}{cmss}{bx}{sl}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\logit}{logit}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\diag}{diag}
+\DeclareMathOperator{\erf}{erf}
+\newcommand*{\chisq}{\relax\ifmmode\chi^2\else$\chi^2$\fi}
+%\newcommand*{\e}[1]{\mathrm{e}\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{}{^{#1}}}
+\newcommand*{\e}[1]{\mathrm{e}^{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\E}[2][]{\text{E}\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{}{_{#1}} \lb #2 \rb}
+\newcommand*{\ha}{{\frac{\alpha}{2}}}
+\newcommand*{\I}[2][]{\text{I}\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{}{_{#1}} \lb #2 \rb}
+\newcommand*{\If}{\;\text{if}\;\;}
+\newcommand*{\iid}{\;\text{iid}\;}
+\newcommand*{\ij}{{i,j}}
+\newcommand*{\im}{\mathrm{i}}
+\newcommand*{\lb}{\left[}
+\newcommand*{\lp}{\left(}
+\newcommand*{\lr}[1][]{\left[ #1 \right]}
+\newcommand*{\ol}{\overline}
+\newcommand*{\ow}{\;\text{otherwise}\;\;}
+\newcommand*{\rb}{\right]}
+\newcommand*{\rp}{\right)}
+\newcommand*{\sd}{\sigma}
+\newcommand*{\ul}{\underline}
+\newcommand*{\V}[2][]{\text{V}\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{}{_{#1}} \lb #2 \rb}
+\newcommand*{\where}{\;\text{where}\;\;}
+\newcommand*{\xy}{{xy}}
+\newcommand*{\XY}{{XY}}
+%\newcommand*{\n}[1][]{_{n #1}}
+\def\bp(#1){\left(#1\right)}
+\newcommand*{\bb}[1][]{\left[ #1 \right]}
+
+%re-definitions
+%\def~{\relax\ifmmode\sim\else\nobreakspace{}\fi}
+\renewcommand*{~}{\relax\ifmmode\sim\else\nobreakspace{}\fi}
+
+%\let\STATEXi=\i
+%\renewcommand*{\i}[1][]{\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\STATEXi}{_{i #1}}}
+
+\let\STATEXGamma=\Gamma
+\renewcommand*{\Gamma}[1][]{\STATEXGamma\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{}{\lp #1 \rp}}
+
+\let\STATEXand=\and
+\renewcommand*{\and}{\relax\ifmmode\expandafter\;\;\text{and}\;\;\else\expandafter\STATEXand\fi}
+
+\let\STATEXH=\H
+\renewcommand*{\H}{\relax\ifmmode\expandafter\text{H}\else\expandafter\STATEXH\fi}
+
+\let\STATEXP=\P
+\renewcommand*{\P}[2][]{\ifthenelse{\equal{#2}{}}{\STATEXP}%
+{\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\text{P} \lb #2 \rb}{\text{P}_{#1} \lb #2 \rb}}}
+
+\renewcommand*{\|}{\relax\ifmmode\expandafter\mid\else\expandafter$\mid$\fi}
+
+%%Discrete distributions 
+%declarations
+\newcommand*{\B}[1]{\mathrm{B}\lp #1 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\BB}[1]{\mathrm{Beta\!-\!Bin}\lp #1 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\Bin}[1]{\mathrm{Bin}\lp #1 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\Dir}[1]{\mathrm{Dirichlet}\lp #1 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\HG}[1]{\mathrm{Hypergeometric}\lp #1 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\M}[1]{\mathrm{Multinomial}\lp #1 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\NB}[1]{\mathrm{Neg\!-\!Bin}\lp #1 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\Poi}[1]{\mathrm{Poisson}\lp #1 \rp}
+\let\Poisson=\Poi
+%probability mass functions
+\newcommand*{\pBB}[4][x]{\frac{\Gamma[#2+1]\Gamma[#3+#1]\Gamma[#2+#4-#1]\Gamma[#3+#4]}%
+{\Gamma[#1+1]\Gamma[#2-#1+1]\Gamma[#2+#3+#4]\Gamma[#3]\Gamma[#4]}%
+\I[#1]{\{0, 1,\., #2\}}, \where #3>0,\; #4>0 \and n=1, 2,\.}
+%\newcommand{\pBB}[4][x]{\frac{\Gamma[#2+1]}{\Gamma[#1+1]\Gamma[#2-#1+1]}%
+%\frac{\Gamma[#3+#1]\Gamma[#2+#4-#1]}{\Gamma[#2+#3+#4]}%
+%\frac{\Gamma[#3+#4]}{\Gamma[#3]\Gamma[#4]}\I[#1]{\{0, 1,\., #2\}},%
+%\where #3>0,\; #4>0 \and n=1, 2,\.}
+\newcommand*{\pBin}[3][x]{\binom{#2}{#1}#3^#1 \lp 1-#3 \rp^{#2-#1}%
+\I[#1]{\{0,1,\.,#2\}}, \where p \in \lp0, 1\rp \and n=1, 2,\.}
+\newcommand*{\pPoi}[2][x]{\frac{1}{#1!}#2^{#1}\e{-#2}\I[#1]{\{0, 1,\.\}}, \where #2>0}
+
+%%Continuous distributions
+%declarations
+\newcommand*{\Cau}[1]{\mathrm{Cauchy}\lp #1 \rp}
+\let\Cauchy=\Cau
+\newcommand*{\Chi}[1]{\mathrm{\chi^2}\lp #1 \rp}
+\let\Chisq=\Chi
+\newcommand*{\Bet}[1]{\mathrm{Beta}\lp #1 \rp}
+\let\Beta=\Bet
+\newcommand*{\Exp}[1]{\mathrm{Exp}\lp #1 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\F}[1]{\mathrm{F}\lp #1 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\Gam}[1]{\mathrm{Gamma}\lp #1 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\IC}[1]{\mathrm{\chi^{-2}}\lp #1 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\IG}[1]{\mathrm{Gamma^{-1}}\lp #1 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\IW}[1]{\mathrm{Wishart^{-1}}\lp #1 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\Log}[1]{\mathrm{Logistic}\lp #1 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\LogN}[1]{\mathrm{Log\!-\!N}\lp #1 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\N}[2][]{\mathrm{N}\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{}{_{#1}}\lp #2 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\Par}[1]{\mathrm{Pareto}\lp #1 \rp}
+\let\Pareto=\Par
+\newcommand*{\Tsq}[1]{\mathrm{T^2}\lp #1 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\U}[1]{\mathrm{U}\lp #1 \rp}
+\newcommand*{\W}[1]{\mathrm{Wishart}\lp #1 \rp}
+
+\let\STATEXt=\t
+\renewcommand*{\t}[1]{\relax\ifmmode\expandafter\mathrm{t}\lp #1 \rp%
+\else\expandafter\STATEXt{#1}\fi}
+%probability density functions
+\newcommand*{\pBet}[3][x]{\frac{\Gamma[#2+#3]}{\Gamma[#2]\Gamma[#3]}%
+#1^{#2-1}\lp1-#1\rp^{#3-1}\I[#1]\lb0,1\rb, \where #2>0 \and #3>0}
+\newcommand*{\pCau}[3][x]{\ifthenelse{\equal{#2, #3}{0, 1}}{\frac{1}{\cpi\lp1+#1\rp^2}}%
+{\frac{1}{#3\cpi\left\{1+\lb\lp x-#2\rp/#3\rb^2\right\}}, \where #3>0}}
+\newcommand*{\pChi}[2][x]{\frac{2^{-#2/2}}{\Gamma[#2/2]}#1^{#2/2-1}\e{-#1/2}%
+\I[#1]\lp0,\infty\rp, \where #2>0}
+\newcommand*{\pExp}[2][x]{\frac{1}{#2}\e{-#1/#2}\I[#1]\lp0,\infty\rp,%
+\where #2>0}
+\newcommand*{\pGam}[3][x]{\frac{#3^{#2}}{\Gamma[#2]}#1^{#2-1}\e{-#3#1}%
+\I[#1]\lp0,\infty\rp, \where #2>0 \and #3>0}
+\newcommand*{\pN}[3][x]{\ifthenelse{\equal{#2, #3}{0, 1}}%
+{\frac{1}{\sqrt{2\cpi}}\e{-#1^2/2}}%
+{\frac{1}{\sqrt{2\cpi#3}}\e{-\lp#1-#2\rp^2/2#3}}}
+\newcommand*{\pPar}[3][x]{\frac{#3}{#2\lp1+#1/#2\rp^{#3+1}}\I[#1]\lp0,\infty\rp,%
+\where #2>0 \and #3>0}
+\newcommand*{\pU}[3][x]{\ifthenelse{\equal{#2, #3}{0, 1}}{\I[#1]\lb0, 1\rb}%
+{\frac{1}{#3-#2}\I[#1]\lb#2,#3\rb, \where #2<#3}}
+
+%re-define other accents
+\let\STATEXequal=\=
+\renewcommand*{\=}{\relax\ifmmode\expandafter\bar\else\expandafter\STATEXequal\fi}
+\let\STATEXhat=\^
+\renewcommand*{\^}{\relax\ifmmode\expandafter\widehat\else\expandafter\STATEXhat\fi}
+\let\STATEXtilde=\~
+\renewcommand*{\~}{\relax\ifmmode\expandafter\widetilde\else\expandafter\STATEXtilde\fi}
+\let\STATEXsinglequote=\'
+\renewcommand*{\'}[1]{\relax\ifmmode\expandafter{\lp{#1}\rp}\else\expandafter\STATEXsinglequote{#1}\fi}
+\let\STATEXb=\b
+\renewcommand*{\b}{\relax\ifmmode\expandafter\bar\else\expandafter\STATEXb\fi}
+\let\STATEXc=\c
+\renewcommand*{\c}[1]{\relax\ifmmode\expandafter\mathrm{#1}\else\expandafter\STATEXc{#1}\fi}
+\let\STATEXd=\d
+\renewcommand*{\d}[1]{\relax\ifmmode\expandafter\,\mathrm{d}#1\else\expandafter\STATEXd{#1}\fi}
+\let\STATEXdot=\.
+\renewcommand*{\.}{\relax\ifmmode\expandafter\dots\else\expandafter\STATEXdot\fi}
+
+%commands to create documentation for TI-83 calculators
+\newcommand*{\Alpha}[1][]{{\fcolorbox{black}{ForestGreen}{\color{white}\textsf{ALPHA}}}\textbf{\color{ForestGreen}\textsf{#1}}}
+\newcommand*{\Alock}{\Snd[A-LOCK]}
+\newcommand*{\Blackbox}{\relax\ifmmode\expandafter\blacksquare\else\expandafter$\blacksquare$\fi}
+\newcommand*{\Distr}{\Snd[DISTR]}
+\newcommand*{\Down}{\framebox{\footnotesize$^\Downarrow$}}
+\newcommand*{\EE}{\Snd[EE]}
+\newcommand*{\Enter}{\framebox{\textsf{ENTER}}}
+\newcommand*{\Graph}{\framebox{\textsf{GRAPH}}}
+\newcommand*{\List}[1]{\textbf{\color{Dandelion}\textsf{$\text{L}_#1$}}}
+\newcommand*{\Left}{\framebox{$^\Leftarrow$}}
+\newcommand*{\Math}{\framebox{\textsf{MATH}}}
+\newcommand*{\Matrx}{\Snd[MATRX]}
+\newcommand*{\Prgm}{\framebox{\textsf{PRGM}}}
+\newcommand*{\Quit}{\Snd[QUIT]}
+\newcommand*{\Rect}{\rule{4pt}{6pt}}
+\newcommand*{\Right}{\framebox{$^\Rightarrow$}}
+\newcommand*{\Snd}[1][]{{\fcolorbox{black}{Dandelion}{\color{white}\textsf{2nd}}}\textbf{\color{Dandelion}\textsf{#1}}}
+\newcommand*{\Solve}{\Alpha[SOLVE]}
+\newcommand*{\Stat}{\framebox{\textsf{STAT}}}
+\newcommand*{\Statplot}{\Snd[STAT PLOT]}
+\newcommand*{\Sto}{\framebox{\textsf{STO}$\Rightarrow$}}
+\newcommand*{\Signm}{\framebox{\textsf{(-)}}}
+\newcommand*{\Up}{\framebox{\footnotesize$^\Uparrow$}}
+\newcommand*{\Window}{\framebox{\textsf{WINDOW}}}
+
+\let\STATEXBox=\Box
+\renewcommand*{\Box}{\relax\ifmmode\expandafter\STATEXBox\else\expandafter$\STATEXBox$\fi}
+
+\let\STATEXto=\to
+\renewcommand*{\to}{\relax\ifmmode\expandafter\STATEXto\else\expandafter$\STATEXto$\fi}
+
+\endinput
+
+\documentclass{report}
+\usepackage{statex}
+\usepackage{shortvrb}
+\MakeShortVerb{!}
+% Examples
+\begin{document}
+Many accents have been re-defined
+
+$$ c \c{c} \pi \cpi$$ %upright constants like the speed of light and 3.14159...
+
+$$\int \e{\im x} \d{x}$$  %\d{x}; also note new commands \e and \im
+
+$$\^{\beta_1}=b_1$$
+
+$$\=x=\frac{1}{n}\sum x_i$$  %also, \b{x}, but see \ol{x} below
+
+$$\b{x} = \frac{1}{n} \lp x_1 +\.+ x_n \rp$$
+
+Sometimes overline is better:  $$\b{x}\ vs.\ \ol{x}$$
+
+And, underlines are nice too: $$\ul{x}$$
+
+A few other nice-to-haves:
+
+$$\binom{n}{x}$$ %provided by amsmath package
+
+$$\e$$
+
+$\H_0: \mu_\ij=0$ vs. $\H_1: \mu_\ij \neq 0$ %\ijk too
+
+$$\logit \lb p \rb = \log \lb \frac{p}{1-p} \rb$$
+
+Common distributions along with other features follows:
+
+Normal Distribution
+
+$$Z ~ \N{0, 1}, \where \E{Z}=0 \and \V{Z}=1$$
+
+$$\P{|Z|>z_\ha}=\alpha$$
+
+$$\pN[z]{0}{1}$$
+
+or, in general
+
+$$\pN[z]{\mu}{\sd^2}$$
+
+Sometimes, we subscript the following operations:
+
+$$\E[z]{Z}=0, \V[z]{Z}=1, \and \P[z]{|Z|>z_\ha}=\alpha$$
+
+Multivariate Normal Distribution
+
+$$\bm{X} ~ \N[p]{\bm{\mu}, \sfsl{\Sigma}}$$ %\bm provided by the bm package 
+
+Chi-square Distribution
+
+$$Z_i \iid \N{0, 1}, \where i=1 ,\., n$$
+
+$$\chisq = \sum_i Z_i^2 ~ \Chi{n}$$
+
+$$\pChi[z]{n}$$
+
+t Distribution
+
+$$\frac{\b{Z}}{\sqrt{\frac{\chisq}{n}}} ~ \t{n}$$
+
+F Distribution
+
+$$X_i, Y_i \iid \N{0, 1}, \where i=1 ,\., n, \V{X_i, Y_{\~i}}=\sd_\xy=0,
+ \and \~i=1 ,\., n$$ %\XY too
+
+$$\chisq_x = \sum_i X_i^2 ~ \Chi{n}$$
+
+$$\chisq_y = \sum_i Y_i^2 ~ \Chi{n}$$
+
+$$\frac{\chisq_x}{\chisq_y} ~ \F{n, n}$$
+
+Beta Distribution
+
+$$B=\frac{F}{1+F} ~ \Bet{\frac{n}{2}, \frac{n}{2}}$$
+
+$$\pBet{\alpha}{\beta}$$
+
+Gamma Distribution
+
+$$G ~ \Gam{\alpha, \beta}$$
+
+$$\pGam{\alpha}{\beta}$$
+
+Cauchy Distribution
+
+$$C ~ \Cau{\theta, \nu}$$
+
+$$\pCau{\theta}{\nu}$$
+
+Uniform Distribution
+
+$$X ~ \U{0, 1}$$
+
+$$\pU{0}{1}$$
+
+or, in general
+
+$$\pU{a}{b}$$
+
+Exponential Distribution
+
+$$X ~ \Exp{\lambda}$$
+
+$$\pExp{\lambda}$$
+
+Hotelling's $T^2$ Distribution
+
+$$X ~ \Tsq{\nu_1, \nu_2}$$
+
+Inverse Chi-square Distribution
+
+$$X ~ \IC{\nu}$$
+
+Inverse Gamma Distribution
+
+$$X ~ \IG{\alpha, \beta}$$
+
+Pareto Distribution
+
+$$X ~ \Par{\alpha, \beta}$$
+
+$$\pPar{\alpha}{\beta}$$
+
+Wishart Distribution
+
+$$\sfsl{X} ~ \W{\nu, \sfsl{S}}$$
+
+Inverse Wishart Distribution
+
+$$\sfsl{X} ~ \IW{\nu, \sfsl{S^{-1}}}$$
+
+Binomial Distribution
+
+$$X ~ \Bin{n, p}$$
+
+$$\pBin{n}{p}$$
+
+Bernoulli Distribution
+
+$$X ~ \B{p}$$
+
+Beta-Binomial Distribution
+
+$$X ~ \BB{p}$$
+
+$$\pBB{n}{\alpha}{\beta}$$
+
+Negative-Binomial Distribution
+
+$$X ~ \NB{n, p}$$
+
+Hypergeometric Distribution
+
+$$X ~ \HG{n, M, N}$$
+
+Poisson Distribution
+
+$$X ~ \Poi{\mu}$$
+
+$$\pPoi{\mu}$$
+
+Dirichlet Distribution
+
+$$\bm{X} ~ \Dir{\alpha_1 \. \alpha_k}$$
+
+Multinomial Distribution
+
+$$\bm{X} ~ \M{n, \alpha_1 \. \alpha_k}$$
+
+\pagebreak
+
+To compute critical values for the Normal distribution, create the
+NCRIT program for your TI-83 (or equivalent) calculator.  At each step, the 
+calculator display is shown, followed by what you should do (\Rect\ is the 
+cursor):\\
+\Rect\\
+\Prgm\to!NEW!\to!1:Create New!\\
+!Name=!\Rect\\
+NCRIT\Enter\\
+!:!\Rect\\
+\Prgm\to!I/O!\to!2:Prompt!\\
+!:Prompt! \Rect\\
+\Alpha[A],\Alpha[T]\Enter\\
+!:!\Rect\\
+\Distr\to!DISTR!\to!3:invNorm(!\\
+!:invNorm(!\Rect\\
+1-(\Alpha[A]$\div$\Alpha[T]))\Sto\Alpha[C]\Enter\\
+!:!\Rect\\
+\Prgm\to!I/O!\to!3:Disp!\\
+!:Disp! \Rect\\
+\Alpha[C]\Enter\\
+!:!\Rect\\
+\Quit\\
+
+Suppose !A! is $\alpha$ and !T! is the number of tails.  To run the program:\\
+\Rect\\
+\Prgm\to!EXEC!\to!NCRIT!\\
+!prgmNCRIT!\Rect\\
+\Enter\\
+!A=?!\Rect\\
+0.05\Enter\\
+!T=?!\Rect\\
+2\Enter\\
+!1.959963986!
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/subfigmat.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/subfigmat.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7f873d0f5a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/subfigmat.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+% subfigmat.sty - version 1.0 <27 feb 1999>
+%
+% defines an array/matrix-type environment for subfigures and
+% subtables of the form,
+%
+%  \begin{subfigmatrix}{NC}
+%    \subfigure[]{..}
+%     ...
+%  \end{subfigmatrix}
+%
+% where NC is the number of subfigures per row (i.e., the
+% number of columns).  the subfigures are ordered from
+% left-to-right, then top-to-bottom.
+
+% the environment is used within a float environment such as
+% figure or table.  each subfigure should have a variable width
+% tied to the local \linewidth value so each can be shrunk or
+% expanded to accomate the requested layout.
+%
+% The environment does not require ``square'' matrices since it
+% only works on a row-by-row basis; thus you could have a 2 x 4,
+% a 1 x 3, or a 4 x 2 if you so choose.  if you neglect to give
+% it a full row, such as the case of a 3 x 3 matrix with only
+% 8 elements, it simply fills the rows from left to right until
+% it runs out of elements.
+%
+% for further information, see the example and other notes after
+% the \endinput in this file.
+%
+\ProvidesPackage{subfigmat}[1999/02/27 v1.0 Subfigure Matrix Package]
+\RequirePackage{subfigure}[1995/03/06]
+%
+% define and initialize the internal variables:
+\newlength{\sfm@width}%               Subfigure width
+\newlength{\sfmcolsep}%               Subfigure column separation
+\setlength{\sfmcolsep}{2\tabcolsep}%  Use twice tabular column separation
+\newcounter{sfm@count}%               Item count
+%
+% the environment:
+\newenvironment{subfigmatrix}[1]{%
+  \begingroup%
+  \centering%
+  \vspace*{-\subfigtopskip}% remove the vertical spacing inserted
+                           % by the subfigure package (version 2.0)
+    %
+    % Save the "real" subfigure macro and start the item counter off
+    % at -1 to detect the first item.
+    % Set the \sfm@width to the single element size.
+    %
+    \let\sfm@subfigure\subfigure%
+    \setcounter{sfm@count}{-1}%
+    \setlength{\sfm@width}{\linewidth}%
+    \addtolength{\sfm@width}{\sfmcolsep}%
+    \addtolength{\sfm@width}{-#1\sfmcolsep}%
+    \divide\sfm@width by#1
+    \@ifundefined{Gin@scalex}%
+    \relax % we are not running graphicx!
+    {\setkeys{Gin}{width=\sfm@width,keepaspectratio}}%
+    %
+    % Redefine the \subfigure and \subtable macros locally to this
+    % environment so that we can wrap them with minipages.
+    %
+    \def\subfigure{%
+      \ifnum \value{sfm@count} = -1
+      % very first item
+        \setcounter{sfm@count}{1}%
+      \else% Not very first item
+        \addtocounter{sfm@count}{1}%
+        \ifnum \value{sfm@count} = 1
+          % Beginning of next column, finish the last column.
+          \\%
+        \else%
+          % middle or last item
+          \hfill%
+          \ifnum #1 = \value{sfm@count}%
+            % Reset the counter of at the end of the row.
+            \setcounter{sfm@count}{0}%
+          \fi%
+        \fi%
+      \fi%
+      \sfm@subfigure}%
+    \let\subtable\subfigure%
+  }{%
+    \\%
+  \endgroup}%
+%
+\endinput
+
+further example:
+
+  if you wanted to create a figure with four subfigures in a tiled
+  or matrix format of 2 x 2, the following would suffice,
+
+    \begin{figure}
+      \begin{subfigmatrix}{2}
+        \subfigure[]{...}
+        \subfigure[]{...}
+        \subfigure[]{...}
+        \subfigure[]{...}
+      \end{subfigmatrix}
+      \caption{Example.}
+      \label{f:eg}
+    \end{figure}
+
+  the result would look similar to the following,
+
+        [subfig]     [subfig]
+           (a)          (b)
+
+        [subfig]     [subfig]
+           (c)          (d)
+
+         Figure 1: Example.
+
+notes:
+
+  comments, bugs, fixes can be sent to w.l.kleb@larc.nasa.gov.
+  what becomes of them is another story. ;)
+
+  each subfigure is placed within a minipage of the proper width
+  to fit NC subfigures within the current float's \linewidth,
+  accounting for 2\tabcolsep's worth of space between each
+  adjacent subfigure.
+
+  \linewidth is a fairly general length.  it is equal to
+  \textwidth for single-column formats, \columnwidth for multiple-
+  column documents (and also single-column documents), or
+  according to a \parbox or minipage environment.
+
+  if you are using the graphicx package, the subfigure widths are
+  automatically set to the local \linewidth.
+
+  the separation between figures can be changed via the
+  \sfmcolsep variable, e.g.,
+
+     \setlength{\sfmcolsep}{\hspace{0.2in}}
+
+  to set a ``hard'' inter-column spacing as opposed to the
+  default behavior of tying the inter-column spacing to the
+  documents tabular column spacing (\tabcolsep}.
+
+to do:
+
+  transposed ordering: from top-to-bottom, then left-to-right.
+
+history:
+
+  25 Feb 1999  Bil Kleb <w.l.kleb@larc.nasa.gov> [v1.0]
+     Edited for Arseneau-style release to ctan.
+     Changed \sfm@colsep to a more user-tunable \sfmcolsep.
+
+  27 Feb 1997  Bil Kleb <w.l.kleb@larc.nasa.gov>
+     Minor changes.
+
+  27 Feb 1997  Steven Douglas Cochran <sdc+@cs.cmu.edu>
+     Created.
+
+  24 Feb 1997  Bil Kleb <w.l.kleb@larc.nasa.gov>
+     Posted question to news:comp.text.tex.
+
+distribution:
+
+ this program can redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ version 1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/tabls.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/tabls.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ffd56251d9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/tabls.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,237 @@
+%
+%  T A B L S . S T Y           (ver 3.5)
+%
+%  Copyright (c) 1989-1996  by Donald Arseneau
+%  from
+%  LaTeX, Copyright (c) 1985... by Leslie Lamport
+%
+%  Modify LaTeX's array and tabular environments to keep text from touching
+%  other text or hlines above or below.  See instructions after \endinput.
+%
+%----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+%  create registers and default settings:
+
+\newdimen\tablinesep   \tablinesep= 1pt    \let\tablineskip=\tablinesep
+\newdimen\arraylinesep \arraylinesep= 1pt  \let\arraylineskip=\arraylinesep
+\newdimen\extrarulesep \extrarulesep= 3pt
+
+\newdimen\@arstdepth \newdimen\@arstheight \newdimen\@skip@bove
+
+\let\@tarlinesep\z@ % so outermost arrays will not act nested
+
+% Change the initializations to create a smaller strut and include
+% my macros in the initialization for the preamble.
+
+\def\@array[#1]#2{%  remember global variables to allow recursion:
+ \edef\@unrecurse{\global\@skip@bove\the\@skip@bove
+     \global\@arstheight\the\@arstheight\global\@arstdepth\the\@arstdepth}%
+%  Make the strut on the first line be shorter by the linesep outside
+ \let\@otarlinesep\@tarlinesep \global\@skip@bove-\@otarlinesep
+%  This setup works for both tabular and array because of this test:
+ \ifx\@classz\@arrayclassz \let\@tarlinesep\arraylinesep
+ \else \let\@tarlinesep\tablinesep \fi
+ \divide\@tarlinesep\tw@ % half sep is applied to height & depth
+ \let\@seesize\relax \let\@rememsize\relax \@mkpream{#2}%
+ \@tempdima\arraystretch\ht\strutbox \@tempdimb\arraystretch\dp\strutbox
+ \ifdim\@tarlinesep>\z@ % (need \protect for \multicolumn)
+   \def\@rememsize{\protect\@r@m@msize}\let\@seesize\@s@@size
+   \advance\@tempdima-\@tarlinesep \advance\@tempdimb-\@tarlinesep
+ \fi \setbox\@arstrutbox\hbox{% set up smaller strut
+    \vrule \@height\@tempdima \@depth\@tempdimb \@width\z@}%
+ \let\protect\noexpand
+ \edef\@preamble{\ialign \noexpand\@halignto \bgroup
+ \unhcopy\@arstrutbox \@preamble \tabskip\z@skip &\@sharp \cr}%
+% I have added an extra column (&\@sharp) to take the smart strut.
+ \let\@startpbox\@@startpbox \let\@endpbox\@@endpbox
+ \if#1t\vtop \else \if#1b\vbox \else \vcenter \fi\fi
+ \bgroup \let\par\@empty
+ \global\@arstheight\ht\@arstrutbox \global\@arstdepth\dp\@arstrutbox
+ \advance\extrarulesep.5\arrayrulewidth
+ \let\@sharp##\let\protect\relax \lineskip\z@skip \baselineskip\z@skip
+ \@preamble}
+
+%  Change the meaning of \\ to do the final strut calculation and
+%  put in the smart strut
+
+\def\@xtabularcr{\@ifnextchar[{\@argtabularcr}{\@argtabularcr[\z@]}}
+
+\def\@xarraycr{\aftergroup\@argarraycr\@xtabularcr}
+
+\def\@argarraycr{${}}% put this "aftergroup" so we can combine macro streams
+
+% Sense a following \end, and adjust spacing accordingly;
+% Sense a rule below, as signalled by "\noalign" after expansion
+
+\def\@argtabularcr[#1]{\ifnum\z@=`{\fi}&\omit % end group, new column
+ {\ifnum\z@=`}\fi
+ \global\advance\@arstheight\@skip@bove % use \@skip@bove so it is available
+ \global\@skip@bove#1\relax % actually, the skip below
+ \@ifnextchar\end{\global\advance\@arstdepth-\@otarlinesep\@mystrutcr}%
+    {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@xargarraycr}}
+
+\def\@xargarraycr{\@ifnextchar\noalign
+      {\global\advance\@arstdepth\extrarulesep \@mystrutcr}%
+      {\@mystrutcr}}
+
+\def\@mystrutcr{% \@skip@bove is really the parameter for skip below here
+  \ifdim\@skip@bove>\z@ \advance\@arstdepth\@skip@bove \global\@skip@bove\z@\fi 
+  \advance\@arstheight\@tarlinesep \advance\@arstdepth\@tarlinesep
+  \vrule \@height\@arstheight \@depth\@arstdepth \@width\z@
+  \global\@arstheight\ht\@arstrutbox \global\@arstdepth\dp\@arstrutbox
+  \ifnum\z@=`{\fi}\cr  
+  \ifdim\@skip@bove<\z@ \noalign{\vskip\@skip@bove \global\@skip@bove\z@}\fi}
+
+% Simulate \crcr at the end of the table, assuming that we are not in
+% vmode once a line of entries has started.  This fails to put in a smart
+% strut if the table ends without \\ while in vmode in a column entry.
+% Use \@unrecurse to simulate grouping of global parameters.
+% For nested tables and arrays, the final strut is reduced by the linesep
+% that will be added at the outer level.
+
+\def\endtabular{\endarray $\egroup}
+
+\expandafter\let\csname endtabular*\endcsname=\endtabular
+
+\def\endarray{\ifvmode\csname crcr\endcsname % just do \crcr if \\ given
+  \else \\[\z@ \global\advance\@arstdepth-\@otarlinesep]% 
+  \fi\egroup\@unrecurse\egroup}
+
+% Put \@seesize...\@rememsize in all preamble templates
+
+\def\@tabclassz{\ifcase \@lastchclass \@acolampacol \or \@ampacol \or
+   \or \or \@addamp \or
+   \@acolampacol \or \@firstampfalse \@acol \fi
+\edef\@preamble{\@preamble{%
+  \ifcase
+     \@chnum \hfil\@seesize\ignorespaces\@sharp\unskip\@rememsize \hfil
+     \or \@seesize\ignorespaces\@sharp\unskip\@rememsize \hfil
+     \or \hfil\hskip\z@skip\@seesize\ignorespaces\@sharp\unskip\@rememsize
+  \fi}}}
+
+\def\@arrayclassz{\ifcase \@lastchclass \@acolampacol \or \@ampacol \or
+   \or \or \@addamp \or
+   \@acolampacol \or \@firstampfalse \@acol \fi
+\edef\@preamble{\@preamble
+  \ifcase \@chnum
+     \hfil\@seesize $\relax\@sharp$\@rememsize \hfil
+      \or \@seesize $\relax\@sharp$\@rememsize \hfil
+      \or \hfil\@seesize $\relax\@sharp$\@rememsize \fi}}
+
+\def\@classv{\@addtopreamble{\@seesize\@startpbox{\@nextchar}%
+  \ignorespaces\@sharp\@endpbox\@rememsize}}
+
+% my macros to keep track of the size of entries.
+
+\def\@s@@size{\setbox\z@\hbox\bgroup\bgroup}
+
+\def\@r@m@msize{\egroup\egroup % end the \hbox
+    \ifdim\ht\z@>\@arstheight \global\@arstheight\ht\z@ \fi
+    \ifdim\dp\z@>\@arstdepth  \global\@arstdepth \dp\z@ \fi
+    \unhbox\z@}
+
+% Redefine \hline to remove notches and to give extrarulesep and
+% optional [] skip
+
+\def\hline{\noalign{\ifnum\z@=`}\fi\kern-.5\arrayrulewidth
+   \hrule \@height \arrayrulewidth \kern-.5\arrayrulewidth
+   \global\@skip@bove\extrarulesep
+   \@ifnextchar[\@yhline{\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@zhline}}
+
+\def\@xhline{\ifx\@tempa\noalign \vskip\doublerulesep \fi % may be the opt.
+  \ifnum`{=\z@\fi}}
+
+\def\@yhline[#1]{\doublerulesep#1\global\advance\@skip@bove#1\relax
+  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@zhline}
+
+\def\@zhline{\futurelet\@tempa\@xhline}%
+
+% make \cline give the \extrarulesep below
+
+\let\TB@cline\cline
+
+\def\cline#1{\noalign{\kern-.5\arrayrulewidth}%
+ \TB@cline{#1}%
+ \noalign{\global\@skip@bove\extrarulesep \kern.5\arrayrulewidth}}%
+
+\endinput
+% -----------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+%  Modify LaTeX's array and tabular environments to keep text from touching
+%  other text or hlines above or below.  There are three new parameters:
+%
+%  \tablinesep (or \tablelineskip): minimum space between text on successive
+%                  lines in a tabular environment.  Negative distances are
+%                  treated as zero.  The default value is 1pt.  0pt turns off
+%                  checking for touching text.  Text given in an @{ }
+%                  specification is never checked for overlap.
+%
+%  \arraylinesep (or \arraylineskip): like \tablinesep, but for arrays.
+%
+%  \extrarulesep : extra space to add above and below each \hline and \cline.
+%                  There will be at least \extrarulesep + 0.5\tablinesep
+%                  between an \hline and a line of text.  Negative values can
+%                  be used, but only until some text touches the line.
+%                  The default value is 3pt.
+%
+%  To ensure interline separations in tables but not arrays, declare
+%        \setlength\arraylinesep{0pt}
+%  The appearance of normal LaTeX tables can be had with
+%        \setlength\tablinesep{0pt}
+%        \setlength\arraylinesep{0pt}
+%        \setlength\extrarulesep{0pt}
+%  but it would be better to not use tabls in this situation.
+%
+%  \hline[dimen]:
+%
+%  \hline has been changed to take an optional length argument just like \\
+%  giving the space to insert below.  This space is in addition to the
+%  \extrarulesep and linesep.  A negative value will reduce the space until
+%  the hline touches some text below, and then will have no further effect.
+%  E.g., \hline[-9in] draws a horizontal line while suppressing the extrarulesep
+%  beneath.  Also, the new \hline FIXES THE NOTCHES that used to appear at the
+%  junction between horizontal and vertical lines.
+%
+%  How it works:
+%  There are no struts in the preamble entries (lie), rather, there are
+%  tests to measure the maximum height and depth of all entries on a line.
+%  The maximum values start at the size of LaTeX's \@arstrut minus the
+%  appropriate linesep.  At the \\, a strut is inserted (in its own
+%  column) which is that maximum size plus the linesep plus any additional
+%  space for separation from \hline s.
+%
+%  The Downside:
+%  Building a table will be slower than before because the entries have to
+%  be boxed twice (by \@seesize and by \halign itself) instead of just once.
+%  \setlength\tablinesep{0pt} will recover most of this speed, with
+%  \extrarulesep still partially in effect--extra space will still be added
+%  around hlines, but it may be taken up by very tall or very deep table
+%  entries; thus text may still touch the lines.  Because of the speed penalty,
+%  if your computer is slow, it is probably best to omit the TABLS option 
+%  until producing a final copy.
+%
+%  (2.2) \endtabular* is defined (it was left out before. oops!)
+%  change some \z@ to \z@skip. Thanks to Michael Downes.
+%  Create alias \tablinesep = \tablelineskip for consistency with
+%  \tabcolsep nomenclature. \def\\{\crcr} used in ver 2.1 didn't work right,
+%  so use \csname crcr\endcsname.
+%
+%  (3.0) Arrays are included! The very top and bottom struts of nested
+%  arrays are reduced by the lesser of the inner and outer lineseps so space
+%  doesn't accumulate with each level of nesting.
+%
+%  (3.1 & 3.2 & 3.3) Minor changes to match LaTeX updates.
+%
+%  (3.4) More extensive changes, prompted by LaTeX updates.  You can now hide
+%  \hline in another macro, and it is still recognized. [Similar commands that
+%  add \extrarulesep must begin with \noalign.]  \hline[3pt]\hline is now
+%  reasonable. (Also try \hline[0pt]\hline!)
+%
+%  (3.5) Fix several (non-crashing) bugs introduced in 3.4
+%
+%  Send problem reports to asnd@Reg.TRIUMF.CA
+%
+%  Test integrity of file:
+%  brackets: round, square, curly, angle:   () [] {} <>
+%  backslash, slash, vertical, at, dollar, and: \ / | @ $ &
+%  hat, grave, acute (apostrophe), quote, tilde:   ^ ` ' " ~
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/threeparttable.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/threeparttable.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bc9f5943d8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/threeparttable.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,381 @@
+% threeparttable.sty   (or 3parttable) (or 3parttab on DOS)
+% by Donald Arseneau   Updated on June 13, 2003.
+% Three part tables: title, tabular environment, notes
+%
+% This file may be distributed, modified, and used in other works with just
+% one restriction: modified versions must clearly indicate the modification
+% (a name change, or a displayed message, or ?).
+%
+% This package facilitates tables with titles (captions) and notes. The
+% title and notes are given a width equal to the body of the table (a
+% tabular environment).  By itself, a threeparttable does not float, but
+% you can put it in a {table} or a {table*} or some other environment.
+% (This causes extra typing, but gives more flexibility.)
+%
+% Inside a threeparttable there should be a caption, followed by a tabular
+% environment (tabular, tabular* or tabularx), possibly followed by a series
+% of itemized "tablenotes".  The caption can also go after the tabular. 
+% 
+% \begin{table}
+%  \begin{threeparttable}[b]
+%   \caption{...}
+%   \begin{tabular}...% or {tabular*}
+%    ...42\tnote{1}&....
+%    ...
+%   \end{tabular}
+%   \begin{tablenotes}
+%    \item [1] the first note
+%    ...
+%   \end{tablenotes}
+%  \end{threeparttable}
+% \end{table}
+%
+% The {threeparttable} environment takes an optional vertical-placement
+% parameter, [t], [b], or [c]; the default is [t].
+% 
+% At present, there is nothing automatic about the notes; you must specify the
+% identifier in the body of the table ("\tnote{a}") and in the notes below
+% ("\item[a]...").  I chose this method because automatic numbering with 
+% \footnote would be very hard to use, particularly because many tables make
+% repeated reference to a single note.  If someone has a convenient, elegant,
+% automatic system, I'll listen!  \tnote commands can be given in the caption
+% too, and they will *NOT* appear in the list of tables.
+%
+% There are several commands which should be redefined for customizing the
+% behavior of threeparttable, especially the table notes.  Some options
+% are provided for common variations of the table notes.
+%
+% Options:
+%   [para]        Notes come one-after-another without line breaks
+%   [flushleft]   No hanging indentation on notes
+%   [online]      \item tag is printed normal size, not superscript
+%   [normal]      restores default formatting
+%
+% These options can be given to the \usepackage command or to each individual
+% {tablenotes} environment.  The [normal] option is intended to reverse the
+% whole-document options for a particular table; e.g.
+%
+% \usepackage[para]{threeparttable}
+% ... much document ...
+% \begin{tablenotes}[normal,flushleft]
+%
+% These few options are unlikely to give you a desired specified format,
+% so you should expect to redefine one or more of the configuration
+% commands.  Note that mixing options with redefinitions is unlikely
+% to work smoothly.  Please submit your redefinitions to be used as
+% options in future versions!
+%
+% Configuration commands:
+%   \TPTminimum: command telling minimum caption width.  Default "4em";
+%        change with \def or \renewcommnd.
+%   \TPTrlap: A command with one argument, to make notes go out of
+%        the column, into the column separation (for right-aligning)
+%   \TPTtagStyle: Command with one argument to set appearance of the tag
+%        (number) in \tnote{tag}.  It defaults to nil.  It could be \textit.
+%   \tnote: Yes, you can redefine the \tnote command.
+%   \TPTnoteLabel: Command with one argument to format the item label in 
+%        the tablenotes list (\makelabel); default uses \tnote.
+%   \TPTnoteSettings: A command to issue all the list-environment setup
+%        commands for the tablenotes.
+%   \tablenotes or \TPTdoTablenotes: Yes, you can redefine the whole
+%        tablenotes environment. (\tablenotes processes optional 
+%        parameters, then invokes \TPTdoTablenotes; the [para] option
+%        replaces \TPTdoTablenotes.)
+%
+% For figures, there is an equivalent "measuredfigure" environment. It
+% is fairly fragile though, and should be used only for a single graphic
+% above a single caption.
+%
+% Note that the \caption formatting is *not* adjusted by threeparttable.
+% You should use one of the caption-control packages to get captions
+% that work well as table titles.  In truth, threeparttable sets
+% \abovecaptionskip to zero for captions above the table, but more
+% complete changes are called for.
+
+\ProvidesPackage{threeparttable}[2003/06/13 \space v 3.0]
+
+\edef\TPTminimum % make a scratch macro for restoring catcodes
+  {\catcode\string `\string @=\the\catcode\string`\@
+   \catcode\string `\string :=\the\catcode\string`\:
+   \catcode\string `\string *=\the\catcode\string`\*}
+\catcode`\@=11
+\catcode`\:=12
+\catcode`\*=11
+
+\@ifundefined{@tempboxb}{\@nameuse{newbox}\@tempboxb}{}
+
+\newenvironment{threeparttable}[1][t]{%
+ \relax \ifvmode \noindent \fi
+ \TPT@common{threeparttable}{#1}%
+ \@ifundefined{@captype}{\def\@captype{table}}{}%
+ \let\TPT@LA@label\label
+ \let\TPT@LA@caption\@caption \let\@caption\TPT@caption
+ \let\TPT@begintabhook\TPT@begintabbox
+ \let\TPT@tabarghook\TPT@tabargset
+ \TPT@hookin{tabular}%
+ \TPT@hookarg{tabular*}%
+ \TPT@hookarg{tabularx}%
+ \let\TPToverlap\relax}%
+{\TPT@close}
+
+
+\newenvironment{measuredfigure}[1][t]{%
+ \relax \ifvmode \noindent \fi
+ \TPT@common{measuredfigure}{#1}%
+ \let\TPT@figfix\TPT@close % Provide closure if no caption
+ \@ifundefined{@captype}{\def\@captype{figure}}{}%
+ \let\TPT@LA@caption\@caption \let\@caption\TPT@gr@caption
+ \setbox\@tempboxb\hbox\bgroup
+  \aftergroup\TPT@measurement
+  \color@begingroup\spacefactor994\ignorespaces}
+{\TPT@close \TPT@figfix}
+
+\def\TPT@close{\ifhmode \unskip \fi \color@endgroup \egroup}
+\def\TPT@figfix{}
+
+%  Caption for figures:
+\def\TPT@gr@caption#1[#2]#3{\relax
+ \ifnum\spacefactor=994\relax % Caption listed first; hold on to it
+  \abovecaptionskip\z@skip
+  \let\TPT@hsize\@empty % double sure
+ \else % Have something to measure, and caption below
+  \TPT@close % close hbox.  Measurement happens here automatically
+ \fi
+ \TPT@caption{#1}[{#2}]{#3}%
+}
+
+%  "begin" code common for tables and figures
+\def\TPT@common#1#2{%
+ \ifx\TPT@LA@caption\relax\else  
+  \PackageError{threeparttable}%
+    {Illegal nested #1 environments}%
+    {Maybe you have a missing \string\end{#1}?^^J%
+     This cannot work, so type \string"x\string" and fix the problem now.}%
+ \fi
+ \let\TPT@docapt\@undefined
+ \if b#2\relax\vbox\bgroup\else
+ \if c#2\relax$\vcenter\bgroup\aftergroup$\else
+        \vtop\bgroup \fi\fi
+ \parindent\z@
+ \color@begingroup
+ \def\TPT@sethsize{\TPT@hsize\par}%
+ \topsep\z@
+ \@enumdepth\z@
+ \global\let\TPT@hsize\@empty
+}
+
+% "hookin" hooks into tabular to set the alignment in a box
+% and measure the box.
+% For tabular* and tabularx, we can simply use the supplied "width"
+% argument (using \TPT@hookarg), but for ordinary tabular environments
+% we need to measure the typeset tabular body, using hooks in both the
+% begin and the end code (using \TPT@hookin).  The hook-in is defined
+% generically so it is easy to add new supported environments.
+%
+% I will add \TPT@begintabhook and \TPT@endtabhook to \tabular and 
+% \endtabular.  These will do the measurement at the outer level, 
+% but will be no-ops inside.
+
+\def\TPT@unhook{%
+ \let\TPT@begintabhook\bgroup
+ \let\TPT@tabarghook\@gobble
+}
+
+\let\TPT@endtabhook\egroup
+
+%  This is simple -- Hook into tabular types that are given explicit width 
+\def\TPT@hookarg#1{% #1 = width
+ \expandafter\let\csname TPTsav@#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname #1\endcsname
+ \expandafter\edef\csname #1\endcsname##1{\noexpand\TPT@tabarghook{##1}%
+     \expandafter\noexpand\csname TPTsav@#1\endcsname{\hsize}}%
+}
+
+\def\TPT@tabargset#1{%  Alias \TPT@tabarghook
+ \TPT@unhook
+ \setlength\hsize{#1}%
+ \xdef\TPT@hsize{\hsize\the\hsize \parindent 1em \noexpand\@parboxrestore}%
+ \TPT@hsize
+ \ifx\TPT@docapt\@undefined\else \TPT@docapt \vskip.2\baselineskip \fi
+ \par \aftergroup\TPT@sethsize
+}
+
+%  Harder -- Hook into tabular/endtabular to measure the width
+\def\TPT@hookin#1{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname TPTsav@#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname #1\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let\csname TPTsav@end#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname end#1\endcsname
+ \expandafter\edef\csname #1\endcsname{\noexpand\TPT@begintabhook
+     \expandafter\noexpand\csname TPTsav@#1\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname end#1\endcsname{%
+     \expandafter\noexpand\csname TPTsav@end#1\endcsname \TPT@endtabhook}%
+}
+
+\def\TPT@begintabbox{% alias \TPT@begintabhook
+ \begingroup
+ \TPT@unhook
+ \setbox\@tempboxb\hbox\bgroup \aftergroup\TPT@endtabbox
+ \let\TPToverlap\TPTrlap % Just \rlap now, but could be smarter
+}
+
+\def\TPT@endtabbox{% Inserted after ending \@tempboxb
+ \TPT@measurement
+ \endgroup 
+ \TPT@hsize  \aftergroup\TPT@sethsize 
+ \@ignoretrue
+}
+
+\def\TPT@measurement{%
+ \ifdim\wd\@tempboxb<\TPTminimum
+  \hsize \TPTminimum
+ \else
+  \hsize\wd\@tempboxb
+ \fi
+ \xdef\TPT@hsize{\hsize\the\hsize \noexpand\@parboxrestore}\TPT@hsize
+ \ifx\TPT@docapt\@undefined\else
+  \TPT@docapt \vskip.2\baselineskip
+ \fi \par \box\@tempboxb
+ \ifvmode \prevdepth\z@ \fi
+}
+
+\gdef\TPT@hsize{}
+\def\TPT@sethsize{}%  Used with \aftergroup, so do this to cover for when a
+                   %  \TPT@sethsize escapes from threeparttable.
+
+% Collecting caption for tables:
+\def\TPT@caption#1[#2]#3{\gdef\TPT@docapt
+ {\par\global\let\TPT@docapt\@undefined \TPT@LA@caption{#1}[{#2}]%
+   {\strut\ignorespaces#3\ifhmode\unskip\@finalstrut\strutbox\fi}}%
+ \ifx\TPT@hsize\@empty \let\label\TPT@gatherlabel \abovecaptionskip\z@skip
+ \else \TPT@docapt \fi \ignorespaces}
+
+\let\TPT@LA@caption\relax
+
+% Must also collect any \label that appears after a collected \caption
+\def\TPT@gatherlabel#1{%
+  \ifx\TPT@docapt\@undefined \TPT@LA@label{#1}\else
+      \g@addto@macro\TPT@docapt{\label{#1}}\fi
+}
+
+\def\tablenotes{\TPT@defaults 
+  \@ifnextchar[\TPT@setuptnotes\TPTdoTablenotes} % ]
+\let\endtablenotes\endlist
+\def\TPT@setuptnotes [#1]{% process formatting options
+  \@for\@tempa:=#1\do{\@nameuse{TPT@opt@\romannumeral-`a\@tempa}}%
+  \TPTdoTablenotes
+}
+
+\def\TPTdoTablenotes{%
+ \par \prevdepth\z@ \TPT@hsize 
+ \list{}{\topsep\z@skip \partopsep\z@skip 
+  \itemsep\z@ \parsep\z@ \itemindent\z@
+  \TPTnoteSettings
+  \let\makelabel\TPTnoteLabel
+}}
+
+
+
+% \TPToverlap is a hook, to be used in \tnote, for making the note tag
+% hang over the right-edge of the column.  It takes different meanings 
+% at different places, and it should disappear, like this, outside of
+% a threeparttable environment.
+%
+\def\TPToverlap#1{} % notes in caption will disappear in list of tables!
+
+% \TPTrlap is the meaning of \TPToverlap within the tabular environment.
+% I could do some fancy definition so that it only acts at the right-edge
+% of a column, but it is left simple for compatibility and sanity. 
+\let\TPTrlap\rlap
+
+\def\tnote#1{\protect\TPToverlap{\textsuperscript{\TPTtagStyle{#1}}}}% 
+
+\def\TPTtagStyle#1{#1}
+
+\def\TPTnoteSettings{%
+ \setlength\leftmargin{1.5em}%
+ \setlength\labelwidth{.5em}%
+ \setlength\labelsep{.2em}%
+ \rightskip\tabcolsep \leftskip\tabcolsep
+}
+\def\TPTnoteLabel#1{\tnote{#1}\hfil}
+
+% Package and tablenotes options
+
+\def\TPT@opt@normal{\gdef\TPT@defaults{}}
+\TPT@opt@normal
+\DeclareOption{normal}{}
+
+\def\TPT@opt@online{%
+ \def\TPTnoteSettings{\leftmargin1.5em \labelwidth1em \labelsep.5em\relax}%
+ \def\TPTnoteLabel##1{\TPTtagStyle{##1}\hfil}%
+}
+\DeclareOption{online}{\g@addto@macro\TPT@defaults{\TPT@opt@online}}
+
+\def\TPT@opt@flushleft{%
+ \def\TPTnoteSettings{\labelsep.2em \leftmargin\z@ \labelwidth\z@}%
+ \def\TPTnoteLabel##1{\hspace\labelsep\tnote{##1}\hfil}%
+ \rightskip\z@skip \leftskip\z@skip
+}
+\DeclareOption{flushleft}{\g@addto@macro\TPT@defaults{\TPT@opt@flushleft}}
+
+\def\TPT@opt@para{\let\TPTdoTablenotes\TPT@doparanotes}
+\def\TPT@doparanotes{\par
+   \prevdepth\z@ \TPT@hsize
+   \TPTnoteSettings
+   \parindent\z@ \pretolerance 8
+   \linepenalty 200
+   \renewcommand\item[1][]{\relax\ifhmode \begingroup
+       \unskip
+       \advance\hsize 10em % \hsize is scratch register, based on real hsize
+       \penalty -45 \hskip\z@\@plus\hsize \penalty-19
+       \hskip .15\hsize \penalty 9999 \hskip-.15\hsize
+       \hskip .01\hsize\@plus-\hsize\@minus.01\hsize 
+       \hskip 1em\@plus .3em
+      \endgroup\fi
+      \tnote{##1}\,\ignorespaces}%
+   \let\TPToverlap\relax
+   \def\endtablenotes{\par}%
+}
+\DeclareOption{para}{\g@addto@macro\TPT@defaults{\TPT@opt@para}}
+
+\ProcessOptions
+
+
+\TPTminimum % restore catcode of @, : and * to starting value
+
+\def\TPTminimum{4em}
+
+\endinput
+
+Example:
+
+Here is some paragraph before the table.  Note that this table does not
+float because it is not in a {table} or {table*} environment.
+
+\begin{center}
+\begin{threeparttable}
+\caption{The Skewing Angles ($\beta$) for $\fam0 Mu(H)+X_2$ and
+   $\fam0 Mu(H)+HX$~\tnote{a}}
+\begin{tabular}{rlcc}
+\hline
+&   & $\fam0 H(Mu)+F_2$ & $\fam0 H(Mu)+Cl_2$ \\
+\hline
+&$\beta$(H)  & $80.9^\circ\tnote{b}$ & $83.2^\circ$ \\
+&$\beta$(Mu) & $86.7^\circ$ & $87.7^\circ$ \\
+\hline
+\end{tabular}
+\begin{tablenotes}
+\item[a] for the abstraction reaction, $\fam0 Mu+HX \rightarrow MuH+X$.
+\item[b] 1 degree${} = \pi/180$ radians.
+\end{tablenotes}
+\end{threeparttable}
+
+\end{center}
+
+Notes:  
+
+May 15, 2001: changed hook-in to use \setbox in a wrapper macro (or
+explicit width of tabular*).  I don't remember why I used \everyhbox
+and \lastbox before.  Something may break now.  At least it works with
+tabularx.
+
+June 13, 2003: Re-wrote a lot, particularly the hook mechanism.  Use macros
+and package/environment options for formatting control.  Add measuredfigure.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/thrmappendix.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/thrmappendix.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..97044a6e2e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/thrmappendix.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
+						\long\def\comment#1{}
+						\comment{
+This is my implementation of theorems, lemmas, &c.  The main goal is
+to let you reprint theorems in the appendix with their proofs, so the
+text isn't cluttered with long proofs, but the reader doesn't have to
+keep flipping back to the text to find out what you're talking about in
+the appendix.
+
+It also has the side benefits that the syntax here involves less typing
+and fewer redundancies than the default, so I use it even for things
+that won't ever be proven. Compare the standard:
+
+	\begin{definition} \label{xdef} 
+	Let $x$ be a number.
+	\end{definition}
+
+versus the alternative here:
+
+	\stmt{defn}{xdef}{
+	Let $x$ be a number.
+	}
+
+
+	    __________________________________________
+
+Here is a quick summary of the macros defined in this file:
+\stmt{statement_type}{label}{This is what I want to say}
+	The definition of a theorem, assumption, &c.
+\stmtproof{label}{This is the proof.}
+	Where you should write your proof, for use with:
+\rptstmtwithproof{label}
+	This states the theorem and proof together.
+\rptstmt{label}
+	This restates just the theorem.
+\refstmt{label}
+	Prints, e.g., `Theorem 7'---like \ref{label} but you don't have
+	to remember if it's a theorem, corollary, or lemma.
+\comment{blather}
+	Delineates comments without all those darn percent signs.
+
+	    __________________________________________
+Here is a sample document using most all of the above. You can cut and
+paste it to another file and compile it to see what it does. 
+
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{thrmappendix}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section{A theorem}
+
+\stmt{thrm}{sample}{Socrates is mortal.}
+
+\refstmt{sample} can either be proven using data (the fact that
+Socrates is dead), or by the proof which is provided in the appendix.
+
+
+
+\section{Appendix}
+In this appendix, the reader will find proofs of theorems not given in the text.
+
+\stmtproof{sample}{Socrates is a man. All men are mortal.}
+
+\rptstmtwithproof{sample}
+
+\comment{Notice that you can put the \stmtproof{sample}{...} anywhere
+you want, including right after your statement, just before using
+\rptstmtwithproof, or a separate file (then use \input{proofs.tex}). That
+way, neither your finished paper nor your source will be cluttered with
+proofs.}
+\end{document}
+             __________________________________________
+
+
+
+Here are the definitions of the types of theorems you can use
+with these commands, and the proof markers:
+						}
+
+\long\def\theproofmarkersforthrmappendix{
+
+%Format:
+%\newtype{nickname}{numbered like}{title}
+
+%inputs
+\newtype{ass}{ass}{Assumption}
+\newtype{defnition}{ass}{Definition}
+\newtype{defn}{ass}{Definition}
+
+%outputs
+\newtype{statement}{statement}{Proposition}
+\newtype{prop}{statement}{Proposition}
+\newtype{thrm}{statement}{Theorem}
+\newtype{corr}{statement}{Corollary}
+\newtype{lma}{statement}{Lemma}
+\newtype{guess}{statement}{Conjecture}
+
+
+\def\pf{{\bf Proof: }}
+\def\endpf{\hfill $\diamondsuit$}
+}
+
+						\comment{
+These are my preferred environments (and numbering scheme);
+add your own or modify to suit. The format here is:
+\newtype{nickname}{numbered like}{title}
+						
+E.g., the second line lets me put
+	\stmt{thrm}{mortalityresult}{Socrates is mortal.}
+in the tex file, since it defined the nickname `thrm'. If the statement
+counter is up to #7, then the output will be:
+	Theorem 7: Socrates is mortal.
+since thrms use the statement counter and print `Theorem'. To refer to
+this theorem in the text, you have two choices:
+	\refstmt{mortalityresult}	===>	 Theorem 7
+	 Theorem \ref{mortalityresult}	===>	 Theorem 7
+The first form is nice because after you prove your result, you can
+change it from a theorem to a conjecture without hunting through the
+text to fix every reference.
+
+You can see that all of the results use the `statement' counter and
+all of the inputs use the `ass' counter.  Proposition 1 may be followed
+by Theorem 2, followed by Corollary 3.  This is my preferred numbering
+scheme, suggested by Paolo Ghirardato.  After all, the intent of numbering
+these things is not to keep score as to how many theorems you've got,
+but to make it easy for the reader to find what you're referring to;
+a consistent numbering system facilitates this (especially in a long proof
+appendix).
+
+[On the other hand, a referee of one of my papers complained that
+17 theorems and 18 corollaries was too many, and I could cut that in
+half. Of course, there were only 18 results total, and s/he was only
+glancing at the two results on the last page.]
+
+To use independent numbering for each type, simply change the second field
+in the definitions above to match the first field in each case. E.g.:
+	\newthrm{thrm}{thrm}{Theorem}
+will allow you to count theorems separately from other results.
+
+
+The \rptstmtwithproof macro here will include a marker at the beginning
+and end of the proof, so you don't have to include them yourself.
+The macros \pf and \endpf are defined above and can be redefined to
+suit. Popular endproof markers include:
+
+	\def\endpf{$blackbox$}
+	\def\endpf{$blacklozenge$}
+	\def\endpf{{\sc QED}}
+
+
+					--Ben Klemens, 2 Jan 2003
+					b@avocado.caltech.edu
+
+
+
+PS: thrmappendix.sty (c)2003, Ben Klemens
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+(at your option) any later version.
+            __________________________________________}
+
+\usepackage{ifthen}
+\def\newtype#1#2#3{
+\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{#2}}{
+\long\expandafter\gdef\csname #1txt\endcsname{#3}
+\long\expandafter\gdef\csname #1ctr\endcsname{#2}
+\newtheorem{#1}{\csname #1txt\endcsname}
+}{
+\long\expandafter\gdef\csname #1txt\endcsname{#3}
+\long\expandafter\gdef\csname #1ctr\endcsname{#2}
+\newtheorem{#1}[\csname #1ctr\endcsname]{\csname #1txt\endcsname}
+}}
+
+\theproofmarkersforthrmappendix %from the user-readable section above.
+
+\def\cs#1{\csname #1\endcsname}
+\newcounter{dummycounter}
+
+\long\def\defstmt#1#2#3{
+}
+
+\long\def\stmt#1#2#3{
+	\long\expandafter\gdef\csname #2\endcsname{#3}
+	\expandafter\gdef\csname #2type\endcsname{#1}
+		\begin{#1} \label{#2} 
+			{#3}
+		\end{#1}
+\immediate\write\@mainaux{\string
+\newlabel{#2type}{{\cs{#1txt}}}
+ }
+}
+
+\long\def\stmtproof#1#2{
+\long\expandafter\gdef\csname #1proof\endcsname{#2}
+}
+
+\long\def\rptstmt#1{
+	\def\ctr{\cs{\cs{#1type}ctr}}
+%	\setcounter{paragraph}{\value{\ctr}}
+	\setcounter{dummycounter}{\value{\ctr}}
+\batchmode
+	\setcounter{\ctr}{\ref{#1}}
+\errorstopmode
+	\addtocounter{\ctr}{-1}
+ 	\begin{\cs{#1type}}
+		\cs{#1}
+ 	\end{\cs{#1type}}
+	\setcounter{\ctr}{\value{dummycounter}}
+}
+
+\long\def\rptstmtwithproof#1{
+	\rptstmt{#1}
+
+	\pf \cs{#1proof} \endpf
+}
+
+\def\refstmt#1{\ref{#1type} \ref{#1}}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/titleref.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/titleref.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..33b09411d21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/titleref.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+%  TITLEREF.STY  ver 3.1  2001-04-05   Donald Arseneau   <asnd@triumf.ca>
+%  This is free unsupported software, released to the public domain.
+%
+%  This package provides a "\titleref" command to cross-reference the titles 
+%  of sections.  The "\label" command is changed to remember the title for 
+%  such a reference.  Use "\titleref" just like "\ref" and "\pageref".  
+%
+%  Titles for numbered sectioning units and for floats with captions are
+%  the same as the respective TOC, LOF, or LOT entry (even when no TOC is
+%  printed).  When a short title is provided ("\section[short]{long}")
+%  it will be used for the "\titleref".  This is especially useful for
+%  figure captions.  Unnumbered sections take their title reference from
+%  the printed title.  Beware!  This turns the title into a moving argument
+%  when it normally is not, and will cause weird errors if there are
+%  `fragile' commands present.
+%
+%  Enumerated lists do not have titles and simply inherit the title of
+%  their section.
+%
+%  The format of the title reference is controlled by the command
+%  "\theTitleReference", which can be redefined with "\renewcommand".
+%  It takes two parameters: the number and the title. The number is
+%  just the regular "\ref" and it is WRONG in unnumbered sections.
+%  Beware!  The default definition is the unadorned title.  You could
+%  do, for example, "\renewcommand{\theTitleReference}[2]{#1\ \emph{#2}}".
+%
+%  The title of the current section is also available without "\label":
+%  Use the command "\currenttitle" to generate a "\titleref" to the current
+%  section.  If you have redefined "\theTitleReference" to print the number
+%  with the title, be aware that the two may not correspond:  In a numbered
+%  list the number will show the current item but the title will show the
+%  current section, but in an unnumbered section the number will show
+%  some previous section number.
+%
+%  Options:  [usetoc]  and  [nostar]
+%
+%  In the default operation, the titles are recorded by a command inserted
+%  into the various sectioning commands ("\@sect", "\@ssect", "\@chapter",
+%  "\@schapter", "\@part", "\@spart", and "\@caption").  If this creates
+%  conflicts with some other package, you can use an entirely different
+%  method by specifying "\usepackage[usetoc]{titleref}".  As the name
+%  implies, this option records the titles from the table-of-contents
+%  entry without redefining the sectioning commands.  (This is the method
+%  used in older versions.)
+%
+%  Since there are no TOC entries for the `star' versions of sectioning 
+%  commands, they are still redefined.  The additional option "[nostar]"
+%  ("\usepackage[usetoc,nostar]{titlerrf}") prevents the redefinitions,
+%  but then "\section*" will not generate a title reference.  If you try
+%  to refer to the title of an unnumbered section while "[nostar]" is in
+%  effect, you will get the title of the previous section.
+%
+%  Under the "[usetoc]" option, the current title will always be overridden
+%  by an "\addcontentsline" command before the "\label", even for starred
+%  section commands under the "[nostar]" option.
+%
+%  The big problem with the "[usetoc]" method is that "\titleref" will
+%  not refer to a "\label" which was given in the title or caption itself;
+%  the label must be placed after the sectioning command or the caption.
+%  If you make a title-reference to a label given in a title, you will get
+%  a warning message.
+%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{titleref}[2001/04/05 v3.1 \space 
+    Cross-references with titles.]
+
+\newcommand{\theTitleReference}[2]{#2}
+%
+\let\TR@old@label\label
+%
+% This redefinition of \label is intended to work with other redirections
+% of \label, if they record extra information in a similar way.
+\def\label#1{\@bsphack\begingroup
+  \protected@edef\@currentlabel{\protect\TR@TitleReference
+      {\@currentlabel}{\TR@currentTitle}}%
+  \TR@old@label{#1}%
+  \endgroup \@esphack}%
+%
+\def\TR@gettitle#1{\begingroup \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+    \let\label\TR@nestwarn \let\index\@gobble \let\glossary\@gobble
+    \let\markboth\@gobbletwo \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo \let\markright\@gobble
+    \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\def\noexpand\TR@currentTitle{#1}}%
+  \expandafter\endgroup\@tempa}
+%
+\let\TR@nestwarn\@gobble
+%
+\let\TR@TitleReference\@firstoftwo
+%
+% Allow aux file to be used after titleref is removed:
+\AtBeginDocument{\immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\let
+  \string\TR@TitleReference\string\@firstoftwo}}
+%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\titleref}[1]{\begingroup \let\numberline\@gobble
+  \let\TR@TitleReference\TR@theTR % interrupt recursion of \ref
+  \ref{#1}\endgroup}
+%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\currenttitle}{\begingroup \let\numberline\@gobble
+  \theTitleReference\@currentlabel\TR@currentTitle\endgroup}
+%
+%
+\def\TR@theTR{0}
+\DeclareOption{usetoc}{\edef\TR@theTR{1\TR@theTR}}%
+\DeclareOption{nostar}{\edef\TR@theTR{\TR@theTR 1}}%
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+%
+%  Put hooks in "star" commands if not [usetoc,nostar]
+\ifnum\TR@theTR<100
+%
+\AtBeginDocument{\let\TR@old@ssect\@ssect
+  \def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\TR@gettitle{#5}\TR@old@ssect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}}%
+ \@ifundefined{@schapter}{}{\let\TR@old@schapter\@schapter
+  \def\@schapter#1{\TR@gettitle{#1}\TR@old@schapter{#1}}}
+ \@ifundefined{@spart}{}{\let\TR@old@spart\@spart
+  \def\@spart#1{\TR@gettitle{#1}\TR@old@spart{#1}}}
+}
+%
+\fi
+%
+%  Put hooks in other commands if not [usetoc]
+\ifnum\TR@theTR<9
+%
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \let\TR@old@sect\@sect \def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]{\TR@gettitle{#7}%
+  \TR@old@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}[{#7}]}%
+ \@ifundefined{@chapter}{}{\AtBeginDocument{\let\TR@old@chapter\@chapter
+  \def\@chapter[#1]{\TR@gettitle{#1}\TR@old@chapter[{#1}]}}}
+ \@ifundefined{@part}{}{\AtBeginDocument{\let\TR@old@part\@part
+  \def\@part[#1]{\TR@gettitle{#1}\TR@old@part[{#1}]}}}%
+ \let\TR@old@caption\@caption \long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{\TR@gettitle{#2}%
+  \TR@old@caption{#1}[{#2}]{#3}}
+}
+%
+\else % [usetoc], hook into \addcontentsline and prohibit labels in titles
+%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\TR@nestwarn[1]{\PackageWarning{titleref}%
+  {Label \string"#1\string" was put in a title,\MessageBreak
+   so the \noexpand\titleref is incorrect}}
+%
+\let\TR@old@addcontentsline\addcontentsline
+%
+\def\addcontentsline#1#2#3{%
+  \TR@old@addcontentsline{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \TR@gettitle{\relax#3}}
+%
+\fi
+%
+\let\TR@currentTitle\@empty
+%
+% proper definition:
+\def\TR@theTR{\let\TR@TitleReference\@firstoftwo \theTitleReference}
+%
+\endinput % the end
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/topcapt.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/topcapt.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c5b7d8ddcb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/topcapt.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+\@ifundefined{ProvidesPackage}{\def\ProvidesPackage#1[#2]{}}{}
+\ProvidesPackage{topcapt}[2004/12/11 v1.2 Caption at top of float]
+
+%  Copyright 1994, 1998, 1999, 2004 Robin Fairbairns
+%
+%   This program can redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+%   of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+%   archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+%   version 1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%
+% This is a jiffy LaTeX package that enables coherent setting
+% of the caption _above_ a figure or table
+%
+% Author: Robin Fairbairns 1994/11/18
+% Bugfix from Bernd Schandl incorporated 1998/12/31
+% First stab at hyperref interworking 2004/12/11
+% Copyright statement incorporated 1999/03/03
+%
+% Works under 2e or 2.09
+%
+% Usage:  \usepackage{...,topcapt,...}                    (2e)
+%         \documentstyle[...,topcapt,...]{whateverclass}  (2.09)
+%
+% defines a \topcaption command that sets a caption as if above the
+% table (i.e., with the abovecaptionskip and the belowcaptionskip
+% exchanged)
+
+\@ifundefined{abovecaptionskip}{% in 2.09
+  \newlength\abovecaptionskip
+  \newlength\belowcaptionskip
+  \setlength\abovecaptionskip{10pt}
+  \setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt}
+  \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+    \vskip\abovecaptionskip
+    \sbox\@tempboxa{#1: #2}%
+    \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize
+      #1: #2\par
+    \else
+      \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+    \fi
+    \vskip\belowcaptionskip}
+  }{% in 2e; everything's already set up as above
+}
+
+% \topcaption simply advances the caption count, sorts out the
+% arguments and passes on to \@topcaption
+\newcommand\topcaption{%
+  \@ifundefined{H@refstepcounter}%
+    {\refstepcounter}{\H@refstepcounter}\@captype
+  \@dblarg{\@topcaption\@captype}%
+} 
+
+% \@topcaption swaps above and below caption skips and the relays its
+% arguments to \@caption
+\def\@topcaption#1[#2]#3{\@tempskipa\abovecaptionskip
+  \abovecaptionskip\belowcaptionskip
+  \belowcaptionskip\@tempskipa
+  \@caption{#1}[{#2}]{#3}%
+  \@tempskipa\abovecaptionskip
+  \abovecaptionskip\belowcaptionskip
+  \belowcaptionskip\@tempskipa}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/truncate.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/truncate.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a4f0ed840cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/truncate.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+% truncate.sty  ver 3.6   20-Aug-2001    Donald Arseneau
+% This LaTeX program is released to the public domain.
+%
+% Truncate text to a specified width:  \truncate [marker]{width}{text}
+%
+% If the text is too wide to fit in the specified width, then it is
+% truncated, and a continuation marker is shown at the end. The default
+% marker, used when the optional "[marker]" parameter is omitted, is
+% "\,\dots".  You can change this default by redefining "\TruncateMarker"
+% ("\renewcommand{\TruncateMarker}{}").
+%
+% Normally, the text (whether truncated or not) is printed flush-left
+% in a box with exactly the width specified. The package option "[fit]"
+% ("\usepackage[fit]{truncate}") causes the output text to have its
+% natural width, up to a maximum of the specified width.
+%
+% The text will not normally be truncated in the middle of a word,
+% nor at a space specified by the tie "~".  For example:
+%
+%     "\truncate{122pt}{This text has been~truncated}"   
+% gives
+%     "This text has...      "
+%
+% You can give one of the package options "[hyphenate]", "[breakwords]",
+% or "[breakall]" to allow breaking in the middle of words. The first 
+% two only truncate at hyphenation points; with the difference being that 
+% "breakwords" suppresses the hyphen character.  On the other hand, 
+% "breakall" allows truncation at any character.  For example: 
+%
+%     "\truncate{122pt}{This text has been~truncated}" 
+% gives
+%     "This text has been trun-..."   (hyphenate)
+%     "This text has been trun... "   (breakwords)
+%     "This text has been trunc..."   (breakall)
+%
+% (All of these options work through TeX's hyphenation mechanism.)
+%
+\ProvidesPackage{truncate}[2001/08/20 \space ver 3.6]
+%
+% [breakwords] allows hyphenation but with invisible hyphen characters
+\DeclareOption{breakwords}{%
+   \let\@Trunc@DoSelect\relax
+   \expandafter\chardef\csname \string\@TruncHyph T1\endcsname 23
+   \expandafter\chardef\csname \string\@TruncHyph OT1\endcsname 223
+   \expandafter\chardef\csname \string\@TruncHyph LY1\endcsname 0
+   \def\@Trunc@Post{\hyphenpenalty\tw@ \exhyphenpenalty\tw@
+     \doublehyphendemerits\z@ \finalhyphendemerits\z@
+     \the\@Trunc@RestHyph % set invisible hyphenchars for all fonts used
+  }}
+%
+% [breakall] is like breakwords, but all characters are treated like
+% the letter "c"; the default language 0 patterns allow hyphenation
+% c-c-c-c-c-c-c-c-c.  This means we don't need special patterns!
+\DeclareOption{breakall}{\ExecuteOptions{breakwords}%
+    \expandafter\def\expandafter\@Trunc@Post\expandafter{\@Trunc@Post
+      \@tempcnta\z@ \chardef\c`\c % in knuth patterns, c allows hyphens
+      \loop \lccode\@tempcnta\c \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+      \ifnum\@tempcnta<\@cclvi \repeat}%
+    \def\@Trunc@Pre{% force US english
+      \lefthyphenmin\@ne \righthyphenmin\@ne
+      \doublehyphendemerits\language
+      \language\z@ % default English language
+      \let\language\doublehyphendemerits
+      \uchyph\@ne
+    }}
+%
+% [hyphenate] ordinary hyphenation for breakpoints
+\DeclareOption{hyphenate}{% takes precedence over breakwords
+   \def\@Trunc@Post{\hyphenpenalty\sixt@@n}\let\@Trunc@Pre\relax}
+%
+% [fit] use true size of truncated text, not requested size.
+\DeclareOption{fit}{\def\@Trunc@Rebox{%
+   \setbox\z@\hbox{\unhbox\z@\unskip\unskip\@tempa}%
+   \ifdim\wd\z@>\hsize \hbox to\hsize{\unhbox\z@}\else \box\z@ \fi}}
+%
+% Defaults:
+\let\@Trunc@Pre\@empty
+\def\@Trunc@Post{\hyphenpenalty\@M}
+\def\@Trunc@Rebox{\hbox to\hsize{\unhbox\z@\unskip\unskip\@tempa\hfil}}
+\let\@Trunc@DoSelect\@empty
+
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+
+\providecommand{\TruncateMarker}{\,\dots}
+
+\newcommand{\truncate}[3][\TruncateMarker]{% #1=marker #2=width #3=text
+  \parbox[b]{#2}{\tolerance9999 \emergencystretch .216\hsize
+   \vbadness\maxdimen \vfuzz\vsize % no overfull warnings
+   \hbadness\maxdimen \hfuzz\vsize
+   %  set up hyphenchar switching for all fonts used.
+   \edef\@tempb{\the\@Trunc@RestHyph}% save whole stack
+   \global\@Trunc@RestHyph{}%
+   \ifx\@Trunc@DoSelect\relax
+     \let\@Trunc@DoSelect\selectfont
+     \def\selectfont{\@Trunc@DoSelect\@Trunc@SaveHChar}%
+   \fi
+   \@Trunc@SaveHChar % do it for current font
+   \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+    % First set text in a hbox to see if it fits.
+    \setbox\z@\@@line{\ignorespaces #3\unskip\hfil}%
+    \ifnum\badness>\@M  % text does not fit
+      \settowidth\rightskip{#1}%
+      \advance\rightskip \z@\@plus\p@
+      \parfillskip-\@ne\rightskip \@plus\@ne fil 
+      \parshape \tw@ \z@\hsize \z@\maxdimen \linepenalty60
+      \tracinglostchars\z@
+      %% \let\par\relax -- don't do this because \vskip causes infinite loop
+      \@Trunc@Pre % must set language before paragraph
+      \noindent \vadjust{\penalty-\@MM}% for splitting off first line
+      \nobreak\hskip\z@skip % allow first word hyphenation
+      \ignorespaces #3% the text
+      \pretolerance\hyphenpenalty \@Trunc@Post % set up `hyphenation'
+      \@@par
+      \ifnum\prevgraf>\@ne
+       \egroup \def\@tempa{#1}% use truncation marker
+      \else
+       \egroup \let\@tempa\@empty% no linebreak, so all text fits; no marker
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \box\z@ \egroup \let\@tempa\@empty
+    \fi
+   \setbox\@tempboxa\vsplit\z@ to\z@ \unvbox\@tempboxa
+   \unskip\unpenalty\unpenalty
+   \setbox\z@\lastbox
+   \nointerlineskip
+   \hfuzz\p@
+   \@Trunc@Rebox
+   \let\@Trunc@HC\@firstofone \the\@Trunc@RestHyph % restore hyphenchars
+   \global\@Trunc@RestHyph\expandafter{\@tempb}% restore the stack itself
+ }}
+% (Note that the text may be proessed twice.  I could avoid that
+% if there are problems with global counters etc.)
+
+% we save (implicit global) hyphenchar settings for each font on a 
+% manual stack -- the token register \@Trunc@RestHyph -- before changing
+% them.  We execute \@Trunc@RestHyph to set them to the invisible 
+% characters and then again to restore them.  (I can't imagine this
+% will ever be required.)
+\newtoks\@Trunc@RestHyph
+\global\@Trunc@RestHyph{}
+%
+\def\@Trunc@SaveHChar{\begingroup
+  \edef\@tempa{%
+    \hyphenchar\the\font=\noexpand\@Trunc@HC{\the\hyphenchar\font}\relax 
+    \the\@Trunc@RestHyph}%
+  \global\@Trunc@RestHyph\expandafter{\@tempa}%
+%  \hyphenchar\font\z@
+  \endgroup}
+%
+% select an invisible character for hyphenation.  Use \textcompwordmark, if
+% any; use selected numbers for certain encodings (OT1 uses a *missing*
+% character); use a space otherwise.
+\def\@Trunc@HC#1{%
+  \@ifundefined{\f@encoding\string\textcompwordmark}{%
+    \@ifundefined{\string\@TruncHyph\f@encoding}%
+      {32}% If no appropriate character, guess space character may be blank
+      {\csname \string\@TruncHyph\f@encoding\endcsname}%
+  }{\csname\f@encoding\string\textcompwordmark\endcsname}}%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/ulem.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/ulem.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..eba281a4f45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/ulem.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,475 @@
+%
+%  U L E M . S T Y       [2000-05-26]
+%
+%  A style file to provide various types of underlining that can stretch
+%  between words and be broken across lines.  Use with LaTeX or plain TeX.
+%  In LaTeX this style replaces italics with underlining in \em-phasized text.
+%  It is most suitable for simple text such as {\em ibid.} or {\em \LaTeX:
+%  A Document Preparation System\/} that may need to be underlined in a
+%  manuscript submitted for publication.  This is ONLY to be used when emphasis
+%  is delimited by braces.  A declaration \normalem (or the \usepackage
+%  option "normalem") restores the normal \em behavior.
+%
+%  Full instructions appear after \endinput.  In summary:
+%    \uline{important}   underlined text
+%    \uuline{urgent}     double-underlined text
+%    \uwave{boat}        wavy underline
+%    \sout{wrong}        line drawn through word
+%    \xout{removed}      marked over with //////.
+%    {\em phasized\/}  | In LaTeX, by default, these are underlined; use
+%    \emph{asized}     | \normalem or [normalem] to restore italics
+%    \useunder{\uwave}{\bfseries}{\textbf}
+%                        use wavy underline in place of bold face
+%
+%  Copyright (c) 1989-2000 by Donald Arseneau
+%
+%  These definitions may be freely transmitted, reproduced, or modified
+%  provided that this notice is left intact.
+
+%  Defend against multiple loading.
+\expandafter \ifx \csname UL@box\endcsname \relax \else 
+ \typeout{ulem.sty refuses to load twice. }\endinput \fi
+
+%  Set catcode of @ in case it isn't a "letter" already
+\chardef\ULthickness\catcode\string`\@ % hold catcode temporarily
+\catcode\string`\@=11
+
+\def\uline{\relax \ifmmode\expandafter\underline 
+           \else \bgroup\expandafter\ULset\fi}
+
+\newbox\UL@box
+\newbox\UL@hyphenbox
+\newskip\UL@skip
+\newtoks\UL@hook
+
+\newcount\UL@pe
+\let\LA@space\ \let\LA@hskip\hskip
+
+\def\UL@end *{\relax\relax}% something harmless unlikely to be found elsewhere
+
+%   For regular underlines, set the depth based on the font, or retain
+%   preset value.
+\def\ULset{\ifdim\ULdepth=\maxdimen
+   \setbox\UL@box\hbox{(j}\ULdepth\dp\UL@box\advance\ULdepth.4\p@\fi
+  \def\UL@leadtype{\leaders \hrule \@height\dimen@ \@depth\ULdepth}%
+  \ifmmode \ULdepth-4\p@ \fi
+  \dimen@-\ULdepth \advance\dimen@\ULthickness \ULon}
+
+%   \ULon simply calls \UL@on (possibly \UL@on=\UL@onin) for text mode, but
+%   \UL@onmath if it is math mode.
+\def\ULon{\ifmmode \expandafter\UL@onmath\else \expandafter\UL@on\fi}
+
+%   \UL@on sets the engine of underline running, and tells it
+%   where to stop.
+\def\UL@on#1{\leavevmode\UL@ender \let\UL@on\UL@onin 
+  \everymath{\UL@hrest}\everyvbox{\UL@hrest}\let\hskip\UL@hskip
+  \let\\\UL@cr \let\-\UL@dischyp \let\newline\UL@newline \let\ \UL@space
+  \def\hfil{\hskip\z@ plus1fil\relax}\def\hfill{\hskip\z@ plus1fill\relax}%
+  \def\hss{\hskip\z@ plus1filminus1fil\relax}\let\penalty\UL@penalty
+  \the\UL@hook
+  \UL@word\@empty#1\xdef\UL@spfactor{\the\spacefactor} \UL@end * }
+
+%   This is what \ULon does when it appears nested in an inner place.
+\def\UL@onin#1{\leavevmode\UL@ender % when nested, do multiple underlining
+  \dimen@\ULthickness \advance\ULdepth\thr@@\dimen@ \advance\dimen@-\ULdepth
+  \setbox\UL@box\hbox{{#1}}\let\UL@start\relax\UL@putbox\egroup}
+% \UL@putbox is disabled in inner mode, so re-enable it by changing \UL@start
+% \UL@hrest is implicit due to \everyhbox
+
+%   This is what \ULon does in math mode.
+\def\UL@onmath#1{\UL@ender\mathord{\UL@hrest\mathop{\kern\z@#1}\limits\sb
+  {\UL@leadtype\LA@hskip\p@ plus1fill}}\egroup}
+
+\def\UL@unegroup{}
+\gdef\UL@ender{}
+% end-brace matching hack for when command is used as a font declaration:
+\def\UL@swender{\ifnum`{=\z@\fi\aftergroup}\gdef\UL@ender{}}
+
+% must expand to nothing outside the ifs for syntactical spaces to work.
+% the \expandafters get rid of the \@empty inserted at the beg. of word
+\def\UL@word#1 {\expandafter\UL@start#1 %
+  \expandafter\ifx\expandafter\UL@end#1\egroup\egroup
+   \unskip \unskip \unskip % remove extra leader at end
+   \spacefactor\UL@spfactor \let\UL@word\egroup
+  \else % not finished
+   \ifmmode\else \ifdim\lastskip=\z@\else % allow syntactical spaces
+     \global\UL@skip\lastskip \unskip
+     \UL@stop \UL@leaders
+   \fi\fi
+  \fi \UL@word\@empty}% \@empty preserves braces in param
+
+\def\UL@start{\setbox\UL@box\hbox\bgroup\everyhbox{\UL@hrest}%
+% the following are to cope with stops (\ ,\- etc) within extra braces
+  \let\UL@start\@empty \def\UL@unegroup{\bgroup\bgroup}\let\UL@leadtype\@empty
+  \bgroup \kern-3sp\kern3sp % kerns so I can test for beginning of list
+  \if@ignore \global\@ignorefalse \ignorespaces \fi}
+
+\def\UL@stop{\global\UL@pe\lastpenalty \unpenalty % penalty in \UL@pe
+  \ifnum\lastkern=\thr@@ \egroup\egroup % Nothing in hbox...but make sure:
+    \ifdim\wd\UL@box=\z@ \else \UL@putbox \fi % something in box so print it
+  \else  \egroup\egroup \UL@putbox % something in box so print it
+  \fi \ifnum\UL@pe=\z@ \else \LA@penalty\UL@pe \fi % use penalty from inside box
+  \UL@unegroup}
+% notice that a box with only a penalty in it is discarded, but the penalty
+% is still used!  This is so a series of discardable glues and penalties
+% behaves properly.
+
+\def\UL@putbox{\ifx\UL@start\@empty \else % not inner
+  \vrule\@width\z@ \LA@penalty\@M
+  {\UL@skip\wd\UL@box \UL@leaders \kern-\UL@skip}%
+  \box\UL@box  \fi}
+
+%  With interword leaders, give some overlap to avoid gaps caused by
+%  round-off errors in the printing program.  Needs \unskip \unskip \unskip
+%  above.  This version overlaps 1/300 inch, which looks good at high
+%  resolution, and will still work down to ~150 dpi.  Change the value
+%  of \UL@pixel if necessary.
+
+\newdimen\UL@pixel \UL@pixel=1in \divide\UL@pixel 300
+
+\def\UL@leaders{{\LA@hskip-\UL@pixel \advance\UL@skip\tw@\UL@pixel
+   \UL@leadtype\LA@hskip\UL@skip  \LA@hskip-\UL@pixel}}
+
+% restore some things for inside math or \mbox
+\def\UL@hrest{\let\ \LA@space \let\-\@empty \let\penalty\LA@penalty}
+
+\def\UL@space{\LA@space \global\UL@skip\lastskip \unskip \UL@reskip}% \
+
+% Hyphenation is done by explicit \discretionary.  The overlapping melds
+% with the running overlap because it *is* part of the running overlap:
+% The word fragment is extended by the width of the hyphenation which is
+% then overlapped by leaders.  The discretionary may occupy this space
+% if a break occurs; otherwise the next syllable gets doubly-overlapped
+% (in registration) for a distance of the hyphen's width.
+\def\UL@dischyp{\global\setbox\UL@hyphenbox\hbox
+   {\ifnum \hyphenchar\font<\z@ \string-\else \char\hyphenchar\font \fi}%
+   \kern\wd\UL@hyphenbox \LA@penalty\@M \UL@stop \kern-\wd\UL@hyphenbox
+   \discretionary{\box\UL@hyphenbox}{}{}\UL@start}
+
+\let\LA@penalty\penalty
+\def\UL@penalty{\relax\ifhmode \afterassignment\UL@@penalty\count@
+  \else\LA@penalty\fi}
+\def\UL@@penalty{\LA@penalty \ifnum\count@=\z@
+  \@ne \else \count@ \fi % zero penalty => no penalty, so use 1 instead.
+  \UL@stop \UL@start}
+
+% The test  \ifx\ \LA@space \else  means we are neither in math mode nor an
+% \mbox, so it is safe to stop the current \UL@box.  \ , \- , and \penalty
+% (= \linebreak or \nolinebreak) are common enough that they are restored
+% directly (by \UL@hrest); \\, \newline, \hskip (= \hspace) are rare enough
+% that the test is incorporated in their UL versions. This adds processing
+% when they're used, but saves processing in \UL@hrest called by \everymath
+% \everyvbox and \everyhbox.
+
+\def\UL@hskip{\ifx\ \LA@space \LA@hskip \else
+  \afterassignment\UL@reskip \global\UL@skip \fi}
+
+\def\UL@reskip{\UL@stop \UL@leaders \UL@start}
+
+% Redefine \\ and \newline so the vertical space from \\[ ] is not lost
+% and so the \hfil is not underlined!  \\ and \newline do nothing if inside
+% inner braces.
+
+\def\UL@cr{\unskip \ifx\ \LA@space \let\UL@vad\@gobble
+  \else \UL@stop \unskip\unskip\unskip \let\UL@vad\vadjust \fi
+  \@ifstar{\UL@vad{\LA@penalty\@M}\UL@cra}\UL@cra}
+\def\UL@cra{\@ifnextchar[\UL@crb\UL@newline}
+\def\UL@crb[#1]{\UL@vad{\vskip#1}\UL@newline}
+
+\def\UL@newline{\ifx\UL@start\@empty % (\UL@cr may have \UL@stop-ed already)
+  \unskip \ifx\ \LA@space \else \UL@stop \unskip\unskip\unskip \fi\fi 
+  \LA@hskip \z@\@plus.0001fil\LA@penalty -\@M \UL@start}
+
+% That concludes the basic underlining.  To put various other objects
+% (characters) under (or over) text we need to define \markoverwith
+% to set the overlay material in a box, and use leaders of that box for
+% overlaying the text.  Here, the meaning of \UL@pixel is changed so
+% that  `pixel' size = box size.
+%
+\newbox\ULC@box
+
+\def\markoverwith#1{\setbox\ULC@box\hbox{{#1}}\UL@pixel.5\wd\ULC@box
+   \ifmmode \setbox\ULC@box\hbox{\raise1.4ex\box\ULC@box}%
+    \dp\ULC@box-1.4ex\ht\ULC@box\z@ \def\UL@leadtype{\cleaders\copy\ULC@box}%
+   \else
+    \def\UL@leadtype{\leaders\copy\ULC@box}%
+   \fi}
+
+% Now define various special underlines.  All the definitions go like
+% \def \command {\bgroup \markoverwith{something} \ULon}
+
+% For drawing a wavey underline instead of a straight one the command
+% is \uwave (under-wave) which uses the wiggle from 6-pt lasy font:
+
+\def\uwave{\bgroup \markoverwith{\lower3.5\p@\hbox{\sixly
+  \kern-.21\p@ \char58 \kern-.21\p@}}\ULon}
+\font\sixly=lasy6 % does not re-load if already loaded, so no memory problem.
+
+% To draw a double underline under text, use \uuline{text}
+
+\def\uuline{\bgroup \markoverwith{\hbox
+ {\kern-.03em\vtop{\kern.2ex\hrule width.2em\kern1.1\p@
+ \hrule}\kern-.03em}}\ULon}
+
+% To draw a line through text instead of under it (strike out) do
+% `under'-line with negative depth.  Note that this one uses a real
+% line, not characters, so there is no \markoverwith.
+
+\def\sout{\bgroup \ULdepth=-.5ex \ULset}
+
+% To mark //// over text instead of underlining (x-out)
+%
+\def\xout{\bgroup \markoverwith{\kern-.1em{/}\kern-.1em}\ULon}
+
+% \useunder {underline_command}{font_declaration}{font_command}
+% e.g.: \useunder{\uuline}{\bfseries}{\textbf}
+%       \useunder{\uwave}{\bf}{}
+\def\useunder#1#2#3{\relax
+  \ifx\relax#2\relax\else % declaration command given
+    \def#2{\def\@tempa{#1}\global\let\UL@ender\UL@swender
+    \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\ifnum\z@=\string`}\fi}%
+    \MakeRobust{#2}\fi
+  \ifx\relax#3\relax\else % argumentative command
+    \def#3{#1}\MakeRobust{#3}\fi}
+
+\expandafter\ifx \csname @ifundefined\endcsname \relax
+
+% Allow plain TeX to use this style:
+  \def\@height{height}
+  \def\@depth{depth}
+  \def\@width{width}
+  \def\@empty{}
+  \def\@gobble#1{}
+  \def\MakeRobust#1{}
+% Do non-outer \newif with no visible \if's or \fi's when skipping
+  \csname newif\expandafter\endcsname \csname if@ignore\endcsname
+
+\else
+
+ \def\MakeRobust#1{\expandafter\let
+   \csname \expandafter\@gobble\string#1 \endcsname= #1%
+  \edef#1{\noexpand\protect \expandafter\noexpand
+   \csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1 \endcsname}
+  }
+  \MakeRobust\uline
+  \MakeRobust\uuline
+  \MakeRobust\uwave
+  \MakeRobust\sout
+  \MakeRobust\xout
+
+  \let\LA@em\em   \let\LA@emph\emph
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\LA@Pem \csname em \endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\LA@Pemph \csname emph \endcsname
+  \def\ULforem{\useunder{\uline}{\em}{\emph}}
+  \def\normalem{\let\em\LA@em \let\emph\LA@emph
+    \expandafter\let\csname em \endcsname\LA@Pem
+    \expandafter\let\csname emph \endcsname\LA@Pemph}
+  \ULforem  %  default is to use underlining for \em,
+
+\fi
+
+% Process LaTeX \package options; plain TeX skips this section
+
+\expandafter\ifx\csname ProvidesPackage\endcsname \relax \else
+  \ProvidesPackage{ulem}[2000/05/26]
+  \DeclareOption{normalem}{\normalem}
+  \DeclareOption{ULforem}{\ULforem}
+  \DeclareOption{normalbf}{}
+  \DeclareOption{UWforbf}{\useunder{\uwave}{\bf}{\textbf}}
+  \ProcessOptions
+  \let\UL@marginpar\marginpar
+  \newcommand\UL@marpar[2][\gDefault@pt]{\gdef\gDefault@pt{#2}%
+   \ifx\ \LA@space \@latexerr{Marginpar lost}%
+   \else \UL@stop \UL@marginpar[#1]{#2}\UL@start \fi}
+  \addto@hook\UL@hook{\let\marginpar\UL@marpar}
+\fi
+
+\catcode`@=\ULthickness % Scratch meaning: restore catcode of @ 
+
+\def\ULthickness{.4pt}% can change this with \renewcommand
+\newdimen\ULdepth  \ULdepth=\maxdimen
+%  "maxdimen" depth causes the depth to be set according to the font.  You
+%  can change \ULdepth for a permanent setting or a special effect (\sout).
+
+\endinput
+
+ULEM is a package for LaTeX or plain TeX which provides various types of
+underlining that can stretch between words and be broken across lines.
+In LaTeX this style replaces italics with underlining in emphasized text
+given by \em or \emph -- but only if the text is delimited by braces.  A
+declaration \normalem (or the \usepackage option [normalem]) restores the
+normal \em behavior.  For underlining in plain TeX, \input ulem.sty, and
+use the \uline command.
+
+Unlike regular underlining, ulem allows line breaks, and even primitive
+hyphenation, within the underlined text; but it is far from perfect. It is
+most suitable for simple text like  {\em \LaTeX: A document preparation
+system\/}  that may need to be underlined in a manuscript submitted for
+publication.  Again, ulem will only replace \em and \emph when the text is
+delimited by explicit braces.
+
+The thickness of the underline rule is given by \ULthickness; use
+\renewcommand or \def (not \setlength) to change it.  The depth of the
+underline is controlled by the length \ULdepth.  The default value is a
+special flag which lets the current font control the depth.  You can set
+a particular value to \ULdepth (using \setlength) to force a particular
+depth, either locally for a special purpose, or for the document as a
+whole.  See the definition of \sout.
+
+Every word is typeset in an underlined box, so automatic hyphenation is
+normally disabled, but explicit discretionary hyphens (\-) will still be
+obeyed.  Several text-formatting commands are specially supported within
+the underlining:  \-, \ , ~, \\, \newline, \linebreak, \nolinebreak,
+\penalty, \hskip, \hspace, \hfil, \hfill, \hss.  Displayed math and \par
+are deliberately not supported to aid in the detection of runaway arguments
+(missing braces).  The special commands do have a problem: they end a
+group so any local assignments are lost.  
+
+The underlines continue between words, and stretch just like ordinary
+spaces do.  Since spaces delimit words, there may be some difficulty
+with syntactical spaces (e.g. "2.3 pt"). Some effort is made to handle
+such cases, but sometimes (such as \let\x= y) the space is interpreted
+incorrectly. You can usually solve the problem by enclosing the offending
+command in braces or in a macro (\newcommand\xeqy{\let\x= y}), but...
+
+One important incompatibility with braces and macro replacement:
+ALL THE TEXT IN BRACES OR COMING FROM A MACRO IS TYPESET IN A BOX.
+That is, braces will suppress stretching and linebreaks in the text they
+enclose.  Moreover, the specially-taken-care-of commands \-, \\, \newline
+and \linebreak are usually ignored if they appear inside extra braces.
+They operate only when the braces delimit a command parameter without
+introducing a level of grouping.  (Even though braces delimiting command
+parameters do not normally imply grouping, many commands will add their
+own grouping.)  Thus, you should try to limit inner braces to short bits of
+text or for delimiting parameters to commands. For emergency repairs, see
+the "Marat/Sade" example below.  Syntactical spaces inside braces never
+cause a problem, nor do spaces in math mode.
+
+Text produced by expansion of a command (macro) is boxed too, but \\, \
+and \- still work properly in the expansion text:
+        \newcommand\iff{if and only if} {\em \iff}
+does not allow any stretching or linebreaking between words, but
+        \newcommand\iff{if\ and\ only\ if} {\em \iff}
+allows stretching and linebreaking.  There is a problem though:  the
+\  between words closes a group and any local assignments will be lost,
+in particular, font changes and color changes.
+
+This loss of local assignments will break some other standard commands,
+(e.g., \cite) which produce multiple `words' using local assignments.
+The way to protect such commands is to bury them in an \mbox:
+        {\em every\-one agrees~\mbox{\cite{you,me}}.}
+
+Nested \em commands produce multiple underlining, but heed the warnings
+about braces above.  To get italics without underlining, use \it.  Nesting
+of other types of underline is also possible, but the `underlines' may
+overlap.
+
+HERE IS A SIMPLE EXAMPLE.
+
+\noindent 'Twas {\em brillig\/} and the {\em slithy~toves\/}
+did {\em gyre\/} and {\em gim\-ble\/} in the {\em wabe,\\[2pt] }
+All {\em mim\-sey\/} were the {\em boro\-goves\/} and
+the {\em mome raths outgrabe}.
+
+HERE IS A DIFFICULT EXAMPLE.
+
+\usepackage{ulem}
+\setlength\textwidth{3.3in}
+\begin{document}
+% \large
+No, I did {\em not} act in the movie {\em \emph{The} %    <<<<<<< Nested
+\emph{Persecu}\-\emph{tion} \emph{and} \emph{Assassination} \emph{of}
+\emph{Jean-Paul} \emph{Marat}, as per\-formed by the Inmates
+of the Asylum of Charenton under the Direc\-tion of the
+Marquis de~Sade!} But I {\em did} see it.
+\end{document}
+
+In the nested emphasis, \emph had to be given for each word separately
+so the spaces between could stretch and break into lines.  Even the
+discretionary hyphen (\-) in `Persecution' had to be outside the braces,
+but the hyphen in `Direction' was just fine because it was not in nested
+braces. The same applies to other special commands like \  and ~. Also,
+the spaces are printed with only a single underline because they are
+outside the nested \emph commands.  This example really illustrates that
+ulem does not handle nested emphasis very well!  Nevertheless, it is fine
+for simple things.
+
+Underlining can also be done according to \uline{this text}. To use this
+type of underlining, but have \em still produce italics, put the command
+\normalem in the preamble of the document or load ulem with
+\usepackage[normalem]{ulem}.
+
+Some variations on underlining are provided, including a wavey underline
+(\uwave{under-wave}), double underlines (\uuline{two lines under this}),
+a line through text rather than under it (\sout{strike out}), and text
+crossed-out with /////// (\xout{cross out, X out}).  You can define your
+own styles following the examples provided.  The definition should be
+something like:
+
+\newcommand\command{\bgroup \markoverwith{something}\ULon}
+
+The "something" can be as simple as a single character, or as complex as
+you can keep track of.
+
+The various underlining commands are essentially textual, and will not
+work quite the same in math mode.  But since some font commands, like \bf,
+serve both for text and math, math mode is handled (in an approximate way).
+The performance in math mode is somewhat different from in text: there will
+be no line breaks or stretching in the underlined text, and the vertical
+positioning may not be right.  The results should be best for \uline,
+\uwave, \uuline, and any other truly UNDER-line you define.
+
+Any type of underlining can be substituted for any font-selection command
+by issuing a proper \useunder declaration:
+
+\useunder{\underlinecommand}{\fontdeclaration}{\fontcommand}
+
+e.g., \useunder{\uuline}{\bfseries}{\textbf} gives a double underline
+instead of bold face in LaTeX.  The commands \normalem and \ULforem switch
+underlining for \em off and on, respectively, and so do the \usepackage
+options [normalem] and [ULforem]. There is also the \usepackage style
+option [UWforbf] to replace boldface with a wavey underline.
+
+UWforbf does handle \bf in math mode, but it doesn't work in section titles,
+unfortunately, because the titles are not delimited by explicit braces when
+printed by the \section command.  For the present version, the \bfseries
+command still produces bold face, but \bf makes an under-wave. To get under-
+waved section titles you can do
+
+\renewcommand\@seccntformat[1]{\uwave{\csname the#1\endcsname}\hskip 1em}
+
+and later specify \section[...]{\uwave{...}}.
+
+In plain TeX there is no \textbf so you should use \useunder{\UWave}{\bf}{}.
+You can even skip a step and define the underline or overprint with \useunder:
+\useunder{\bgroup\markoverwith{!}\ULon}{\sf}{}
+
+Some commands, such as \\ and \hskip are given special treatment, but 
+others (like \marginpar) are not.  Support for others can be added by 
+assigning special meanings in the token register \UL@hook.  (In LaTeX do 
+\addto@hook\UL@hook{\let\command\ULversion}.)  The UL versions of commands 
+should be modelled on \UL@hskip or \UL@cr, and should include the test 
+"\ifx\ \LA@space".  For example, support for "\marginpar" is added through
+the hook mechanism.
+
+All the underlining commands are robust in LaTeX.
+
+%  Previous bug-finders: Esther Hu (\hfill in plain); Lones Smith (\tt\-);
+%  Steve Anderson (\ooalign accents); Thanassi Protopapas ( { in tables).
+%  The bug finders' fee is now $0.00; it will double for each new bug found.
+%  Version 1994:
+%  Many changes! Notably: LaTeX2e options and \emph. Nesting works (somewhat).
+%  Behavior with inner braces is more consistent (not stripped).  \useunder.
+%  Better underwave (using lasy6). Special underlines are not commented out.
+%  patch 1995:  fix \UL@swender to work in {tabular}; make hyphenation join
+%  well; crude math support; eliminate \@clb
+%  patch 1996: use "\csname ProvidesPackage\endcsname", tidying.
+%  1997: fix \\ when LaTeX changed; remove extra overlap in putbox.
+%  2000: hook (and marginpar)
+%
+%  Send problem reports to asnd@reg.triumf.ca
+%
+% test integrity:
+% brackets:  round, square, curly, angle:   () [] {} <>
+% backslash, slash, vertical, at, dollar, and: \ / | @ $ &
+% hat, grave, acute (apostrophe), quote, tilde, under:   ^ ` ' " ~ _
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/underscore.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/underscore.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a274b39e521
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/underscore.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,232 @@
+% underscore.sty     12-Oct-2001   Donald Arseneau   asnd@triumf.ca
+% Make the "_" character print as "\textunderscore" in text.
+% Copyright 1998,2001 Donald Arseneau;  Distribute freely if unchanged.
+% Instructions follow after the definitions.
+
+\ProvidesPackage{underscore}[2001/10/12]
+
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\_=\active
+ \gdef_{% \relax % No relax gives a small vulnerability in alignments
+   \ifx\if@safe@actives\iftrue % must be outermost test!
+      \string_%
+   \else
+      \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
+         \ifmmode \sb \else \BreakableUnderscore \fi
+      \else
+         \ifx\protect\@unexpandable@protect \noexpand_%
+         \else \protect_%
+      \fi\fi
+    \fi}
+\endgroup
+
+% At begin: set catcode; fix \long \ttdefault so I can use it in comparisons; 
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  {\immediate\write\@auxout{\catcode\number\string`\_ \string\active}}%
+  \catcode\string`\_\string=\active
+  \edef\ttdefault{\ttdefault}%
+}
+
+\newcommand{\BreakableUnderscore}{\leavevmode\nobreak\hskip\z@skip
+ \ifx\f@family\ttdefault \string_\else \textunderscore\fi
+ \usc@dischyph\nobreak\hskip\z@skip}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\_}{%
+  \ifmmode \nfss@text{\textunderscore}\else \BreakableUnderscore \fi}
+
+\let\usc@dischyph\@dischyph
+\DeclareOption{nohyphen}{\def\usc@dischyph{\discretionary{}{}{}}}
+\DeclareOption{strings}{\catcode`\_=\active}
+
+\ProcessOptions
+\ifnum\catcode`\_=\active\else \endinput \fi
+
+%%%%%%%%   Redefine commands that use character strings   %%%%%%%%
+
+\@ifundefined{UnderscoreCommands}{\let\UnderscoreCommands\@empty}{}
+\expandafter\def\expandafter\UnderscoreCommands\expandafter{%
+  \UnderscoreCommands
+  \do\include \do\includeonly
+  \do\@input \do\@iinput \do\InputIfFileExists
+  \do\ref \do\pageref \do\newlabel
+  \do\bibitem \do\@bibitem \do\cite \do\nocite \do\bibcite
+}
+
+% Macro to redefine a macro to pre-process its string argument
+% with \protect -> \string.
+\def\do#1{% Avoid double processing if user includes command twice!
+ \@ifundefined{US\string_\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}{%
+   \edef\@tempb{\meaning#1}% Check if macro is just a protection shell...
+   \def\@tempc{\protect}%
+   \edef\@tempc{\meaning\@tempc\string#1\space\space}%
+   \ifx\@tempb\@tempc % just a shell: hook into the protected inner command
+     \expandafter\do
+       \csname \expandafter\@gobble\string#1 \expandafter\endcsname
+   \else % Check if macro takes an optional argument
+     \def\@tempc{\@ifnextchar[}%
+     \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\@tempa####1\meaning\@tempc}%
+     \@tempa##2##3\@tempa{##2\relax}%
+     \edef\@tempb{\meaning#1\meaning\@tempc}%
+     \edef\@tempc{\noexpand\@tempd \csname
+        US\string_\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname}%
+     \if \expandafter\@tempa\@tempb \relax 12\@tempa % then no optional arg
+       \@tempc #1\US@prot
+     \else  % There is optional arg
+       \@tempc #1\US@protopt
+     \fi
+   \fi
+ }{}}
+
+\def\@tempd#1#2#3{\let#1#2\def#2{#3#1}}
+
+\def\US@prot#1#2{\let\@@protect\protect \let\protect\string
+  \edef\US@temp##1{##1{#2}}\restore@protect\US@temp#1}
+\def\US@protopt#1{\@ifnextchar[{\US@protarg#1}{\US@prot#1}}
+\def\US@protarg #1[#2]{\US@prot{{#1[#2]}}}
+
+\UnderscoreCommands
+\let\do\relax \let\@tempd\relax  % un-do
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\endinput
+
+underscore.sty    12-Oct-2001  Donald Arseneau
+
+Features:
+~~~~~~~~~
+\_ prints an underscore so that the hyphenation of constituent words
+is not affected and hyphenation is permitted after the underscore.
+For example, "compound\_fracture" hyphenates as com- pound_- frac- ture.
+If you prefer the underscore to break without a hyphen (but still with 
+the same rules for explicit hyphen-breaks) then use the [nohyphen]
+package option.
+
+A simple _  acts just like \_ in text mode, but makes a subscript in 
+math mode: activation_energy $E_a$
+
+Both forms use an underscore character if the font encoding contains
+one (e.g., "\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}" or typewriter fonts in any encoding),
+but they use a rule if the there is no proper character.
+
+Deficiencies:
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+The skips and penalties ruin any kerning with the underscore character
+(when a character is used).  However, there doesn't seem to be much, if
+any, such kerning in the ec fonts, and there is never any kerning with
+a rule.
+
+You must avoid "_" in file names and in cite or ref tags, or you must use 
+the babel package, with its active-character controls, or you must give 
+the [strings] option, which attempts to redefine several commands (and 
+may not work perfectly).  Even without the [strings] option or babel, you 
+can use occasional underscores like: "\include{file\string_name}".
+
+Option: [strings]
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+The default operation is quite simple and needs no customization; but
+you must avoid using "_" in any place where LaTeX uses an argument as
+a string of characters for some control function or as a name.  These
+include the tags for \cite and \ref, file names for \input, \include,
+and \includegraphics, environment names, counter names, and placement
+parameters (like "[t]").  The problem with these contexts is that they
+are `moving arguments' but LaTeX does not `switch on' the \protect
+mechanism for them.
+
+If you need to use the underscore character in these places, the package
+option [strings] is provided to redefine commands taking a string argument
+so that the argument is protected (with \protect -> \string).  The list
+of commands is given in "\UnderscoreCommands", with "\do" before each,
+covering \cite, \ref, \input, and their variants.  Not included are many
+commands regarding font names, everything with counter names, environment
+names, page styles, and versions of \ref and \cite defined by external
+packages (e.g. \vref and \citeyear).
+
+You can add to the list of supported commands by defining \UnderscoreCommands
+before loading this package; e.g.
+
+   \usepackage{chicago}
+   \newcommand{\UnderscoreCommands}{%   (\cite already done)
+     \do\citeNP \do\citeA \do\citeANP \do\citeN \do\shortcite
+     \do\shortciteNP \do\shortciteA \do\shortciteANP \do\shortciteN
+     \do\citeyear \do\citeyearNP
+   }
+   \usepackage[strings]{underscore}
+
+Not all commands can be supported this way!  Only commands that take a
+string argument *first* can be protected.  One optional argument before
+the string argument is also permitted, as exemplified by \cite: both
+\cite{tags} and \cite[text]{tags} are allowed.  A command like
+\@addtoreset which takes two counter names as arguments could not
+be protected by adding it to \UnderscoreCommands.
+
+!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
+!! When you use the [strings] option, you must load this package !!
+!! last (or nearly last).                                        !!
+!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
+
+There are two reasons: 1) The redefinitions done for protection must come
+after other packages define their customized versions of those commands.
+2) The [strings] option requires the _ character to be activated immediately
+in order for the cite and ref tags to be read properly from the .aux file
+as plain strings, and this catcode setting might disrupt other packages.
+
+The babel package implements a protection mechanism for many commands,
+and will be a complete fix for most documents without the [strings] option.
+Many add-on packages are compatible with babel, so they will get the
+strings protection also.  However, there are several commands that are 
+not covered by babel, but can easily be supported by the [strings] and 
+\UnderscoreCommands mechanism.  Beware that using both [strings] and babel 
+may lead to conflicts, but does appear to work (load babel last).
+
+Implementation Notes:
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+The first setting of "_" to be an active character is performed in a local
+group so as to not interfere with other packages.  The catcode setting
+is repeated with \AtBeginDocument so the definition is in effect for the
+text.  However, the catcode setting is repeated immediately when the
+[strings] option is detected.
+
+The definition of the active "_" is essentially:
+       \ifmmode \sb \else \BreakableUnderscore \fi
+where "\sb" retains the normal subscript meaning of "_" and where
+"\BreakableUnderscore" is essentially "\_".  The rest of the definition
+handles the "\protect"ion without causing \relax to be inserted before
+the character.
+
+\BreakableUnderscore uses "\nobreak\hskip\z@skip" to separate the
+underscore from surrounding words, thus allowing TeX to hyphenate them,
+but preventing free breaks around the underscore. Next, it checks the
+current font family, and uses the underscore character from tt fonts or
+otherwise \textunderscore (which is a character or rule depending on
+the font encoding).  After the underscore, it inserts a discretionary
+hyphenation point as "\usc@dischyph", which is usually just "\-"
+except that it still works in the tabbing environment, although it
+will give "\discretionary{}{}{}" under the [nohyphen] option.  After
+that, another piece of non-breaking interword glue is inserted. 
+Ordinarily, the comparison "\ifx\f@family\ttdefault" will always fail 
+because \ttdefault is `long' where \f@family is not (boooo hisss), but 
+\ttdefault is redefined to be non-long by "\AtBeginDocument".
+
+The "\_" command is then defined to use "\BreakableUnderscore".
+
+If the [strings] option is not given, then that is all!
+
+Under the [strings] option, the list of special commands is processed to:
+- retain the original command as \US_command (\US_ref)
+- redefine the command as \US@prot\US_command for ordinary commands
+  (\ref -> \US@prot\US_ref) or as \US@protopt\US_command when an optional
+  argument is possible (\bibitem -> \US@protopt\US_bibitem).
+- self-protecting commands (\cite) retain their self-protection.
+Diagnosing the state of the pre-existing command is done by painful
+contortions involving \meaning.
+
+\US@prot and \US@protopt read the argument, process it with \protect
+enabled, then invoke the saved \US_command.
+
+Modifications:
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+12-Oct-2001  Babel (safe@actives) compatibility and [nohyphen] option.
+
+Test file integrity:  ASCII 32-57, 58-126:  !"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789
+:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/url.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/url.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f321d51f567
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/url.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,473 @@
+% url.sty  ver 3.2    27-Jun-2005   Donald Arseneau   asnd@triumf.ca
+% Copyright 1996-2005 Donald Arseneau,  Vancouver, Canada.
+% This program can be used, distributed, and modified under the terms
+% of the LaTeX Project Public License.
+%
+% A form of \verb that allows linebreaks at certain characters or
+% combinations of characters, accepts reconfiguration, and can usually
+% be used in the argument to another command.  It is intended for email
+% addresses, hypertext links, directories/paths, etc., which normally
+% have no spaces.  The font may be selected using the \urlstyle command,
+% and new url-like commands can be defined using \urldef.
+%
+% Usage:    Conditions:
+% \url{ }   If the argument contains any "%" or "^^", or ends with
+%           "\", it can't be used in the argument to another command.
+%           The argument must not contain unbalanced braces.
+% \url|  |  ...where "|" is any character not used in the argument and not
+%           "{" or a space.  The same restrictions as above except that the
+%           argument may contain unbalanced braces.
+% \urldef\xyz\url{ }
+% \xyz      a defined-url: "\xyz" can be used anywhere, no matter what
+%           characters it contains.
+% \DeclareUrlCommand\abc{settings}: makes \abc{ } like \url{ }
+%
+% See further instructions after "\endinput"
+%
+
+% default style assignments
+\def\UrlBreaks{\do\.\do\@\do\\\do\/\do\!\do\_\do\|\do\;\do\>\do\]%
+ \do\)\do\,\do\?\do\'\do+\do\=\do\#}%
+\def\UrlBigBreaks{\do\:\do@url@hyp}%
+\def\UrlNoBreaks{\do\(\do\[\do\{\do\<}%
+% any ordinary characters that aren't usually:
+\def\UrlOrds{\do\*\do\-\do\~\do\'\do\"\do\-}%
+\def\UrlSpecials{\do\ {\Url@space}\do\%{\Url@percent}\do\^^M{\Url@space}%
+   \Url@force@Tilde}% package option may force faked text-ascii-tilde
+
+\@namedef{Url@OT1encSpecials}{%
+  \do\Œ{\mathchar"3E }\do\œ{\mathchar"1B }\do\ß{\mathchar"19 }%
+  \do\~{\lower.45ex\hbox{\m@th$\mathchar126$}}% For tt style
+  % lots more to add, but I should later link into inputenc
+  \Url@OTnonTT % more for any but typewriter
+  }
+
+\def\Url@OTnonTT{\do\<{\langle}\do\>{\mathbin{\rangle}}\do
+  \_{\_\penalty\@m}\do\|{\mid}\do\{{\lbrace}\do\}{\mathbin{\rbrace}}\do
+  \\{\mathbin{\backslash}}\UrlTildeSpecial}
+
+\@namedef{Url@T1encSpecials}{\do\µ{\mu}\do\¿{\mathchar190 }%
+  \do\Œ{\mathchar190 }\do\œ{\mathchar247 }\do\ß{\mathchar255 }%
+  \do\ÿ{\mathchar184 }}
+
+\@namedef{Url@LY1encSpecials}{\do\~{\mathchar158 }}
+
+\def\UrlTildeSpecial{\do\~{\raise.45ex\hbox{\m@th$\scriptstyle\sim$}}}
+\let\Url@force@Tilde\relax
+
+\def\url@ttstyle{%
+ \@ifundefined{selectfont}{\def\UrlFont{\tt}}{\def\UrlFont{\ttfamily}}}
+
+\def\url@rmstyle{%
+ \@ifundefined{selectfont}{\def\UrlFont{\rm}}{\def\UrlFont{\rmfamily}}}
+
+\def\url@sfstyle{%
+ \@ifundefined{selectfont}{\def\UrlFont{\sf}}{\def\UrlFont{\sffamily}}}
+
+\def\url@samestyle{\def\UrlFont{}}
+
+\@ifundefined{strip@prefix}{\def\strip@prefix#1>{}}{}
+\@ifundefined{verbatim@nolig@list}{\def\verbatim@nolig@list{\do\`}}{}
+
+% \Url sets up the reading the argument verbatim if possible
+\def\Url{%
+ \Url@movingtest
+ \ifmmode\@nomatherr$\fi %$
+ \let\do\@makeother \dospecials % verbatim catcodes
+ \catcode`{\@ne \catcode`}\tw@ % with exceptions
+ \catcode`\ =10 % allow "\url {x}"
+ \catcode`\#=6  % always # -> ##, so I can later convert ## -> #
+ \@ifnextchar\bgroup{\obeyspaces\obeylines\Url@z}\Url@y}
+
+% \Url@y read arguments delimited like |...|, passing to \Url@z
+\def\Url@y#1{\catcode`{11 \catcode`}11\obeyspaces\obeylines
+  \def\@tempa##1#1{\Url@z{##1}}\@tempa}
+
+% \Url@z read arguments delimited like {...}, verbatimizes with \meaning,
+% performs character translations, then invokes the formatter.
+\def\Url@z#1{\toks@{#1}\edef\Url@String{\the\toks@}%
+  \edef\Url@String{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\Url@String}%
+%\if\urldebug \message{------------------------------------------------------}%
+%\message{ \Url@String}\fi
+% \meaning introduces spurious spaces in the text, so it would be nice
+% to preserve the real spaces before \meaning, but that doesn't work --
+% we can only do replacement on streams of non-syntactic characters.
+  \Url@ObeySp % may be no-op; otherwise put ordinary (12) space characters
+%\if\urldebug \message{ \Url@String}\fi
+% we left the catcode of # with its normal value (6) so \meaning
+% doubles it to ##.  Now we convert back to single #.  This allows
+% \url{#} to appear in the arguments of other commands, where we can't
+% make # be an ordinary character.  We make the single # active rather
+% than `other' to support hyperref.sty.
+  \Url@acthash
+%\if\urldebug \message{ \Url@String}\fi
+% Also make % active to support hyperref.
+  \Url@actpercent
+% now do any hyper referencing due to hyperref (or perform a url-def)
+  \Url@HyperHook
+% Now do the formatting in a group (can also have \Url@HyperHook take
+% this as an argument.
+  {\Url@FormatString}%
+  \endgroup}
+
+\let\Url@ObeySp\@empty
+\let\UrlRight\@empty
+\let\UrlLeft\@empty
+\let\Url@HyperHook\@empty
+
+% This is the normal way to format the strings, using math mode.
+\def\Url@FormatString{%
+ \UrlFont \Url@MathSetup 
+ $\fam\z@ \textfont\z@\font
+ \expandafter\UrlLeft\Url@String\UrlRight
+ \m@th$%
+% \if\urldebug \showlists \fi 
+}%
+
+\def\Url@MathSetup{%
+ \medmuskip\Urlmuskip \thickmuskip\medmuskip \thinmuskip0mu%
+ \relpenalty\UrlBigBreakPenalty \binoppenalty\UrlBreakPenalty
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\UrlEncSpecials\csname Url@\f@encoding encSpecials\endcsname
+ % Insert test for unknown encodings here \ifx\UrlEncSpecials\relax
+ \ifdim\fontdimen\thr@@\font=\z@ \let\Url@OTnonTT\relax \fi
+ \@tempcnta\z@ %  \fam\multiply\@tempcnta\@cclvi
+ \let\do\set@mathcode \UrlOrds % ordinary characters that were special
+ \advance\@tempcnta 8192 \UrlBreaks % bin
+ \advance\@tempcnta 4096 \UrlBigBreaks % rel
+ \advance\@tempcnta 4096 \UrlNoBreaks % open
+ \let\do\set@mathact \UrlSpecials \UrlEncSpecials % active
+ \let\do\set@mathnolig \verbatim@nolig@list % prevent ligatures
+}
+
+\def\set@mathcode#1{\count@`#1\advance\count@\@tempcnta
+%\message{Set mathcode of \string #1 (\number`#1) = \number`#1 + \number\@tempcnta. }%
+\mathcode`#1\count@}
+\def\set@mathact#1#2{\mathcode`#1=32768 \begingroup 
+    \lccode`\~`#1\lowercase{\endgroup\def~}{#2}}
+\def\set@mathnolig#1{\ifnum\mathcode`#1<32768
+   \begingroup\lccode`\~`#1\lowercase{\endgroup
+     \edef~}{\mathchar\number\mathcode`#1_{\/}}%
+   \mathcode`#1=32768 \fi}
+
+\def\Url@movingtest{\begingroup
+ \ifx\let\HyPsd@LetCommand % we are already in a pdf string!
+  \expandafter\Url@unmove \fi % give the argument and hope for the best
+ \let\Url@moving\relax\relax\relax
+ \ifx\Url@moving\relax\else \expandafter\Url@unmove \fi
+ \endgroup}
+\long\def\Url@unmove#1\Url@y{\endgroup \ifx\protect\relax\else\protect\Url\fi}
+\edef\Url@moving{\csname Url Error\endcsname}
+\expandafter\edef\Url@moving
+ {\csname url used in a moving argument.\endcsname}
+\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter \let \Url@moving\@undefined
+
+\def\urldef#1#2{\begingroup \setbox\z@\hbox\bgroup
+  \def\Url@HyperHook##1\endgroup{\Url@def{#1}{#2}}%
+  % Because hyperref breaks \urldef and does not define its own (Grrrr!)...
+  \def\url@##1{\egroup\endgroup\DeclareRobustCommand#1{#2{##1}}}%
+ #2}
+\def\Url@def#1#2{%
+   \toks0\expandafter{\Url@String}%
+   \protected@edef\Url@String{\Url@String}%
+   \toks1\expandafter{\Url@String}%
+   \edef\Url@String{\endgroup\egroup\endgroup\def
+     \expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1 \endcsname
+     {\noexpand\Url@eitherdef{\the\toks1}{\noexpand#2{\the\toks0}}}}%
+   \Url@String
+   \edef#1{\noexpand\protect
+      \expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1 \endcsname}%
+  }
+\def\Url@eitherdef{\ifx\let\HyPsd@LetCommand % we are already in a pdf string!
+  \expandafter\@firstoftwo \else \expandafter\@secondoftwo \fi}
+
+\def\urlstyle#1{\expandafter\protect\csname url@#1style\endcsname}
+
+\def\DeclareUrlCommand#1#2{\def#1{\begingroup #2\Url}}
+
+% Sample (and default) configuration:
+%
+\DeclareUrlCommand\url{}
+\urlstyle{tt}
+%
+\newmuskip\Urlmuskip \Urlmuskip=0mu
+\mathchardef\UrlBreakPenalty=\binoppenalty
+\mathchardef\UrlBigBreakPenalty=\relpenalty
+%
+% picTeX defines \path, so declare it optionally:
+\@ifundefined{path}{\DeclareUrlCommand\path{\urlstyle{tt}}}{}
+%
+% too many styles define \email like \address, so I will not define it.
+% \DeclareUrlCommand\email{\urlstyle{rm}}
+
+% Process LaTeX \package options
+%
+\let\Url@sppen\@M
+\def\Url@space{\penalty\Url@sppen}
+\def\do@url@hyp{}% by default, no breaks after hyphens
+
+\@ifundefined{ProvidesPackage}{
+}{\ProvidesPackage
+ {url}[2005/06/27 \space ver 3.2 \space Verb mode for urls, etc.]
+\DeclareOption{hyphens}{\def\do@url@hyp{\do\-}}% allow breaks after hyphens
+\DeclareOption{obeyspaces}{\let\Url@ObeySp\relax}% a flag for later
+\DeclareOption{spaces}{\def\Url@sppen{\UrlBreakPenalty}}
+\DeclareOption{LY1}{}
+\DeclareOption{T1}{}
+\DeclareOption{allowmove}{\let\Url@moving\@empty}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+\ifx\Url@ObeySp\relax % [obeyspaces] was declared
+  \begingroup \lccode`+=32 \lowercase
+   {\endgroup \def\Url@ObeySp{\Url@Edit\Url@String{ }{+}}}
+   \def\Url@space{\penalty\Url@sppen\ }
+\fi
+}
+\ifx\f@encoding\undefined \def\f@encoding{OT1}\fi
+
+\begingroup
+% \Url@acthash:    convert `other' (doubled) ## to active #
+% \Url@actpercent: convert `other' % to active %
+ \lccode`+=`\# \lccode`\~=`\#
+  \lowercase {\long\gdef\Url@acthash{\Url@Edit\Url@String{++}{~}%
+     \ifnum\mathcode`\#<32768 \def~{\#}\fi}}%
+ \lccode`+=`\% \lccode`\~=`\%
+  \lowercase {\long\gdef\Url@actpercent{\Url@Edit\Url@String{+}{~}%
+    \ifnum\mathcode`\%<32768 \def~{\%}\fi}}%
+ \catcode13=12 %
+ \gdef\Url@percent{\@ifnextchar^^M{\@gobble}{\mathbin{\mathchar`\%}}}%
+\endgroup%
+
+%   Edit macro #1 changing all appearances of pattern #2 to replacement #3.
+%   The replacement is recursive, so don't put the search pattern into the
+%   replacement text!
+
+{ \catcode`Q=3
+
+\gdef\Url@Edit#1#2#3{%
+ \begingroup % \tracingall
+ \def\DOE@a{\endgroup\def#1}% Just so I can \expandafter it safely.
+ \def\DOE@b##1#2##2Q##3{\@ifblank{##2}% if finished,
+   {\DOE@c ##1Q}% then remove \@empty's and redefine macro
+   {\DOE@b##1##3##2Q{##3}}% else, re-iterate
+ }%  the leading \@empty preserves braces, as does the trailing pattern:
+ \expandafter\DOE@b\expandafter\@empty #1\@empty#2Q{#3}}
+\gdef\DOE@c#1\@empty Q{\expandafter\DOE@a\expandafter{#1}}
+%
+%  \@ifblank (LaTeX syntax) --- checks if parameter is blank (Spaces
+%     count as blank) use \@ifblank{#1}{true case}{false case} etc
+\long\gdef\@ifblank#1{\@Ifbl@nk#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo!}%
+\long\gdef\@Ifbl@nk#1#2Q#3#4#5!{#4}
+
+} % restore Q catcode
+
+
+%\ifx\urldebug\@undefined \def\urldebug{01}\fi
+
+\endinput
+%
+% url.sty  ver 3.2    27-Jun-2005   Donald Arseneau   asnd@triumf.ca
+%
+% This package defines "\url", a form of "\verb" that allows linebreaks,
+% and can often be used in the argument to another command.  It can be
+% configured to print in different formats, and is particularly useful for
+% hypertext links, email addresses, directories/paths, etc.  The font may
+% be selected using the "\urlstyle" command and pre-defined text can be
+% stored with the "\urldef" command. New url-like commands can be defined,
+% and a "\path" command is provided this way.
+%
+% Usage:    Conditions:
+% \url{ }   If the argument contains any "%", "#", or "^^", or ends with
+%           "\", it can't be used in the argument to another command.
+%           The argument must not contain unbalanced braces.
+% \url|  |  ...where "|" is any character not used in the argument and not
+%           "{" or a space.  The same restrictions as above except that the
+%           argument may contain unbalanced braces.
+% \xyz      for "\xyz" a defined-url;  this can be used anywhere, no matter
+%           what characters it contains.
+%
+% The "\url" command is fragile, and its argument is likely to be very
+% fragile, but a defined-url is robust.
+%
+% Package Option:  obeyspaces
+% Ordinarily, all spaces are ignored in the url-text.  The "[obeyspaces]"
+% option allows spaces, but may introduce spurious spaces when a url
+% containing "\" characters is given in the argument to another command.
+% So if you need to obey spaces you can say "\usepackage[obeyspaces]{url}",
+% and if you need both spaces and backslashes, use a `defined-url' for
+% anything with "\".
+%
+% Package Option:  hyphens
+% Ordinarily, breaks are not allowed after "-" characters because this
+% leads to confusion. (Is the "-" part of the address or just a hyphen?)
+% The package option "[hyphens]" allows breaks after explicit hyphen
+% characters.  The "\url" command will *never ever* hyphenate words.
+%
+% Package Option:  spaces
+% Likewise, breaks are not usually allowed after spaces under the
+% "[obeyspaces]" option, but giving the options "[obeyspaces,spaces]"
+% will allow breaks at those spaces. (Note that it seems logical to
+% allow the sole option "[spaces]" to let input spaces indicate break
+% points, but not to display them in the output. This would be easy to
+% implement, but is left out to avoid(?) confusion.)
+%
+% Defining a defined-url:
+% Take for example the email address "myself%node@gateway.net" which could
+% not be given (using "\url" or "\verb") in a caption or parbox due to the
+% percent sign.  This address can be predefined with
+%    \urldef{\myself}\url{myself%node@gateway.net}   or
+%    \urldef{\myself}\url|myself%node@gateway.net|
+% and then you may use "\myself" instead of "\url{myself%node@gateway.net}"
+% in an argument, and even in a moving argument like a caption because a
+% defined-url is robust.
+%
+% Style:
+% You can switch the style of printing using "\urlstyle{tt}", where "tt"
+% can be any defined style.  The pre-defined styles are "tt", "rm", "sf",
+% and "same" which all allow the same linebreaks but different fonts --
+% the first three select a specific font and the "same" style uses the
+% current text font.  You can define your own styles with different fonts
+% and/or line-breaking by following the explanations below.  The "\url"
+% command follows whatever the currently-set style dictates.
+%
+% Alternate commands:
+% It may be desireable to have different things treated differently, each
+% in a predefined style; e.g., if you want directory paths to always be
+% in typewriter and email addresses to be roman, then you would define new
+% url-like commands as follows:
+%
+%    \DeclareUrlCommand\email{\urlstyle{rm}}
+%    \DeclareUrlCommand\directory{\urlstyle{tt}}
+%
+% In fact, the "\directory" example is exactly the "\path" definition which
+% is pre-defined in the package.  If you look above, you will see that "\url"
+% is defined with
+%    \DeclareUrlCommand\url{}
+% I.e., using whatever "\urlstyle" and other settings are already in effect.
+%
+% You can make a defined-url for these other styles, using the usual
+% "\urldef" command as in this example:
+%
+%    \urldef{\myself}{\email}{myself%node.domain@gateway.net}
+%
+% which makes "\myself" act like "\email{myself%node.domain@gateway.net}",
+% if the "\email" command is defined as above.  The "\myself" command
+% would then be robust.
+%
+% Defining styles:
+% Before describing how to customize the printing style, it is best to
+% mention something about the unusual implementation of "\url".  Although
+% the material is textual in nature, and the font specification required
+% is a text-font command, the text is actually typeset in *math* mode.
+% This allows the context-sensitive linebreaking, but also accounts for
+% the default behavior of ignoring spaces.  Now on to defining styles.
+%
+% To change the font or the list of characters that allow linebreaks, you
+% could redefine the commands "\UrlFont", "\UrlBreaks", "\UrlSpecials" etc.
+% directly in the document, but it is better to define a new `url-style'
+% (following the example of "\url@ttstyle" and "\url@rmstyle") which defines
+% all of "\UrlBigbreaks", "\UrlNoBreaks", "\UrlBreaks", "\UrlSpecials", and
+% "\UrlFont".
+%
+% Changing font:
+% The "\UrlFont" command selects the font.  The definition of "\UrlFont"
+% done by the pre-defined styles varies to cope with a variety of LaTeX
+% font selection schemes, but it could be as simple as "\def\UrlFont{\tt}".
+% Depending on the font selected, some characters may need to be defined
+% in the "\UrlSpecials" list because many fonts don't contain all the
+% standard input characters.
+%
+% Changing linebreaks:
+% The list of characters that allow line-breaks is given by "\UrlBreaks"
+% and "\UrlBigBreaks", which have the format "\do\c" for character "c".
+% The differences are that `BigBreaks' usually have a lower penalty and have
+% different breakpoints when in sequence (as in "http://"): `BigBreaks'
+% are treated as mathrels while `Breaks' are mathbins (see The TeXbook,
+% p.170). In particular, a series of `BigBreak' characters will break at
+% the end and only at the end; a series of `Break' characters will break
+% after the first and after every following *pair*; there will be no
+% break after a `Break' character if a `BigBreak' follows.  In the case
+% of "http://" it doesn't matter whether ":" is a `Break' or `BigBreak' --
+% the breaks are the same in either case; but for DECnet nodes with "::"
+% it is important to prevent breaks *between* the colons, and that is why
+% colons are `BigBreaks'.
+%
+% It is possible for characters to prevent breaks after the next following
+% character (I use this for parentheses).  Specify these in "\UrlNoBreaks".
+%
+% You can do arbitrarily complex things with characters by making them
+% active in math mode (mathcode hex-8000) and specifying the definition(s)
+% in "\UrlSpecials".  This is used in the rm and sf styles for OT1 font
+% encoding to handle several characters that are not present in those
+% computer-modern style fonts.  See the definition of "\Url@do", which
+% is used by both "\url@rmstyle" and "\url@sfstyle"; it handles missing
+% characters via "\UrlSpecials".  The nominal format for setting each
+% special character "c" is: "\do\c{<definition>}", but you can include
+% other definitions too.
+%
+% If all this sounds confusing ... well, it is!  But I hope you won't need
+% to redefine breakpoints -- the default assignments seem to work well for
+% a wide variety of applications.  If you do need to make changes, you can
+% test for breakpoints using regular math mode and the characters "+=(a".
+%
+% You can allow some spacing around the breakable characters by assigning
+%    \Urlmuskip = 0mu plus 1mu
+% You can change the penalties used for BigBreaks and Breaks by assigning
+%    \mathchardef\UrlBreakPenalty=100 \mathchardef\UrlBigBreakPenalty=100
+% The default penalties are "\binoppenalty" and "\relpenalty".  These have
+% such odd non-LaTeX syntax because I don't expect people to need to
+% change them often.
+%
+% Yet more flexibility:
+% You can also customize the verbatim text by defining "\UrlRight" and/or
+% "\UrlLeft", e.g., for ISO formatting of urls surrounded by "<  >", define
+%
+%    \DeclareUrlCommand\url{\def\UrlLeft{<url:\ }\def\UrlRight{>}%
+%        \urlstyle{tt}}
+%
+% The meanings of "\UrlLeft" and "\UrlRight" are *not* reproduced verbatim.
+% This lets you use formatting commands there, but you must be careful not
+% to use TeX's special characters ("\^_%~#$&{}" etc.) improperly.
+% You can also define "\UrlLeft" to reprocess the verbatim text, but the
+% format of the definition is special:
+%
+%    \def\UrlLeft#1\UrlRight{ ... do things with #1 ... }
+%
+% Yes, that is "#1" followed by "\UrlRight" then the definition.  For
+% example, to put a hyperTeX hypertext link in the DVI file:
+%
+%    \def\UrlLeft#1\UrlRight{\special{html:<a href="#1">}#1\special{html:</a>}}
+%
+% Using this technique, url.sty can provide a convenient interface for
+% performing various operations on verbatim text.  You don't even need
+% to print out the argument!  For greatest efficiency in such obscure
+% applications, you can define a null url-style where all the lists like
+% "\UrlBreaks" are empty.
+%
+% Revision History:
+% ver 1.1 6-Feb-1996:
+% Fix hyphens that wouldn't break and ligatures that weren't suppressed.
+% ver 1.2 19-Oct-1996:
+% Package option for T1 encoding; Hooks: "\UrlLeft" and "\UrlRight".
+% ver 1.3 21-Jul-1997:
+% Prohibit spaces as delimiter characters; change ascii tilde in OT1.
+% ver 1.4 02-Mar-1999:
+% LaTeX license; moving-argument-error
+% ver 1.5 28-Mar-1999:
+% possibility of spacing around break characters; re-settable penalties
+% ver 1.6 20-Jun-2002:
+% un-double #, fix obeyed-spaces, ignore trailing %, hook for hyperref
+% (\Url@HyperHook), no macros in pre-processed url string (in \Url@String),
+% limit catcode change of ~.
+% ver 3.0 June 2003/Nov 2003:
+% \DeclareUrlCommand; make font encoding automatic (only a few inputenc characters
+% are supported yet - needs refactoring); reverse penalties. 
+% ver 3.1 Mar 2004:
+% Remove spurious spaces in \url@XXstyle commands.
+% ver 3.2 June 2005:
+% Fix cmsy-symbols in tt bug (from 3.0); LY1 encoding bug; Enable plain
+% with miniltx (again); Define the \urldef for hyperref; Lower "sim" tilde
+% a little; fix \lowercase error in \UrlSpecials handling.
+% The End
+
+Test file integrity:  ASCII 32-57, 58-126:  !"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789
+:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/varwidth.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/varwidth.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..32c1a8fb639
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/varwidth.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,302 @@
+% varwidth.sty  v 0.9a  Mar 2003  Donald Arseneau asnd@triumf.ca
+%
+% Copyright 2003 by Donald Arseneau (asnd@triumf.ca).
+% This software is released under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public 
+% License  (ftp://ctan.tug.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt).
+% (Essentially: Free to use, copy, distribute (sell) and change, but, if
+% changed, the name must be changed.)
+%
+% The varwidth environment is based on minipage, and takes the same
+% parameters, but the specified width is just a maximum value -- the
+% environment will be typeset with a narrower "natural" width if
+% possible.
+%
+% In a varwidth environment, paragraph line-breaks are chosen
+% according to the specified width, but each line is reset to 
+% match a narrower natural width, if there is one.
+%
+% The \narrowragged command works like \raggedright, but produces 
+% generally narrower lines in paragraphs, but more text in the last 
+% line (the lines have more-equal lengths).
+%
+% This version works fine, but there are still many questions about
+% how it would work best.  Should there be a version that avoids the
+% usual minipage formatting style?
+%
+% Numbered equations are not handled well, especially with leqno.
+% AMSmath environments have not been tried, and undoubtedly fail.
+%
+% To do:  Extend v-list wrappers to handle all e-TeX primitives.
+%         (pdfTeX too?)
+%         Capture marks and floats, propagating them out of the box
+%         Support numbered equations, including ams math.
+% 
+
+\ProvidesPackage{varwidth}[2003/03/10 ver 0.9a; \space 
+    Variable-width minipages]
+
+\newcommand\narrowragged{\rightskip \z@ plus .25\hsize 
+  \@rightskip\rightskip \parfillskip\z@ plus .15\hsize
+  \sloppy }
+
+\newbox\@vwid@box
+
+% The varwidth environment is based on minipage, and takes the same
+% parameters, but the specified width is only a limit -- a narrower
+% natural width may be used.  \varwidth uses \minipage.
+
+\def\varwidth{\let\@minipagerestore\@vwid@setup \minipage}
+
+% Many things may appear on vertical lists that can't be re-processed,
+% so they have to be modified. 
+
+\def\@vwid@setup{%
+  % several things can't appear in vertical mode, so they may get 
+  % a \vbox wrapped around them.
+  \let\@bsphack\@vwid@bsphack % \label and others
+  \let\mark\@gobble % Marks disappear in minipages anyway
+  \let\@special\@vwid@special % \color and others
+  \let\addtocontents\@vwid@addtocontents % \addcontentsline
+  % Shifted boxes (\parshape,\hangindent) will have their shifts
+  % indicated in a separate box.
+  \let\@hangfrom\@vwid@hangfrom % hanging indents
+  \let\list\@vwid@list
+  \let\endtrivlist\@vwid@endtrivlist
+  \postdisplaypenalty\@vwid@posteqp
+  \predisplaypenalty\@vwid@preeqp
+  \def\@eqnnum{\aftergroup\@vwid@afterva\@@vwid@eqnnum}%
+  \global\@vwid@roff\z@  \global\@vwid@loff\z@
+  % Begin an inner minipage-like vertical box (in \@tempboxa)
+  \let\@minipagerestore\@@vwid@minipagerestore \@minipagerestore
+  \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup\begingroup
+  % Flag the top of the list
+  \penalty\@vwid@toppen
+}
+
+\let\@@vwid@minipagerestore\@minipagerestore
+
+%  At end of varwidth environment.
+\def\endvarwidth{\par\@@par
+   % Handle minipage-style notes.
+   \ifvoid\@mpfootins\else
+     \vskip\skip\@mpfootins
+     \normalcolor
+     \@vwid@wrap\footnoterule
+     \unvbox\@mpfootins
+   \fi
+   \unskip
+   \endgroup\egroup % got my \@tempboxa
+%   {\showoutput\showbox\@tempboxa}%
+   % in a discarded box, sift through list measuring max width.
+   \begingroup\setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+%\message{-------------------------------------------------------------}%
+%\message{First pass; hsize=\the\hsize...  }%{\tracingall\showlists}%%
+     \unvcopy\@tempboxa
+     \@tempdima-\maxdimen
+     \let\@vwid@resetb\@vwid@measure
+     \let\@vwid@append\relax
+     \sift@deathcycles\z@
+     \@vwid@sift
+     \xdef\@vwid@{\the\@tempdima}%
+   \egroup\endgroup
+   % Done measuring.  Now empty \@tempboxa onto current vertical list
+   % which is the contents of a minipage environment
+%\message{Got natural width \@vwid@. }%
+   \unvbox\@tempboxa
+   % If the natural width is narrower, then go back through the list
+   % reboxing and moving everything into \@vwid@box; then spill \@vwid@box
+   \ifdim\@vwid@<\hsize
+     \hsize\@vwid@
+     \setbox\@vwid@box\vbox{}%
+     \sift@deathcycles\z@
+%\message{----------------------------------------------------------------}%
+%\message{Second pass; hsize=\the\hsize...  }%{\tracingall\showlists}%
+     \@vwid@sift
+     \unvbox\@vwid@box
+   \fi
+   % end the minipage environment
+   \endminipage}
+
+%
+% Here are definitions for sifting through the vertical list, either
+% measuring things or reboxing them.  
+%
+% Penalties used as signals to the vertical-list processor:
+
+\mathchardef\@vwid@posteqp  17321 % Penalty below equations
+\mathchardef\@vwid@preeqp   17322 % Penalty above equations
+\mathchardef\@vwid@postnump 17323 % Penalty below numbered equations
+\mathchardef\@vwid@toppen   17324 % Penalty marking top of vertical list
+\mathchardef\@vwid@offsets  17325 % Penalty below special h-offsets box
+\mathchardef\@vwid@postw    17326 % Penalty below a \vbox-wrapped object
+
+\newcount\sift@deathcycles
+
+\def\@vwid@sift{%
+  \skip@\lastskip\unskip
+  \dimen@\lastkern\unkern
+  \count@\lastpenalty\unpenalty
+  \setbox\z@\lastbox
+%{\showoutput\showbox\z@}%
+  \ifvoid\z@ \advance\sift@deathcycles\@ne \else \sift@deathcycles\z@ \fi
+  \ifnum\sift@deathcycles>33 
+    \let\@vwid@sift\relax
+    \PackageWarning{varwidth}{Failed to reprocess entire contents}%
+  \fi
+%\message{\the\sift@deathcycles: skip \the\skip@; kern \the\dimen@; penalty \the\count@. }%
+%\ifhbox\z@\setbox99\hbox to0pt{\unhcopy\z@}\fi  % = message
+  \ifnum\count@=\@vwid@preeqp \@vwid@eqmodefalse\fi
+%\ifnum\count@=\@vwid@preeqp \message{End equation mode. }\fi
+  \ifnum\count@=\@vwid@posteqp \@vwid@eqmodetrue\fi
+%\ifnum\count@=\@vwid@posteqp\message{Begin equation mode. }\fi
+%\if@vwid@eqmode {\showoutput\showbox\z@}\fi
+  \ifnum\count@=\@vwid@toppen % finished
+    \let\@vwid@sift\relax
+  \else\ifnum\count@=\@vwid@offsets
+    \@vwid@setoffsets
+  \else
+    \ifnum\count@=\@vwid@postw
+    \else
+      \@vwid@resetb % reset box \z@ or measure it
+    \fi
+    \@vwid@append
+  \fi\fi
+  \@vwid@sift}
+
+\def\@vwid@setoffsets{%
+ \setbox\z@=\hbox{\unhbox\z@
+  \global\@vwid@roff\lastkern\unkern
+  \global\@vwid@loff\lastkern\unkern}%
+%\message{Set offsets to \the\@vwid@loff,  \the\@vwid@roff. }%
+}
+
+\def\@vwid@append{% Append contents of box \z@ and glue to \@vwid@box
+  \setbox\@vwid@box\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\z@
+    \ifdim\dimen@=\z@\else \kern\dimen@ \fi
+    \vskip\skip@
+    \unvbox\@vwid@box
+  }%{\tracingall\showbox\@vwid@box}%
+}
+
+%  reset box \z@ to \hsize, applying shifts, and wrap in vbox
+%  Don't worry about numbered equations because we won't get
+%  here if there are any.
+\def\@vwid@resetb{%
+  \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+    \ifvoid\z@
+    \else
+       \ifvbox\z@
+         \box\z@
+       \else % \hbox
+         \@tempdima\hsize
+         \advance\@tempdima-\@vwid@roff
+         \advance\@tempdima-\@vwid@loff
+         \advance\@tempdima-\p@
+         \ifdim\wd\z@>\@tempdima % full-width line; rebox it
+%\message{An ordinary line or alignment. }%
+            \hbox to\hsize
+              {\kern\@vwid@loff \unhbox\z@ \kern\@vwid@roff}%
+         \else % an equation or direct \hbox
+           \if@vwid@eqmode % re-center unnumbered equations
+%\message{A centered equation hsize=\the\hsize. }%
+              \hbox to\hsize
+                {\hskip\@vwid@loff\@plus1fil
+                 \unhbox\z@ \hskip\@vwid@roff\@plus1fil}%
+           \else % plain narrow \hbox; leave it as-is
+              \box\z@
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \egroup}
+
+\def\@vwid@measure{%
+  \ifvoid\z@
+  \else
+    % numbered equations not part of alignments can't be reset,
+    % so force retention of full width.
+    \ifnum\count@=\@vwid@postnump \ifdim\wd\z@<\linewidth
+      \ifdim\@tempdima<\linewidth \@tempdima\linewidth \fi
+    \fi\fi
+    \ifhbox\z@
+      \setbox\z@=\hbox
+        {\kern\@vwid@loff \unhbox\z@ \kern\@vwid@roff}%
+    \fi
+    \ifdim\wd\z@>\@tempdima \@tempdima\wd\z@ \fi
+  \fi}
+
+\newdimen\@vwid@loff
+\newdimen\@vwid@roff
+
+\let\@@bsphack\@bsphack
+\let\@@esphack\@esphack
+\let\@@esphack\@Esphack
+
+\def\@vwid@bsphack{\@@bsphack
+  \ifx\@vwid@wrap\@firstofone
+    \bgroup
+  \else
+    \ifvmode
+      \setbox\@vwid@box \vbox\bgroup \vbox\bgroup
+      \let\@vwid@wrap\@firstofone
+      \def\@esphack{\@vwid@esphack\@@esphack}%
+      \def\@Esphack{\@vwid@esphack\@@Esphack}%
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+
+\def\@vwid@esphack{\egroup
+  \ifx\@vwid@wrap\@firstofone\else
+    \egroup % end outer box
+    \unvbox\@vwid@box % put inner box on list without lineskip
+    \penalty\@vwid@postw
+  \fi}
+
+% \vbox Wrapper for misc vlist items
+\long\def\@vwid@wrap{\relax
+  \ifvmode\expandafter\@vwid@dowrap \else \expandafter\@firstofone \fi}
+\long\def\@vwid@dowrap#1{%
+  \setbox\@vwid@box \vbox{\vbox{\let\@vwid@wrap\@firstofone
+    #1}\penalty\@vwid@postw
+  }\unvbox\@vwid@box }
+
+\let\@@vwid@special\special
+\let\@@vwid@addtocontents\addtocontents
+\let\@@vwid@list\list
+\let\@@vwid@endtrivlist\endtrivlist
+\let\@@vwid@eqnnum\@eqnnum
+
+\long\def\@vwid@special#1{\@vwid@wrap{\@@vwid@special{#1}}}
+\long\def\@vwid@addtocontents#1#2{\@vwid@wrap{\@@vwid@addtocontents{#1}{#2}}}
+
+\long\def\@vwid@hangfrom#1{\par
+  \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{{#1}}%
+  \setbox\@vwid@box \vbox{\hbox{\kern\z@ \kern\z@
+   }\penalty\@vwid@offsets}\unvbox\@vwid@box
+  \def\par{\relax\ifhmode\unskip\fi
+    \vadjust{\hbox{\kern\hangindent\kern\z@}\penalty\@vwid@offsets}%
+    \@restorepar\par}%
+  \hangindent \wd\@tempboxa\noindent\box\@tempboxa}
+
+\def\@vwid@list{\@vwid@setlist\@@vwid@list}
+\def\@vwid@endtrivlist{\@vwid@setlist\@@vwid@endtrivlist}
+
+\def\@vwid@setlist{\relax\ifhmode \unskip\expandafter\vadjust\fi
+  {\setbox\@vwid@box \vbox{\hbox{%
+    \advance\hsize-\linewidth \advance\hsize-\@totalleftmargin
+    \kern\@totalleftmargin  \kern\hsize}%
+    \penalty\@vwid@offsets}%
+   \unvbox\@vwid@box}}
+
+\newif\if@vwid@eqmode
+
+\def\@vwid@afterva{\vadjust{\penalty\@vwid@postnump}}
+
+%  Should I do this? ...
+
+\@ifundefined{newcolumntype}{}{%
+ \@ifundefined{NC@rewrite@V}{
+ \newcolumntype{V}[1]{%
+   >{\begin{varwidth}[t]{#1}\narrowragged\let\\\tabularnewline}%
+   l%
+   <{\@finalstrut\@arstrutbox\end{varwidth}}}
+ }{}
+}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/verbasef.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/verbasef.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9daf21e999a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/verbasef.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,339 @@
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% verbasef.sty
+%
+% This stands for VERBatim Automatic Splitting of External Files.
+%
+% Copyright (c) 1994 by Paul A. Thompson, All Rights Reserved.
+% Copy freely as per the GNU Copyleft.
+%
+% Requires:
+%   The New Font Selection Scheme (NFSS) as implemented in LaTeX2e
+%   VERBATIM.STY  :::  Rainer Schoepf
+%   VRBEXIN.STY   :::  You 
+%                      However, it is based on vrbinput.sty, a style by 
+%                      Bernd Raichle which must be revised as discussed below
+%                      in the section labeled IMPORTANT
+%   HERE.STY      :::  David Carlisle
+%
+% verbasef allows you to input (subsections of a) file, print them in
+% verbatim mode, while automatically breaking up the inputted lines into
+% pieces of a given length, which are output as figures.  These figures are
+% posted using the [H] specification, which forces LaTeX to place the figure
+% at the spot of invocation, rather than floating the figures to the top of
+% the next page.
+% 
+% Options for the verbasef specification include:
+%  o numbering of input lines
+%  o differential number of lines for the first page
+%  o specification of the font for the verbatim output
+%  o specification of the font for the optional line numbering
+%  o specification of line numbers as labels 
+%    To use the labelling feature, non-standard approaches must be used.
+%    A line number will be inserted into the main .aux file with label foo,
+%    if the specification 
+%   
+%    Vzzlabel|foo|
+%
+%    is inserted AFTER the line which is to be indicated.  Thus, if we have 
+%    a file with the following
+%    
+%    a line
+%    b line
+%    Vzzlabel|fooa|
+%    c line
+%    Vzzlabel|foob|
+%    d line
+%    Vzzlabel|fooc|
+%    e line
+%    f line
+%    Vzzlabel|food|
+% 
+%    these lines will be found in the .aux file.
+%    \newlabel{fooa}{{2}{1}}
+%    \newlabel{foob}{{3}{1}}
+%    \newlabel{fooc}{{4}{1}}
+%    \newlabel{food}{{6}{1}}
+%
+%    They can be used as any other label, for instance 
+%
+%    Using the labeling feature, pay attention to Line \ref{food} (found on
+%    Page \pageref{food}) to understand this radically new method.
+%
+%    Any lines with the Vzzlabel specification will be ignored in the 
+%    line counts.
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% USING THE styLE 
+%
+% verbasef is an adaptation of VRBSUBFILE, from Norman Walsh.  
+% I fully acknowledge Mr./Dr. Walsh as the imprimature of the code ensconced
+% herein, but have included other features as indicated above.
+%
+% Comments and suggestions always welcome.
+%   Paul A. Thompson
+%   Department of Psychiatry, Data Analysis and Statistics Section
+%   Case Western Reserve University
+%   Cleveland, OH    44106
+%
+%   AudioNet: (216) 844-8946
+%   InterNet: pat@po.cwru.edu
+%
+% User interface:
+%   VautoSubF[#1]#2#3#4#5#6
+%     Input lines #2 to #3 of file #4.  If present, #1 indicates which lines
+%     should be numbered.  For example, if #1 is 5, lines 5, 10, 15, etc.
+%     will be numbered.  By default, lines are not numbered at all.
+%     #5 is figure caption, and #6 is figure label.
+%
+%   VautoSfFont[#1]#2
+%     Use font #2 for verbatim input lines and, if present, use font #1 for
+%     line numbers.  By default, #2 is \tt and #1 is \rm\tiny.
+%   
+%   VautoPl#1
+%     Placement of the figure (either H or some other placement character)
+%     By default, placement is H (immediate here, here.sty) 
+%     (This currently does not function.  All placement is done using the 
+%     H specification.)
+%
+%   VautoLines[#1]{#2}
+%     #2 is number of lines per page.  If #1 is included, it is the number of
+%     lines for the first page.  If not, #1=#2
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT
+% IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT
+% IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% In order to use the verbasef.sty file, VRBINPUT.STY must be MODIFIED
+% and given a NEW NAME.  Here are instructions for modification:
+%
+% You must do EITHER 1-4 below OR 5 below to get verbasef to run properly.
+%
+% 1. Obtain vrbinput.sty from the standard distribution channels.  The file 
+%    should have the following characteristics:
+%
+%    \fileversion{v1.0b}
+%    \filedate{91/06/30}
+%    \docdate{91/08/05}
+%
+% 2. Copy vrbinput.sty to a file vrbexin.sty.  THIS MUST BE DONE PRIOR TO
+%    EDITING ANY FILE.
+% 
+% 3. Edit the file vrbexin.sty.  Please don't edit the file vrbinput.sty.
+%    Change Line 90 from 
+%    \verbatim@startline 
+%    to 
+%    \verbatim@start 
+%    as shown in the fragment of code from Lines 89-92 below.
+%
+%  \def\verbatim@readfile#1{%
+%     \verbatim@start
+%     \openin\verbatim@in@stream #1\relax
+%     \ifeof\verbatim@in@stream
+%
+%
+% 4. VERY IMPORTANT.  CHANGE ALL OCCURRANCES of vrbinput, in titles, typeout
+%    sections and credits to vrbexin.  Remove all references to the original
+%    author, Bernd Raichle, as he is not the author of the style file vrbexin.
+%    You may substitute my name for Mr. Raichle if you wish.
+%
+% 5. Obtain vrbexin.sty directly from the same subdirectory that verbasef was
+%    found in.
+%
+% 6. Place this .sty file in a place searched by TeX, on the TEXINPUT path.
+%
+% After I can figure out the docstrip utility, I will do this stuff myself.
+%
+% Note: As is standard practice in the TeX community, any modifications in 
+% .sty files must be given new names.  Thus, it is certainly vitally important
+% that the modifications in vrbinput.sty be done in the file named
+% vrbexin.sty, not in the original which I did not write.
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT
+% IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT
+% IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT    IMPORTANT
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%                                        
+\RequirePackage{vrbexin}%
+\RequirePackage{verbatim}%
+\RequirePackage{here}%
+\def\fileversion{v1.1}%
+\def\filedate{95/01/20}%
+\typeout{Style-Option: `verbasef' \fileversion \space <\filedate>  (ndw)}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+\newcounter{g@nu}
+\newcommand{\incr@macv}[2]{
+\setcounter{g@nu}{#1}\addtocounter{g@nu}{#2}%
+\global\edef#1{\theg@nu}%
+}
+\gdef\Vauto@LinePage{0}%      % lines/page counter
+\gdef\Vauto@NP{0}%            % Number of pages
+\gdef\Vauto@Fignum{0}%        % Figure number - retain over figures
+\gdef\Vauto@Pagea{0}%         % # lines page 1
+\gdef\Vauto@LineNo{0}%        % current line number
+\gdef\Vauto@LineMod{0}%       % modulo to print on
+\gdef\Vauto@LineLoop{0}%      % loop count in line number (1..Mod)
+\gdef\Vauto@LineStart{0}%     % first line to print
+\gdef\Vauto@LineCount{0}%     % number of lines to print
+\gdef\Vauto@NotLabel{0}%      % Printable - not a label
+\gdef\Vauto@PFlag{0}%         % print this line?
+%
+%%%% Default table placement, and macros to change table placement
+\def\Vauto@Plx{H}\def\Vauto@Pl#1{\def\Vauto@Plx{#1}}\def\VautoPl{\Vauto@Pl}%
+%%%% Default verbatim font and verbatim line number font
+\def\Vauto@sfFont{\tt}\def\Vauto@sfLNF{\rm\tiny}%
+%
+%%%% Macros to change fonts
+\def\Vauto@sbf[#1]#2{\def\Vauto@sfFont{#2}\def\Vauto@sfLNF{#1}}%
+\def\Vauto@svf#1{\def\Vauto@sfFont{#1}}%
+\def\VautoSfFont{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\Vauto@sbf}{\Vauto@svf}%]    % This is for bracket match 
+}%                                           % ] has no effect on code     
+%%%% Macros to set number of lines per figure
+\def\Vauto@LPP{46}\def\Vauto@LPPa{46}%
+\def\Vauto@TwoLPP[#1]#2{\def\Vauto@LPP{#2}\def\Vauto@LPPa{#1}}%
+\def\Vauto@OneLPP#1{\def\Vauto@LPP{#1}\def\Vauto@LPPa{#1}}%
+\def\VautoLines{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\Vauto@TwoLPP}{\Vauto@OneLPP}%] % Bracket match
+}%
+\def\VautoSubFF{\@ifnextchar[{\Vauto@sbf}{\Vauto@svf}%]
+}%
+\def\xxparse Vzzlabel|#1|{%
+\immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\newlabel{#1}{{\Vauto@LineNo}{\thepage}}}%
+}%
+\def\ifsubstr#1#2#3#4%% #1=string #2=substring, #3=yes, #4=no 
+{%
+  \def\tempa##1#2##2\over_##3\end{%
+  \ifx##3%                                      % can't parse
+  \gdef\Vauto@NotLabel{1}%
+  \else% can parse
+  \gdef\Vauto@NotLabel{0}%
+  \xxparse #1%
+  \fi%
+}%
+\tempa#1\over_\over#2\over___\end%
+}%
+%
+%%Macro which sets beginfigure and endfigure constructions
+%
+\def\Vauto@etab#1#2#3{%  {caption}{label}{prtype}%
+  \ifnum#3<3% 1 or 2 qualifies here
+    \begingroup \normalsize\rm\selectfont%
+      \ifnum\Vauto@NP=1 \caption{#1}\label{#2}%
+        \global\edef\Vauto@Fignum{\thefigure}%
+      \else \vspace{2em}%
+          \centerline{Figure \Vauto@Fignum: #1 (cont.)}%
+      \fi%
+    \endgroup%
+    \end{figure}% 
+    \def\Vauto@PrCnt{\Vauto@LPP}%
+    \ifnum#3=2 \setcounter{figure}{\Vauto@Fignum}\fi%
+  \fi%
+  \ifnum#3>1% 2 or 3 qualifies here
+    \begin{figure}[H]%
+%   \begin{figure}[\theVauto@Plx]%
+    \incr@macv{\Vauto@NP}{1}%
+    \gdef\Vauto@LinePage{0}%
+    \gdef\Vauto@PFlag{1}%
+  \fi%
+  \catcode`\^^M9%
+}%
+%
+%%%% Internal macro that does the work...
+\def\Vauto@sf#1#2#3{\begingroup%
+  \def\verbatim@start{\Vauto@etab{#2}{#3}{3}}%
+  \def\verbatim@finish{\Vauto@etab{#2}{#3}{1}}%
+  \def\verbatim@font{\Vauto@sfFont\selectfont}%
+  \gdef\Vauto@LineNo{0}%
+  \gdef\Vauto@LineLoop{0}%
+  \parskip=0pt%
+  \def\verbatim@processline{%
+    \edef\subz{\noexpand\ifsubstr{\the\verbatim@line}{Vzzlabel}{1}{0}}\subz%
+    \ifnum\Vauto@NotLabel=1%
+      \incr@macv{\Vauto@LineNo}{1}%
+      \incr@macv{\Vauto@LineLoop}{1}%
+      \gdef\Vauto@PFlag{1}%
+      \ifnum\Vauto@LineStart>0% we haven't reached the first line yet...
+        \gdef\Vauto@PFlag{0}%
+        \incr@macv{\Vauto@LineStart}{-1}%
+      \else%
+        \ifnum\Vauto@LineCount=0% we're out of the "printable" region
+          \gdef\Vauto@PFlag{0}%
+        \else%
+          \incr@macv{\Vauto@LineCount}{-1}% decrease the line count
+        \fi%
+      \fi%
+      % debugging...
+      %\typeout{Start: \theVauto@LineStart, Count: \theVauto@LineCount,
+      %  Print: \theVauto@PrintFlag, Loop: \theVauto@LineLoop,
+      %  Mod: \theVauto@LineMod}%
+      \ifnum\Vauto@PFlag=1%
+        \leavevmode%
+        \ifnum\Vauto@LineLoop=\Vauto@LineMod%
+        \llap{{\Vauto@sfLNF\selectfont \Vauto@LineNo}%
+            \ \hskip\@totalleftmargin}%
+          \gdef\Vauto@LineLoop{0}%
+          \else%
+          \llap{\phantom{\Vauto@sfLNF\selectfont 0}\ %
+                \hskip\@totalleftmargin}%
+          \fi%
+        \the\verbatim@line\par%
+        \incr@macv{\Vauto@LinePage}{1}%
+      \else%
+        \ifnum\Vauto@LineLoop=\Vauto@LineMod%
+          \gdef\Vauto@LineLoop{0}%
+        \fi%
+      \fi%
+      \ifnum\Vauto@LinePage=\Vauto@PrCnt \Vauto@etab{#2}{#3}{2}\fi%
+    \fi% End of the loop printing non-labels
+  }%
+  \verbatiminput{#1} \endgroup}%
+%
+\def\Vauto@sfP#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\begingroup%
+  \gdef\Vauto@PrCnt{\Vauto@LPPa}%
+  \gdef\Vauto@NP{0}%    % Number of pages
+  \gdef\Vauto@LineMod{-1}%
+  \gdef\Vauto@LineStart{#1}%
+  \gdef\Vauto@LineCount{#2}%
+  \incr@macv{\Vauto@LineCount}{-\Vauto@LineStart}%
+  \incr@macv{\Vauto@LineCount}{1}%
+  \incr@macv{\Vauto@LineStart}{-1}%
+  \Vauto@sf{#3}{#4}{#5}%
+  \catcode`\^^M`\^^M%
+\endgroup%
+}%
+\def\Vauto@sfN[#1]#2#3#4#5#6{%
+\begingroup%
+  \gdef\Vauto@PrCnt{\Vauto@LPPa}%
+  \gdef\Vauto@NP{0}%    % Number of pages
+  \gdef\Vauto@LineMod{#1}%
+  \gdef\Vauto@LineStart{#2}%
+  \gdef\Vauto@LineCount{#3}%
+  \incr@macv{\Vauto@LineCount}{-\Vauto@LineStart}%
+  \incr@macv{\Vauto@LineCount}{1}%
+  \incr@macv{\Vauto@LineStart}{-1}%
+  \Vauto@sf{#4}{#5}{#6}%
+  \catcode`\^^M`\^^M%
+\endgroup%
+}%
+\def\VautoSubF{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\Vauto@sfN}{\Vauto@sfP}%]
+}%
+\endinput%
+%%%% EOF
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/verbdef.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/verbdef.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..68421134766
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/verbdef.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+% verbdef.sty v0.2 -- Robin Fairbairns 2000/10/06
+\ProvidesPackage{verbdef}[2000/10/06 v0.2 define verbatim csnames]
+
+% This package provides a single command \verbdef
+%
+% Usage:  \verbdef\test|verbatim text|
+%         \verbdef*\testar{with visible spaces}
+%
+% \test (or \testar) above will be defined as robust commands that
+% expand to typeset their `verbatim text' argument in the usual
+% verbatim font (using the visible space symbol in the * case)
+%
+% The  verbatim text argument may be delimited in the same was as the
+% argument of a \verb command (see definition of \test above) or using
+% braces (see definition of \testar command above)
+%
+% Note: if the command you're defining with \verbdef is to be used in
+% a \section-type command, or a \caption, it's going to appear in the
+% table of contents, or list of whatevers; in this case you must
+% define the command *before* the \tableofcontents command (or
+% whatever).  I recommend defining the commands in the preamble of
+% your document.
+
+% This program may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.1
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.1 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX 
+% version 1999/06/01 or later.
+%
+% This program consists of the file verbdef.sty
+
+\newif\ifverbdef@nostar
+\def\verbdef{\verbdef@nostarfalse
+  \@ifstar\@sverbdef\@verbdef}
+\def\@verbdef{\verbdef@nostartrue\@sverbdef}
+
+% set up robustness of the command to be defined, set conditions for
+% reading verbatim text
+\def\@sverbdef#1{\edef\verbdef@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
+  \edef#1{\noexpand\protect
+    \expandafter\noexpand\csname\verbdef@tempa\space\endcsname}%
+  \begingroup
+    \verb@eol@error
+    \let\do\@makeother  \dospecials
+    \toks@{\verbatim@font\@noligs}%
+    \ifverbdef@nostar
+      \@vobeyspaces
+      \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@\frenchspacing}%
+    \fi
+    \@verb@def}
+
+%
+\def\@verb@def#1{%
+  \ifnum`#1=`\{\relax
+    \catcode`\}\active
+    \lccode`\~`\}%
+  \else
+    \catcode`#1\active
+    \lccode`\~`#1%
+  \fi
+  \lowercase{%
+    \def\@tempa##1~{%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\verbdef@tempa\space\endcsname{%
+        {\the\toks@##1}}}}%
+  \afterassignment\endgroup
+  \@tempa}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/version.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/version.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9e8a305a84f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/version.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Version control macros. These let you define environments whose contents
+% will be optionally added to or deleted from the text when you run LaTeX.
+% Usage: place either of the following near the start of your file:
+%     \includeversion{NAME}
+%     \excludeversion{NAME}
+% Here, "NAME" is any name you choose. The first one indicates that text
+% between \begin{NAME} and \end{NAME} will be processed in the normal way.
+% The second indicates that text between \begin{NAME} and \end{NAME} will
+% be totally deleted.
+% You can define environments for as many versions as you want.
+% A ``comment'' environment has already been pre-defined for you with
+% \excludeversion{comment}; you can override this using \includeversion.
+%
+% Example:
+%   \includeversion{abridged}\excludeversion{unabridged}
+%   Text for the
+%   \begin{abridged}
+%      short
+%   \end{abridged}
+%   \begin{unabridged}
+%      long and really longwinded, opaque and boring
+%   \end{unabridged}
+%   version of the paper. Punctuation works correctly\begin{unabridged}
+%   because sphack is used\end{unabridged}.
+%   \begin{comment} This is deleted by default. \end{comment}
+%
+% Stephen Bellantoni 1990, loosely based on "annotation.sty" by Tom Hofmann.
+%
+% Additional Notes:  This package still works in LaTeX2e. Large 
+% tracts of excluded text will likely cause a "TeX capacity exceeded"
+% error though.  See also comment.sty, verbatim.sty, optional.sty.
+%   -- Donald Arseneau      April, 2000
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+ 
+\begingroup
+\catcode`@=11\relax%
+\catcode`{=12\relax\catcode`}=12\relax%
+\catcode`(=1\relax \catcode`)=2\relax%
+\gdef\includeversion#1(%
+  \expandafter\gdef\csname #1\endcsname%
+    ()%
+  \expandafter\gdef\csname end#1\endcsname%
+    ()%
+)%
+\gdef\excludeversion#1(%
+  \expandafter\gdef\csname #1\endcsname%
+    (\@bsphack\catcode`{=12\relax\catcode`}=12\relax\csname #1@NOTE\endcsname)%
+  \long\expandafter\gdef\csname #1@NOTE\endcsname ##1\end{#1}%
+    (\csname #1END@NOTE\endcsname)%
+  \expandafter\gdef\csname #1END@NOTE\endcsname%
+    (\@esphack\end(#1))%
+)%
+\endgroup
+\excludeversion{comment}
+ 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/vertbars.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/vertbars.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9a26bc72c2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/vertbars.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+% vertbars.sty  The VERTical BARS package
+%               An extension to the lineno package
+%               to put vertical rules at left (right)
+%               of lines instead of numbers
+%    The package requires the lineno package
+% author: Peter Wilson, CUA (now at peter.r.wilson@boeing.com)
+% Copyright Peter R Wilson 2000
+% released under the LaTeX Project Public License
+%
+% Instructions are at the end of this file, after \endinput
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{vertbars}[2000/07/25 v1.0 vertical bars]
+
+\newcommand{\LNenv}{runninglinenumbers}
+\DeclareOption{switch}{%
+  \renewcommand{\LNenv}{runningpagewiselinenumbers}
+  \PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}{lineno}
+}
+
+\DeclareOption{switch*}{%
+  \renewcommand{\LNenv}{runningpagewiselinenumbers}
+  \PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}{lineno}
+}
+
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}{lineno}}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+\RequirePackage{lineno}
+
+%%% code to add stuff at start and end of a pre-existing zero argument macro
+\newcommand{\addtodef}[3]{\begingroup
+  \@temptokena{#2}%
+  \toks@\expandafter{#1#3}%
+  \edef\x{\endgroup
+    \def\noexpand#1{\the\@temptokena \the\toks@}}%
+  \x
+}
+
+\newlength{\pwvbbl}
+\setlength{\pwvbbl}{\baselineskip}  % it's useful to preserve \baselineskip
+\newlength{\barwidth}         % width of bars
+\setlength{\barwidth}{0.4pt}
+\newlength{\barspace}         % horizontal space between bars
+\setlength{\barspace}{0.5\linenumbersep}
+
+\newcommand{\addtomakeLNL}{{\rule[-0.25\pwvbbl]{\barwidth}{1.1\pwvbbl}\hskip\barspace\relax}}
+\newcommand{\pwvbLNL}{}
+\newenvironment{vertbar}{\begin{\LNenv}%
+  \addtodef{\pwvbLNL}{}{\addtomakeLNL}%
+  \let\LineNumber\pwvbLNL%
+  }{\end{\LNenv}}
+
+\endinput
+
+% Instructions:
+%
+%    Read the documentation for the lineno package.
+%
+%    The vertbars package takes the same options as the lineno package.
+% In particular, the switch and switch* options control which side
+% of the page any bars will be printed. The package automatically
+% calls the lineno package, so you just need:
+% \usepackage[...]{vertbars}
+%
+%    The package provides one environment, namely the vertbar environment.
+% The vertbar environment is equivalent to the linenumbers environment
+% except that a vertical bar replaces the line number. Text paragraphs 
+% within a vertbar environment will be marked with a vertical bar in 
+% the margin. Nested environments generate multiple marginal bars.
+%
+%    The width of the bars is controlled by the value of \barwidth, which 
+% is initialised to 0.4pt, and can be changed via \setlength.
+%
+%    The horizontal seperation between adjacent bars is controlled by
+% the value of \barspace, which is initialised to 0.5\linenumbersep, and can
+% be changed via \setlength. (\linenumbersep is a command from the
+% lineno package that controls the spacing between line numbers and the
+% text body).
+%
+% NOTE: Bars can only be applied to complete paragraphs. For bars 
+% between arbitrary points, use the changebar package. Any limitations
+% of the lineno package apply equally to the vertbars package.
+%
+% Peter W.
+%
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/vrbexin.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/vrbexin.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f9a15fdc5ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/vrbexin.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+%% 
+%% This is file `vrbexin.sty', modified from vrbinput.sty
+%% 
+%% The original source files were:
+%% 
+%% vrbinput.doc 
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 1994 by Paul Thompson
+%% 
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE: 
+%% 
+%% You are not allowed to change this file. You may however copy this file 
+%% to a different name and then change this copy. 
+%% 
+%% You are NOT ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of this 
+%% file (or a changed version) except for some nominal charge for copying etc. 
+%% 
+%% 
+\def\fileversion{v1.0b}
+\def\filedate{94/06/30}
+\def\docdate{94/06/30}
+%% \CheckSum{82}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%%
+%% Style-option `vrbexin' to use with LaTeX-2e
+%%       and style-option `verbatim' (by Rainer Sch\"opf)
+%% Copyright (C) 1994 by Paul Thompson, all rights reserved.
+\@ifundefined{verbatim@readfile}{}{\endinput}
+\typeout{Style-Option: `vrbexin' \fileversion \space <\filedate> (br)}
+\typeout{English Documentation \@spaces\@spaces\space\space <\docdate> (br)}
+\@ifundefined{verbatim@@@}{\input{verbatim.sty}}{}
+\newread\verbatim@in@stream
+\ifnum\verbatim@in@stream=\@ne
+  \csname newread\endcsname\verbatim@in@stream
+\fi
+\def\verbatim@readfile#1{%
+  \verbatim@start
+  \openin\verbatim@in@stream #1\relax
+  \ifeof\verbatim@in@stream
+    \typeout{No file #1.}%
+  \else
+    \expandafter\endlinechar\expandafter\m@ne
+    \expandafter\verbatim@read@file
+    \expandafter\endlinechar\the\endlinechar\relax
+    \closein\verbatim@in@stream
+  \fi
+  \verbatim@finish
+}
+\def\verbatim@read@file{%
+  \read\verbatim@in@stream to\next
+  \ifeof\verbatim@in@stream
+  \else
+    \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline\expandafter{\next}%
+    \verbatim@processline
+    \verbatim@startline
+    \expandafter\verbatim@read@file
+  \fi
+}
+\def\verbatiminput{\begingroup
+  \@ifstar{\verbatim@input\relax}%
+          {\verbatim@input{\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces}}}
+\def\verbatim@input#1#2{\@verbatim #1\relax
+  \verbatim@readfile{#2}\item[]\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}
+\endinput
+%% 
+%% End of file `vrbexin.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/vruler.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/vruler.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ec38f478f12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/vruler.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,396 @@
+%   VERTICAL RULERS 2.3 Oct 1996 for Latex 2.09 or 2e, plain TeX, amsTeX
+%            by  Zhuhan JIANG, University of New England, Australia NSW 2351.
+%                Email: zhuhan@neumann.une.edu.au
+%
+%   PURPOSE: Make a vertical ruler, numbering consecutively so that
+%            any part of an article can be pinpointed immediately.
+%            Move vruler freely up and down, left and right.
+%         
+%            There are no packages to my knowledge that number lines
+%            one by one without missing certain lines, particularly
+%            when there are many maths equations in the text. So vruler
+%            is a good alternative for people writing text of versatile
+%            format or lots of maths formulas.
+%   COMMANDS:
+%     \setvruler[<SCALE>][<INITIAL_COUNT>][<STEP>][<DIGITS>][<MODE>]%
+%              [<ODD_HSHIFT]>][<EVEN_HSHIFT>][<VSHIFT>][<HEIGHT>]
+%         <general LaTeX material-01>
+%     \unsetvruler  % optional
+%         <general LaTeX material-02>
+%
+%         <SCALE>   distance between two consecutive vruler markings
+%         <INITIAL_COUNT> first marking reading
+%         <STEP>    is the line count increment
+%         <DIGITS>  number of digits required for ruler markings
+%         <MODE> =0 if each page has same vruler marking, =1 if otherwise
+%         <ODD_HSHIFT>  horizontal shift for odd pages
+%                       from the default value for the vruler
+%         <EVEN_HSHIFT> horizontal shift for even pages
+%                       from the default value for the vruler
+%         <VSHIFT>  vertical shift from default value for vruler
+%         <HEIGHT>  height of vertical ruler
+%
+%     \vrulercount   - next mark reading on the vertical ruler
+%
+%     \setdefault{cmdname}{n}{default_1}{..}{default_n} (re)set macro
+%         \cmdname[#1][..][#n] to take default_1 to default_n respectively,
+%         so that \cmdname[][xy] is same as \cmdname[default_1][xy][default..].
+%         You don't need to use \setdefault unless you would like to change
+%         the default setting for macros in vruler.sty or elsewhere.
+%
+%   DEFAULTS:
+%     The parameters of \setvruler admit defaults.
+%     Hence e.g. \setvruler alone is same as
+%         \setvruler[10pt][1][1][4][1][0pt][0pt][0pt][\textheight]
+%     and e.g. \setvruler[][20] is same as \setvruler[10pt][20]
+%
+%   NOTES:
+%     1.  If you are using multicol.sty, then you might want to move
+%         the vruler into the center to separate the columns.
+%
+%     2.  If you use \topskip other than the default value, then
+%         you will have to alter <VSHIFT> and <HEIGHT> parameters
+%         in \setvruler accordingly (which is simple). 
+%
+%     3.  It is best to choose baselineskip as <SCALE> so that line
+%         synchronisation is often optimal. Use e.g. 5+ to denote
+%         the line immediately after marking number 5 if necessary.
+%
+%     4.  In twosided book style in LaTeX2e, the initial numbering
+%         of title page  via  \begin{titlepage} is actually onepage
+%         away. To overcome this, either do not include title page in
+%         the vruler environment, or set initial number #2
+%         to a number (a page ahead) so that the resulting
+%         initial number is what one needs.
+%           
+%     5.  Version 1.0 of VRULER.STY for LaTeX is released in
+%         July 1993.
+%
+%   EXAMPLE:   see end of this file.
+%         You may run the example by simply removing the line 
+%         containing \endinput
+%         
+%BEGINMACROS
+%
+\ifx\VrulerDefined\undefined\let\next\relax\else
+\message{NOT reloaded}\let\next\endinput\fi\next
+\xdef\VrulerDefined{}% avoid TeX output routine manipulated twice.
+%
+\message{2.3 <24/10/96>}%
+%
+{\catcode`\@=11\relax \def\temp@macro{\space\space\space\space}%
+\wlog{\temp@macro VRULER version 2.3 Octorber 1996 By Z Jiang}%
+\wlog{\temp@macro University of New England, Australia}%
+\wlog{\temp@macro Email: zhuhan@neumann.une.edu.au}}%
+\xdef\EntryVruler{\the\catcode`\@}\catcode`\@=11\relax %  SAVE @'s STATUS
+\let\temp@@@macro=\wlog\def\wlog#1{}%
+%
+\newdimen\temp@dim \newdimen\b@xheight\newdimen\lineh@ight 
+\newbox\outputb@x\newbox\bufferbox\newbox\tempb@x
+\newcount\refn@\newcount\tot@l\newcount\rulercount
+\let\@outputpage@backup\@outputpage \let\plainoutput@backup\plainoutput
+%
+% NUMBER with left flushed zeros  \fillzeros[<WIDTH>]<NUMBER>
+\newcount\temp@@ \newcount\temp@
+\def\fillzeros[#1]#2{\temp@@=#2\relax\ifnum\temp@@<0\temp@@=-\temp@@\fi
+\temp@=1 %
+\loop\ifnum\temp@@<10 \else \divide\temp@@ by 10 \advance\temp@ by 1 \fi
+   \ifnum\temp@@=10\relax\temp@@=11\relax\fi \ifnum\temp@@>10 \repeat
+\ifnum#2<0\advance\temp@1\relax-\fi
+\loop\ifnum\temp@<#1\relax0\advance\temp@1\relax\fi \ifnum\temp@<#1 \repeat
+\temp@@=#2\relax\ifnum\temp@@<0\temp@@=-\temp@@\fi \relax\the\temp@@}%
+%
+%  PLAIN TEX adjustment
+\ifx\textheight\undefined 
+  \newdimen \textheight \newdimen \textwidth \textheight=\vsize \textwidth=\hsize
+  \font\tiny=cmr5 \let\c@page\pageno \def\oddsidemargin{0pt}%
+  \let\evensidemargin\oddsidemargin \def\headsep{2\topskip}%
+\fi
+%
+% \makevruler[<SCALE>][<INITIAL_COUNT>][<STEP>][<DIGITS>][<HEIGHT>]
+\def\makevruler[#1][#2][#3][#4][#5]{\begingroup\offinterlineskip
+\textheight=#5\vbadness=10000\vfuzz=120ex\overfullrule=0pt%
+\global\setbox\bufferbox=\vbox to \textheight{%
+{\parskip=0pt\hfuzz=150em\b@xheight=\textheight
+\lineh@ight=#1\global\rulercount=#2%
+\tot@l\b@xheight\divide\tot@l\lineh@ight\advance\tot@l2%
+\refn@1\vskip-\lineh@ight\vskip1ex%
+\loop\setbox\tempb@x=\hbox to0cm{{\tiny\hfil\fillzeros[#4]\rulercount}}%
+\ht\tempb@x\lineh@ight\dp\tempb@x0pt\box\tempb@x\break
+\advance\refn@1\global\advance\rulercount#3\relax
+\ifnum\refn@<\tot@l\repeat}}\endgroup}%
+%
+% MAKE VRULER into \box\outputb@x
+\def\SET[#1][#2][#3][#4][#5][#6][#7][#8][#9]{%
+\ifRuler@Started\else\global\rulercount=#2\fi \global\Ruler@Startedtrue
+\begingroup\hbadness=10000\hfuzz=150em
+\ifnum#5=0\makevruler[#1][#2][#3][#4][#9]\else
+\makevruler[#1][\rulercount][#3][#4][#9]\fi\endgroup 
+\begingroup\vfuzz=120ex\vbadness=10000%
+\global\setbox\outputb@x=\vbox{\b@xheight=\ht\bufferbox
+\hbox{\hskip-50pt % default initial adjustment 
+   \advance\b@xheight#8\lower\b@xheight%
+   \hbox{\ifodd\c@page\hskip#6\else\hskip#7\fi \copy\bufferbox}\nobreak
+   \hskip50pt \nobreak \ifodd\c@page \hskip-#6 \else\hskip-#7 \fi \nobreak
+   \lower\ht\tempb@x\hbox{\box\tempb@x}}}\endgroup }%
+%
+\newtoks\toksone\newtoks\tokstwo\newtoks\toksthree
+\newtoks\toksfour\newtoks\toksfive \newif\ifRuler@Started \Ruler@Startedfalse
+\def\set@vruler[#1][#2][#3][#4][#5][#6][#7][#8][#9]{%
+\ifx\pageno\undefined % this is considered as LaTeX
+    % we assume all LaTeX versions have \@outputpage in the form of
+    % \@outputpage= ...\vbox{ ... \vbox{...}...}... , where 2nd \vbox
+    % contains the true content. 
+  \toksfive=\expandafter{\@outputpage\s@ftymark}%temp toks
+  \long\def\parse@macro ##1\vbox##2##3\s@ftymark{%
+  \def\part@@one{##1}\def\part@@two{##2}\def\part@@three{##3}}%
+  \expandafter\parse@macro\the\toksfive
+  \let\part@one\part@@one \let\part@five\part@@three
+  \toksfive=\expandafter{\part@@two\s@ftymark}%
+  \expandafter\parse@macro\the\toksfive
+  \let\part@two\part@@one \let\part@three\part@@two \let\part@four\part@@three
+  \toksone=\expandafter{\part@one}\tokstwo=\expandafter{\part@two}%
+  \toksthree=\expandafter{\part@three}\toksfour=\expandafter{\part@four}%
+  \toksfive=\expandafter{\part@five}%
+%
+\edef\@outputpage{\the\toksone \noexpand\vbox{\the\tokstwo \noexpand\vbox{%
+  \noexpand\SET[\noexpand#1][\noexpand#2][\noexpand#3][\noexpand#4][\noexpand#5][\noexpand#6][\noexpand#7][\noexpand#8][\noexpand#9]%
+  \noexpand\temp@dim=\noexpand\textheight
+  \noexpand\advance\noexpand\temp@dim by \noexpand\headsep
+  \noexpand\hbox{% box things together
+  \noexpand\rlap{\noexpand\raise\temp@dim\box\outputb@x}%
+  \noexpand\setbox\noexpand\tempb@x=\noexpand\vbox{\the\toksthree}%
+  \noexpand\box\noexpand\tempb@x}\the\toksfour}}\the\toksfive}%
+%
+\else % now for plain TeX
+\def\plainoutput{\textheight=\vsize \SET[#1][#2][#3][#4][#5][#6][#7][#8][#9]%
+  \setbox\tempb@x\vbox{\makeheadline\pagebody\makefootline}%from plain.tex
+  \shipout \vbox {\hbox{\hskip 15pt
+  \rlap{\temp@dim=\textheight\advance\temp@dim by \headsep
+  \raise\temp@dim\box\outputb@x }\hskip-15pt \box\tempb@x }}%
+  \advancepageno \ifnum\outputpenalty>-\@MM \else\dosupereject\fi }%
+\fi}%
+%
+\def\unsetvruler{\Ruler@Startedfalse \let\@outputpage\@outputpage@backup
+                 \let\plainoutput\plainoutput@backup}%
+%
+\ifx\new@measures\undefined\let\setvruler\set@vruler\fi
+%
+% LEAVE MACROS
+\let\wlog\temp@@@macro\let\temp@@@macro\undefined@
+\catcode`\@=\EntryVruler\relax
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% if you delete everything below, the macros are still valid, 
+% except that you have to specify all the macro parameters for
+% \setvruler explicitly and completely
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+\xdef\EntryVruler{\the\catcode`\@}\catcode`\@=11\relax
+%
+%  NEW MEASURES etc (parameter defaulting mechanism given by macros below)
+\def\new@measures{%
+  \def\temp@@macro##1##2##3{\expandafter\ifx\csname ##3temp##2##1\endcsname
+     \relax\edef\next{\noexpand\csname new##1\noexpand\endcsname
+                      \csname ##3temp##2##1\endcsname}%
+     \else\let\next\relax\fi\next}%
+  \def\temp@macro##1{%
+     \temp@@macro{##1}{@}{}\temp@@macro{##1}{@@}{}\temp@@macro{##1}{@@@}{}}%
+  \temp@macro{count}\temp@macro{toks}\temp@macro{box}\temp@macro{read}%
+  \temp@@macro{if}{@}{if}\temp@@macro{if}{@@}{if}\temp@@macro{if}{@@@}{if}%
+  \def\temp@@macro##1{\expandafter\ifx\csname temp##1dim\endcsname
+     \relax\edef\next{\noexpand\csname newdimen\noexpand\endcsname
+                      \csname temp##1dim\endcsname}%
+     \else\let\next\relax\fi\next}%
+  \temp@@macro{@}\temp@@macro{@@}\temp@@macro{@@@}%
+}%
+\let\temp@@@macro=\wlog\def\wlog#1{}\new@measures
+%
+%%% GENERAL STACK
+\def\make@STKcount{\csname newcount\endcsname
+  \STKcount\global\STKcount=0\relax}%
+\ifx\STKcount\undefined@
+  \def\next{\make@STKcount}\else\def\next{}\fi
+\next % ensures stack pointer not flushed if this piece of code
+      % is loaded again
+%
+\long\def\push#1{\global\advance\STKcount1\relax
+\expandafter\gdef\csname STK\the\STKcount\string~\endcsname{#1}}%
+%
+\def\popnil{\expandafter\let\expandafter\temp@macro
+  \csname STK\the\STKcount\string~\endcsname
+  \ifnum\STKcount>0\global\expandafter\let
+    \csname STK\the\STKcount\string~\endcsname=\undefined@
+    \global\advance\STKcount-1%
+  \else
+    \def\temp@macro{}\global\STKcount=0%
+  \fi\relax % \temp@macro for pop
+}%
+%
+\def\pop{\popnil\temp@macro}%
+%
+%% GET PARAMETERS
+\long\def\get@nepara[#1][#2]{{\def\next@{#2}%
+\ifx\next@\empty\push{#1}\else\push{#2}\fi}\ag@in}%
+%
+\long\def\get@para\left@#1\right@{%
+\def\check@{%
+ \ifx[\next@ \def\full@####1{\get@nepara[#1]####1}%
+ \else \def\full@{\get@nepara[#1][#1]}\fi
+ \full@}%
+\futurelet\next@\check@}%
+%
+\long\def\do@nepara\left@#1\right@#2\p@r@end{%
+\gdef\p@r@data{#2}\global\advance\p@r@count1\get@para\left@#1\right@}%
+%
+\def\ag@in{\ifx\p@r@data\empty \def\next@{\relax
+\getp@r@s\run@CMD}\else
+\def\next@{\expandafter\do@nepara\p@r@data\p@r@end}\fi
+\next@}%
+%
+\def\run@CMD{\csname STK\the\STKcount\string~\endcsname}%
+%
+\def\num@to@word#1{\ifcase #1 \or
+   \def\temp@macro{one}\or   \def\temp@macro{two}\or
+   \def\temp@macro{three}\or \def\temp@macro{four}\or
+   \def\temp@macro{five}\or  \def\temp@macro{six}\or
+   \def\temp@macro{seven}\or  \def\temp@macro{eight}\or
+   \def\temp@macro{nine}\else \def\temp@macro{}\fi
+\temp@toks=\expandafter{\temp@macro}}%
+%
+\temp@@count=1 % make nine newtoks, if they don't already exist
+\loop \num@to@word{\temp@@count}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname p@r@\the\temp@toks\endcsname\relax
+    \temp@@toks={newtoks}\expandafter\csname\expandafter\the
+    \expandafter\temp@@toks\expandafter\endcsname
+    \csname p@r@\the\temp@toks\endcsname\fi
+  \advance\temp@@count by 1 \ifnum\temp@@count<10 \repeat
+% 
+\ifx\p@r@count\undefined \newcount\p@r@count\fi
+\long\def\st@ckparas#1\p@r@end{%
+\global\p@r@count=0\gdef\p@r@data{#1}\ag@in}%
+%
+% PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT % use \temp@count
+\def\getp@r@s{\temp@count=\p@r@count
+{\loop
+ \ifnum\temp@count>0 %
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter
+ \temp@macro\csname STK\the\STKcount\string~\endcsname
+ \ifcase\temp@count
+ \or \global\p@r@one=\expandafter{\temp@macro}%
+ \or \global\p@r@two=\expandafter{\temp@macro}%
+ \or \global\p@r@three=\expandafter{\temp@macro}%
+ \or \global\p@r@four=\expandafter{\temp@macro}%
+ \or \global\p@r@five=\expandafter{\temp@macro}%
+ \or \global\p@r@six=\expandafter{\temp@macro}%
+ \or \global\p@r@seven=\expandafter{\temp@macro}%
+ \or \global\p@r@eight=\expandafter{\temp@macro}%
+ \or \global\p@r@nine=\expandafter{\temp@macro}%
+ \else \errmessage{Parameter capacity exceeded.}%
+     % this should never happen:  TeX's max para no. is 9
+ \fi
+ \global\expandafter\let
+ \csname STK\the\STKcount\string~\endcsname=\undefined@%
+ \global\advance\STKcount-1%
+ \global\advance\temp@count-1\relax
+ \fi
+ \ifnum\temp@count>0 %
+\repeat}}%
+%
+\def\clrp@r@s{%GLOBALLY clear
+\global\p@r@one={}\global\p@r@two={}\global\p@r@three={}%
+\global\p@r@four={}\global\p@r@five={}\global\p@r@six={}%
+\global\p@r@seven={}\global\p@r@eight={}\global\p@r@nine={}}%
+%
+\def\read@paras#1{\temp@@@count=1 %use \temp@@@count and \temp@@count
+  \loop \num@to@word{\the\temp@@@count}\csname p@r@\the\temp@toks\endcsname={}%
+      \advance\temp@@@count by 1 \ifnum\temp@@@count<10 \repeat
+  \temp@@@count=1 \temp@@count=#1 %
+  \def\read@one@para##1{\num@to@word{\temp@@@count}%
+       \def\temp@macro{\left@ ##1\right@}%
+       \temp@@@toks=\expandafter{\temp@macro}%
+       \csname p@r@\the\temp@toks\endcsname\expandafter{\temp@macro}%
+       \advance\temp@@@count by 1 \read@continue}%
+  \def\read@continue{\num@to@word{\temp@@@count}% which uses \temp@macro
+       \ifnum\temp@@@count>\temp@@count \let\next@@\make@default
+          \edef\temp@@macro{\the\p@r@one\the\p@r@two\the\p@r@three\the\p@r@four
+          \the\p@r@five\the\p@r@six\the\p@r@seven\the\p@r@eight\the\p@r@nine}%
+       \else \let\next@@\read@one@para
+       \fi \next@@}\read@continue}%
+%
+\def\make@@default#1#2{\temp@count=#2\relax \temp@@count=1 %used \temp@@macro
+  \loop \num@to@word{\temp@@count}%
+      \ifnum\temp@@count>\temp@count \csname p@r@\the\temp@toks\endcsname={}%
+      \else \csname p@r@\the\temp@toks\endcsname
+            =\expandafter{\expandafter[\expandafter
+            \the\csname p@r@\the\temp@toks\endcsname]}\fi
+      \advance\temp@@count by 1 %
+      \ifnum\temp@@count<10 \repeat
+  \edef\temp@macro{\the\p@r@one\the\p@r@two\the\p@r@three\the\p@r@four
+       \the\p@r@five\the\p@r@six\the\p@r@seven\the\p@r@eight\the\p@r@nine}%
+  \temp@toks=\expandafter{\temp@macro}%
+  \temp@@toks=\expandafter{\temp@@macro}%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp@macro\csname #1\endcsname
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1@ raw\endcsname\relax
+      \expandafter\let\csname #1@ raw\endcsname\temp@macro\fi
+  \expandafter\edef\csname#1\endcsname{%
+      \noexpand\push{\noexpand\edef\noexpand\next@@{%
+      \noexpand\noexpand \noexpand \csname \noexpand#1@ raw\noexpand\endcsname
+      \the\temp@toks}%
+  \noexpand\popnil\noexpand\clrp@r@s\noexpand\next@@}\noexpand\st@ckparas
+      \the\temp@@toks \noexpand\p@r@end}}%
+%
+% \setdefalut{cmdname}{n}{default1}{..}{default_n}
+%  then \cmdname[#1][..][#n] can be defaulted.
+\def\setdefault#1#2{\def\make@default{\make@@default{#1}{#2}}\read@paras{#2}}
+%
+% best strategy (e.g) to define \foo[#1][#2]{#3} so as to default #1 and #2
+% while making #3 compulsory in brace bracket.
+%    1.  define \foo@[#1][#2]#3 as normal (what you wish)
+%    2.  define \foo[#1][#2]#{\foo@[#1][#2]} to make {#3} mandatory
+%    3.  use \setdefault{foo}{2}{one}{two} to default #1=one and #2 to two
+%
+% DEFAULT MECHANISM END: this piece of code can be included in any
+% package and can be reloaded any times without overruning the resources.
+% 
+%%%%%%%  make defaults %%%%%%%%%%%
+\setdefault{setvruler}{9}{12pt}{1}{1}{4}{1}{0pt}{0pt}{0pt}{\textheight}%
+%
+\let\wlog\temp@@@macro\let\temp@@@macro\undefined@
+\catcode`\@=\EntryVruler\relax
+\endinput
+%
+%ENDMACROS
+% 
+% Application example
+\documentstyle[vruler,twoside]{article}
+       \setlength{\textwidth}{2.5in}
+       \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{3cm}
+       \setlength{\evensidemargin}{6cm}
+       \overfullrule=0pt \parindent=0pt
+\begin{document}
+\advance\textwidth 3cm %2cm is better for plain TeX
+\setvruler [][][][][][\textwidth]
+         This is a simple example, in which we have
+         placed vertical rulers on the left for
+         odd numbered pages and on the right for
+         even numbered pages. \newpage
+
+         This is the second page and is thus an even
+         numbered page. Please see that the vertical
+         ruler is now on the right, and is approximately
+         of the same distance from the text margin as
+         the vertical ruler on the first page from
+         the left margin there. \newpage
+\unsetvruler
+         The following pages, in fact only this page, will
+         not be appended with the vertical rulers.\newpage
+\setvruler[][\rulercount]
+         This page will be added with the vertical ruler again.
+         Here the numbering marking of the vertical ruler picks
+         up where it was left. Nevertheless, we may start with
+         any new number. \newpage
+
+         This is another page. Please see that both this and
+         the previous pages have vruler on the left side.
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/ziffer.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/ziffer.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..714ad04de76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/ltxmisc/ziffer.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+
+% ziffer.sty v2.1
+%
+% Author:
+%
+% M. V\"ath      vaeth@mathematik.uni-wuerzburg.de
+%
+%
+% This package provides the macros
+% \ZifferAn        (equivalent with \ZifferPunktAn \ZifferStrichAn )
+% \ZifferAus       (equivalent with \ZifferPunktAus\ZifferStrichAus)
+% \ZifferPunktAn
+% \ZifferPunktAus
+% \ZifferStrichAn
+% \ZifferStrichAus
+%
+% If \ZifferAn was used, then in numbers in math-mode the following happens:
+%   `.' is used as a `one-thousand separator' as common in Germany
+%   `,' is used as a decimal separator as common in Germany
+%  `--' generates a -- with better spacing (e.g. in 1.000,-- )
+%
+% You may still use the symbols `.' `,' and `-' in other context in math mode.
+%
+% The first two conversions are switched on by default, the last conversion has
+% to be switched on explicitly (this has been changed in v2.1):
+% You may switch on/off the conversions with
+% \ZifferPunktAn/\ZifferPunktAus   (for the first two conversions) respectively
+% \ZifferStrichAn/\ZifferStrichAus (for the last conversion).
+%
+% The reason why the last conversion is not on by default (and why it might be
+% necessary to [temporarily] switch off a conversion) is that certain packages
+% (in particular, newer versions of amsmath) cause problems with it.
+%
+% There were some discussions which should be the correct output of the
+% above conversions (in particular, of `--').
+% If you do not like my choice: You may customize (i.e. redefine) the macros
+% \ZifferLeer and \ZifferStrich
+% after loading the package to produce the `one-thousand separator'
+% respectively the `--'.
+%
+% All above command-names are in German, because I had expected that this
+% package is only needed for German texts. Meanwhile, I learned that also
+% other countries use this strange convention for numbers. However, for
+% downward compatibility, I decided to keep the name conventions anyway
+% (after all, the name of the package is in German anyway).
+
+\ifx\newcommand\undefined\else
+  \newcommand{\ZifferAn}{}
+  \newcommand{\ZifferAus}{}
+  \newcommand{\ZifferPunktAn}{}
+  \newcommand{\ZifferPunktAus}{}
+  \newcommand{\ZifferStrichAn}{}
+  \newcommand{\ZifferStrichAus}{}
+  \newcommand{\ZifferLeer}{}
+  \newcommand{\ZifferStrich}{}
+\fi
+
+\def\ZifferAn{\ZifferPunktAn\ZifferStrichAn}
+\def\ZifferAus{\ZifferPunktAus\ZifferStrichAus}
+\def\ZifferPunktAn{\mathcode`,="8000\mathcode`.="8000\relax}
+\def\ZifferPunktAus{\mathcode`,="613B\mathcode`.="013A\relax}
+\def\ZifferStrichAn{\mathcode`-="8000\relax}
+\def\ZifferStrichAus{\mathcode`-="2200\relax}
+\def\ZifferLeer{\phantom{.}}
+\ifx\textrm\undefined
+  \def\ZifferStrich{\hbox{-\kern0.1em-}}
+\else
+  \def\ZifferStrich{\textrm{-\kern0.1em-}}
+\fi
+
+\mathchardef\ziffer@CommaMy="013B
+\mathchardef\ziffer@CommaOri="613B
+\mathchardef\ziffer@DotOri="013A
+\mathchardef\ziffer@MinusOri="2200
+{\ZifferAn
+ \catcode`\,=\active\gdef,{\begingroup\obeyspaces\futurelet\n\ziffer@ccheck}
+ \catcode`\.=\active\gdef.{\begingroup\obeyspaces\futurelet\n\ziffer@dcheck}
+ \catcode`\-=\active\gdef-{\begingroup\obeyspaces\futurelet\n\ziffer@mcheck}}
+\def\ziffer@ccheck{\ziffer@check\ziffer@CommaMy\ziffer@CommaOri}
+\def\ziffer@dcheck{\ziffer@check\ZifferLeer\ziffer@DotOri}
+\def\ziffer@mcheck{\ifx\n-\def\n-{\endgroup\ZifferStrich}%
+   \else\def\n{\endgroup\ziffer@MinusOri}\fi\n}
+\def\ziffer@check#1#2{%
+  \ifx\n1\endgroup#1\else
+    \ifx\n2\endgroup#1\else
+      \ifx\n3\endgroup#1\else
+        \ifx\n4\endgroup#1\else
+          \ifx\n5\endgroup#1\else
+            \ifx\n6\endgroup#1\else
+              \ifx\n7\endgroup#1\else
+                \ifx\n8\endgroup#1\else
+                  \ifx\n9\endgroup#1\else
+                    \ifx\n0\endgroup#1\else
+                      \endgroup#2%
+                    \fi
+                  \fi
+                \fi
+              \fi
+            \fi
+          \fi
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+\ZifferPunktAn